Home

User Manual

1. works fine If some commands require semicolons and parentheses you have to put the problematic command in a shell script and use it in the command list instead J Means a List woe Comma separates items in a list Most commas are optional in Qedit Means Copy or Calculate wom Equal sign usually means copy something Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual add 5 inclfile copy inclfile into your file add 5 10 20 copy lines 10 20 after line 5 text w2 wl build w2 and copy w1 into it Equal sign at the start of a command means to calculate something 10 25 evaluate the expression Result 35 0 lt Means Move I O Redirection or Backward Page Less than lt in the Add command means to move the lines instead of copying them add 5 lt 10 20 move lines 10 20 after line 5 Less than lt in an HP UX command means to read input from an external file a out lt test script Less than lt in the Visual home line means to move backwards one or more pages gt lt 3 move back 3 pages after Enter or F7 gt Means Forward Page I O Redirection Modify or Qhelp Greater than gt in the Visual home line means to move forward one or more pages gt gt 5 move ahead 5 pages Greater than gt in an HP UX command means redirection of output to a file other than stdlist ls gt 1ls result The gt symbol is used
2. Initially lt null gt The default name for Keep is the same name as the last Text or full Keep command if any A full Keep is one without a limiting range or margins The default is invoked when you do a Keep without any parameters You can set the default name with this command If you do not specify a file name the default Keep name is erased as if this was a brand new file If you erase the default Keep name or replace it with a new name the saved modification timestamp is erased Set Keep Num ON OFF Initially ON Keep files may or may not have sequence numbers In standard COBOL files the sequence numbers are in columns through 6 In all other files they are in the last eight columns When Qedit copies in an external file it remembers whether that file was numbered or not if not new sequence numbers are assigned to each line in the workfile When you set the language to Job or Text Qedit turns the Num flag Off This means that default Keeps of these files will be without sequence numbers You can always override the Qedit default by doing an explicit Set Keep Num prior to the Keep Set Keep Var ON OFF Initially ON Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual All HP UX files are inherently variable length However if you turn Set Keep Var Off Qedit UX will keep your file with trailing spaces appended to each record to fill them out to the current Set Length value There will still be
3. Set Term Columns is effective only for Line mode When you enter Visual mode Qedit may adjust your display width to suit the file being edited and resets the width when you exit completely from Visual mode or Qedit Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual If you have set RCRTMODEL to 1234 Qedit assumes the terminal or emulator has limited capabilities Qedit assumes the display width can only be changed manually So if Set Term Columns is used Qedit displays Please change display width and press Enter and waits for confirmation from the user When you execute a command via the Home line and find yourself at the Next Visual prompt Qedit may not have reset your display width because you often immediately press Return to go back into Visual mode Flipping the width frequently is slow erases your display memory and sometimes causes irritating screen flicker Text Set Text Exclusive ON OFF Cobolfixed ON OFF Initial Exclusive OFF Cobolfixed OFF Exclusive Access Control When you text in a file Qedit creates a workfile and copies the contents of the original file into it The original file is then closed This means that other users on the system can text in the file and make changes of their own This is great for concurrency but not so great for version control A new option Set Text Exclusive provides increased control over files that you are editing To enable simply enter Set Tex
4. Set Visual XX defines the lines that should be excluded from the full screen mode display Excluded lines are replaced by a single line Excluded Area 10 34 5 This line shows the line numbers which are currently excluded If no parameters are specified the current excluded area is reset An Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual excluded area must have a start and an end line If only startline is specified the excluded area is incomplete An appropriate message is going to be displayed on the status line next time the user goes into full screen mode To complete the excluded area enter another Set Visual XX command with another line number This number is going to be used as the endline Of course you can specify both startline and endline ona single command Set Visual XX 5 Sets the start line XX incomplete Set Visual XX 10 Sets the end line XxX 5 10 Set Visual XX 5 10 Sets XX to 5 10 Labels in Line Mode This is not a Set command but an environment variable value Normally Qedit always displays the modes keys except within Visual mode You have the option of displaying the User Keys instead or removing the labels from the screen This is done by setting a shell variable before running Qedit SRLABELDEFAULT 2 export RLABELDEFAULT S setenv RLABELDEFAULT 2 C shell Valid values for this variable are as follows 0 don t care Qedit displays modes 1 terminal has N
5. 104 Qedit Commands Copies one or more columns to a different location on the same line COLCOPY source source2 destination destination2 rangelist Q no display J verify T CobX Tag Default rangelist Colcopy copies text in columns specified by source and source to the destination columns specified by destination and destination2 in the lines of rangelist Even though Colcopy can modify multiple lines using a rangelist it really operates on one line at a time You can not copy columns from one line to another Source and destination columns always represent the original location All changes are based on that assumption If source only is specified Qedit copies just that column length of 1 If destination only is specified the source columns are inserted at that location If you wish to replace a single column enter a destination range where destination and Destination2 are the same e g Colcopy 1 10 10 list 1 1 abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz feoleopy 1 10 insert column 1 at column 10 a8 abcdefghiajklmnopaqrstuvwxyz 1 line changed colcopy 1 5 10 insert columns 1 5 at column 10 1 abcdefghiabcdejklmnopqrstuvwxyz 1 line changed If destination and destination2 are specified text in these columns is replaced by the source text If the source text is narrower or wider the line is shortened or expanded as needed colcopy 1 10 15 copy column 1 to columns 10 15 1 abcdefghiap
6. Access Log Every time a Qedit client makes a connection to the server process an entry is written to the access log file in which the IP address of the client is logged Qedit attempts to find the symbolic name of the client IP address by reverse name DNS lookup If this lookup is not enabled Qedit writes the numeric form of the IP address to the log file Error Log Any error conditions encountered by the Qedit server process are written to the error log file If you suspect a problem between the client and the server start your diagnosis by looking at the end of this log file Trace Log By default Qedit does not log messages to the trace log file However you can enable trace file logging by using the Debug command in the Option menu of the Qedit client The trace log file can grow to become very large because Qedit messages are constantly being added to it These messages assist in understanding the communication between the Qedit server process and the Qedit client In many cases their detailed information is the only way to diagnose a problem Log File Names By default the Qedit server assumes that the log files are located in this directory opt robelle log qedit If you have installed Qedit in a different directory Qedit should be able to detect its new location automatically and adjust the log files location accordingly If you prefer you can explicitly change the default directory of the log files by using th
7. You can use the Set Right command to define a right margin for the lines in your file Any data beyond the margin will remain unchanged as you edit the data to the left of the margin You can also set a left margin with Set Left Shifting The Qedit string window has an option to match strings even if they differ in case If you want to match speed demon SPEED DEMON or even Speed Demon do list speed demon upshift If you want to change the case of letters in your text use either Proc DOWN downshift entire lines Proc UP upshift entire lines W S D in Qzmodify downshift from cursor to end of line Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual W S U in Qzmodify upshift to end of line or C in Qzmodify reverse case of cursor String Most Qedit commands can specify a string of characters to be searched for in the workfile Only lines containing the string are processed by the command A string is delimited by quote characters SAM or by one of these other special characters WN Se ge 8S The delimiter list can be customized with the Set Stringdelimiters command The maximum length of a string is 80 characters Apostrophe is a valid string delimiter when Set Decimal is OFF handy because is an unshifted key on many keyboards All these delimiters can be used within Qedit commands Some delimiters like the colon cannot be used in an implied search or on the home line gt
8. gt gt d gt r c or u will be put into the current line at the position above where it is placed replacing any existing character Simple replacement also occurs for the editing characters i r c or gt if they are not followed by text or if gt appears at or beyond the current end of line Hpmodify Examples Edit u IXyZ XYZ ixyz ddd d xyz Action First occurrence undoes the previous edits The u must be in column one Second occurrence undoes all edits on the current line The u must be in column one Replaces the current text with xyz starting at the position of r Replaces the current text with xyz starting at the position of x Inserts xyz into the current line starting at the position of the 1 Deletes three characters one above each d Deletes a single character above the d skips one space then replaces the current text with xyz starting Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual at the position of x ddixy Deletes two characters then inserts xyz in the current line starting at the position of the 1 dd Deletes one character above the first d skips two spaces and deletes a second character above the second d It does not delete a range of characters making it unlike the MPE V version of Redo d d gt xyz Deletes a single character above the first d skips two spaces and deletes to the end of the line beginning at the second d and then places xyz at the end of line gt XYZ Appends xyz
9. options 137 list double spaced 145 list of files 150 list of points formatting 130 list without file name on page 144 list without page numbers 144 list without title 144 listing column ranges 137 List Jump 41 141 Listredo command 148 Listundo command 149 LJ Set List option 142 local COBOL tag 227 log file names 74 log files 73 errors 73 long lines 88 looking at the file 40 Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual LP listing 119 137 140 LP Open error 254 Is command 150 Lsort command 151 Margin Justify 130 margin full screen 245 Marginfixed reset in Visual 215 margins 194 201 Add command 89 92 copying lines 90 definition of 280 moving lines 91 margins in Visual 226 marking a block in Screen 36 marking a block in Visual 20 marking a block of lines 248 Maxdata Set 196 maximum line length 194 means multiple commands 84 memory lock 85 281 288 Merge command 152 merge horizontal 152 Merge command justified 152 merging files 152 message line 33 metacharacters 265 missing invalid status line error 257 missing columns 235 missing line feeds 214 MM cut and paste move 20 modification timestamp 134 erase 191 Modify Set 196 setting codes 197 Modify command 42 89 154 197 230 Modify error 254 move by words 35 moving cursor Screen 34 Visual 15 moving lines 90 moving text in Screen 36 moving text in Visual 20 MPE versus HP UX 68 multiple search strings 283 Index 313 N Name Set
10. 97 Change Command C 98 Qedit Commands Changes one string or column range to another string in some or all of your lines There are two basic varieties of Change STRINGS replace one string with another COLUMNS replace a column range with a string Change Changing Strings Replaces one string of characters by another string the two strings being separated by a single quote character CHANGE string1 string2 rangelist Q no display J verify T CobX Tag Default rangelist The string tells Change what string of characters to find The default for string is the last string used and you specify this default via the null string e g change xxx The null string recalls the last string and the window used with it If the target string occurs more than once in a line Qedit changes every occurrence The string2 tells Change what characters to substitute In this format of the Change command only three quote characters are used to define the two strings not four as you would normally expect Another oddity is that string2 does not become the current string This is so that you can do another Change or Find command using as the target i e the last string finding and fixing multiple occurrences of the same string e g find nad CH and F CH and The third difference of string2 is that a null string for this parameter actually means null change very 100 means remove very from li
11. FORM Displays information about a self describing file created by programs such as Suprtool These programs store information about the record layout such as field names data types length FORM LP LPA LPB filename Default filename current Text file If filename is omitted and a workfile is currently active Qedit uses the name of the Text file see Verify Keep An external filename can be specified In this case the name must be the name of the data file If the file is not self describing Qedit displays the following message Error File is not self describing Self describing files on Hp UX have 2 components the data file and the data description file The name of the data description file is the name of the data file followed by the sd extension For example home userl mydata dat data home userl mydata dat sd data description The Form output looks like this Self describing information for home userl mydata dat File home userl mydata dat SD Version B 00 00 Has linefeeds Offset lt lt Sort 1 gt gt Entry Length 80 Blocking LP Listing lp lpa and lpb send output to a device associated with an environment variable of the same name For example to print to the device called Laser with the lpa option you must set the 4LPA environment variable to Laser as in 2export lpa laser If the LP environment variable is not set Qedit will attem
12. LaserJet Listings Qedit has two special options for HP LaserJets duplex and PCL Duplex means double sided printing and PCL means Printer Command Language which is used to select fonts spacing and orientation Duplex for Two Sided Printing Some LaserJets can print on both sides of the paper use List duplex to enable this option list S lp S duplex all PCL Printer Command Language All LaserJets have several sizes of character fonts and can print in either landscape or portrait orientation To help you take advantage of these features Qedit has a number of PCL codes that can do all the work for you PCL stands for Printer Command Language which is the HP standard for printers To specify a LaserJet option for a single listing use List PCL to configure all listings use Set List PCL To disable the special PCL option use PCL 0 Get a quick on line listing of the PCL options with hq set list Changing Fonts and Orientation Landscape Tiny PCL 1 To list to the LaserJet in the tiny font that prints across the paper sideways i e 16 67 pitch landscape use PCL f list device printer pcl 1 all Landscape Regular PCL 2 To list with the regular Courier font in landscape orientation use PCL 2 Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual The Standard PCL 3 The normal default for LaserJet output is portrait orientation across the narrow side with the Courier font However once you insert a font cartridge into your L
13. Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual qux v text Set Text Exclusive OFF Cobolfixed OFF qux t mysource cob 26 lines in file qux v k Set Keep Ascii OFF Cctl OFF COde 0 Lab 0 Num ON Var ON Checktimestamp ON Set Keep COBfree ON NAme users robdev qedit test filelCobFixed Set Keep LF ON qux s text cobolfixed on qux k testcob txt Warning Set Text Cobolfixed is On File will have fixed length records users robdev qedit testcob txt Records 26 Purge existing file no Y qux set keep var on qux t mysource cob 26 lines in file qux v k Set Keep Ascii OFF Cctl OFF COde 0 Lab 0 Num ON Var OFF Checktimestamp ON Set Keep COBfree ON NAme users robdev qedit test filelCobFixed Set Keep LF ON Totals Set Totals ON OFF Default ON Initially ON Shows the number of lines changed deleted added texted and moved by each command The total line is considered a warning or status type message Therefore Set Warnings Off will disable Set Totals as will Option Nowarn in a User Command UDC Set UDC ON OFF filename LOCK Default ON Initially OFF This option does not apply to Qedit UX It is still accepted for compatibility with the MPE version of Qedit Undo Set Undo ON OFF Initially ON in session OFF in batch Undo is the ability to cancel the effect of previous commands that modified your file By default Undo is enabled for interactive use and disabled i
14. Visual Set Visual keyword value Default see Visual The Set Visual command controls how Visual mode operates The following section shows how to change the number of lines per screen how to set where the current line will appear and other options New users should use Set Visual Update On This option does an automatic screen update whenever you press any function key This saves your changes even if you forget to press Enter when changing screens Here are the Set Visual options with the minimal abbreviations shown in capitals Above show 0 to 9 lines above line ATtachmate allow for KEA emulator to widen to 500 columns BELL define printable substitute for Bell Below show 0 to 99 lines below line Blockemulation use block mode emulation in Visual BUF change size of screen buffer Carry carry 0 to 9 lines to next page CLEardisplay clear all of display memory or not Cutcurrent keep cursor near original current line after cut and paste Editonopen return to full screen after Open at Next Command prompt Esc define printable substitute for Esc Field redefine the GG VV field separator HALfbright use fewer enhancements in the status line Hidetags hide 1 2 line tags with display enhancement Home put cursor on home line or line Ignorelf accept screens without line feeds Inschar enable Insert Character on your terminal Qedit Commands 213 214 Qedit Commands Label load function key
15. ACCOUNT a ernan emit couse anaes leant net ea 183 Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Contents v vi Contents HAUITO CONT ch iat sas ne eal et abana seid onl haul Hie A vas hata oan Ne 185 ETE stan Side EAE T eet dias Neg Jae tone Nie Maa Ai ae My pleats a 186 SCI gd Nae a gncetey Wiser as conde A ccumueadoded covnasadsuded Mar a Steers 186 DL Sieraden a ictal sos ae Ro ss e 187 EU sccexsesccnies vied nar aa E ER E REE EA 187 EX Pane tas ice ccriesiscosatvuseiecast a A E A R 188 EXTENTS Enin a a E E T eee 189 BX DPE OG E E EE E E 189 BURSA Gs phsoth sar ana a T A A AE 189 FORTRAN naana a aaa a aaa 189 Halton ehtinee a a Ee E seen eestiaeae 190 Hintsanen e a a a S EER 190 Hppath einen inan aa a a E ads cade a hae ORAA 190 ETEA EO E E E E E E A Seaabiseoss 190 Tnteractiye sseni a a sede as Ee 191 JUSt Yenii a a a a a teenies 191 Keeperin nE E E i 191 Language ousinanoroi acn a east a A a a ER AES 195 LD S EEA EEEE E E E A A A AST 198 Lenth einen e a E R RREAN 198 DiDi a a E E 198 Timis esaa ae a e a AT siead uk 198 E E EE ecb OE T EEE E She aes 199 Mada a a states a a a h n aa 200 Modify eiorinn a e a estado aeiaai teas 200 OPen a i e a a a E A Ea cadens 202 Patteri eae een e A a a e a E e aN Aa 203 Priority sash estas En A a a a a 203 PROUD is veisucs css ae e e a E A Aah ade 203 Red ee a a aa aa a EAS 204 WTO ge oi radia ae cgsiiedans E E E E E E R R R ae 205 RE filename sso died auch ic vaste en h E E A E 205 S 1U D rE E wh
16. End a character class A If first character in character class negate class Subpattern start Subpattern end Anchor Characters In general a regexp can find a match anywhere in the text as long as it appears on a single line There are two exceptions to this rule The start of line and the end of line anchors They are called anchors for very good reasons These anchors actually indicate that the match must occur at fixed positions within the line The start of line anchor specifies that the string must appear at the very beginning of the line If you enter abc the line will be selected only if the string abc is the first thing on the line Thus abcdefghij will be selected xyzabec will not be selected Similarly the end of line anchor specifies that the string must appear as the last thing on the line In this example abc the lines must end with the string abc There must not be anything else after it not even spaces abcdef will not be selected xyzabec will be selected You can combine the anchors to verify that lines contain only a certain string and nothing else Simply use abc Every line has a start and an end anchor If you search for the start or the end anchor or by itself Qedit matches all the lines in the file Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Character Class Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual TIP If you edit your file in full screen mode with Set Visual Home Of
17. File Formats Introduction Qedit Workfiles This appendix describes the format of Qedit workfiles and external files The Qedit workfile provides both random and sequential access to variable length lines of text The workfile is broken into blocks Each block contains several Qedit lines the exact number depends on the length of the lines The lines in a block have contiguous line numbers and are extracted from the block by Qedit Block 0 of the workfile has a special format because it contains the control and indexing information The first Qedit line is always in block 1 and the start of block 1 points to the next sequential block in the file which need not be block 2 Each block points to the next and end of file occurs when the forward pointer is zero There are three different formats of Qedit workfiles original Jumbo and Wide Jumbo All formats work in Qedit for MPE and Qedit for HP UX but the default for MPE is the original format while the default for HP UX is Wide Jumbo Original Format Workfiles Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual The original Qedit workfiles have a block size of 512 bytes and can hold up to 65 535 lines with a maximum length of 256 characters Within an original format data block the structure is as follows File Formats 265 Word Within Block Contents Comment Forward pointer First word in block Line number First word of first line cont Data and Indent Descriptor for first line
18. Keep filename XEQ assign xeq access Keep filename IFDIRTY only if changes made Keep filename LF insert Newline delimiters Keep filename NOLF Do not insert Newline delimiters Keep creates a new disc file named filename You can combine several options on the same Keep command The default filename is the name of the last Text or full Keep i e it does not count if you use a rangelist or have reduced the margins with Set Left or Set Right If filename already exists Qedit will ask you to verify that it is okay to purge it unless you specify the YES or NO option Sometimes the file will have sequence numbers in each line this is called numbered but you can omit the sequence numbers with KQ or by specifying the UNN option Keep transfers rangelist lines from the workfile to filename The default rangelist is ALL Warning Qedit writes only the data within the current left and right margins so reset the margins first if you want the entire line e g Set Left Set Right Examples Qedit Commands 133 134 Qedit Commands text src report cob make a copy Scratch file find FUNCTION CODE 14 05 FUNCTION CODE PIC X8 change X8 X10 14 05 FUNCTION CODE PIC X10 keep src new cob create a new file do some more changes keep save again with same name src new cob of records 127 Purge existing file No yes you must authorize purge s left l s right 50 define margins as first 50 columns kq
19. Now if you want to see what the whole thing looks like type List ALL at the slash prompt list all 1 MEMO TO Drama Staff News Simulation Dept 1 DATE November 18 2000 22 FROM Marie Reimer Publicity Dept Please check your in baskets daily and respond to your fan mail within a week Looking at the File The command for looking at the file is List But you can do much more than List ALL For example you can list a file you re not even working on Our sample memo is a temporary file in your group named Qeditscr but you could look at a file in another group now without harming the memo by typing for example list etc profile The file etc profile may be scrolling by on your screen but don t panic If you change your mind about looking at it you can stop the listing by holding down the Control key and pressing Y You may choose to look at just a small part of the file To prove that the memo although temporarily gone from your screen is not lost forever look at two lines of it 40 Getting a Quick Start with Line Mode Editing Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual list 3 4 3 FROM Marie Reimer Publicity Dept 4 Instead of listing all you limited the range of lines to be listed A range of lines called a rangelist can have specific line numbers such as 3 in the above example words like first and last relative line numbers such as 3 means the third line back or 10 tenth line ahead or
20. Split the current line at the cursor into two lines and modify both of them Note that Y restores the text if you decide not to make the change but you have to manually remove the second split off line Examine redisplay the current line Terminates modify without changing the current line Shifts into word processor mode In word processor mode the next control character is used to select a function The functions are Compress multiple blank spaces to single blank spaces Delete Word Deletes from the cursor to the next blank and then any following blanks up to but not including the next nonblank Toggles a flag that remembers if you have an HP 110 or an HP 2640 The flag is needed because the HP 110 knows only a subset of the standard HP 26xx escape sequences and some of them incorrectly Draws a ruled line similar to the ListT command Toggles Numbered mode A line number prefix will be displayed in front of a line of text only if both of the following are true line numbers have been requested either via a Modify command from Qedit or via W N the line number was passed to Qzmodify by Qedit i e you did an Modify command not an ModifyQ command Delete all characters from the cursor up to but not including character lt c gt Note lt c gt must be a printable ASCII character character code gt 31 If the cursor is currently on the same lt c gt it is deleted immediately before loo
21. The Set commands let you configure Qedit so it has the ideal defaults for your shop e g Set Lang Cobol Here is a typical Qeditmegr file These are default qedit values for all users set lang cobolx all on set x date list off mark changed lines with date set check on verify delete format of gt 5 lines set list page on lp listings interpret page z list last define z command For details on Set commands refer to the Qedit Commands chapter If one set of defaults is not appropriate for everyone on your system it is possible to set up personal Qeditmegr files in each user s home directory See the chapter Running Qedit on HP UX for details On Line vs Batch Access You normally run Qedit as an on line session You type Qedit commands on your terminal and Qedit prints responses on your terminal If you redirect stdin or stdlist Qedit assumes that it is in batch Qedit in batch is almost identical to Qedit on line except for answering questions When Qedit asks a question in batch no one is there to answer it Therefore Qedit does not expect an answer from stdin Qedit assumes that you want your batch task to complete so it always selects the option that will complete the command successfully This is normally a YES answer as in yes clear the file or yes upshift the line Qedit prints the question on stdlist as well as the answer that it has selected for you When Qedit encounters an error in
22. This is the file created by a Keep command e UNNUMBERED text files Records with no line number field These are created by a KQ command or by Keep file UNN The language is set to Data File Names A filename is any valid HP UX file name and is used in Qedit commands to identify a workfile for editing Open New Text or an external file to be accessed in some way Add Keep List Text and Use Qedit accepts file names up to 240 characters long containing underbars _ and dashes The following commands all contain valid file names open gedt3pl source open file for editing work add 50 1 abcd pub copy in lines from a file new gedt3p2 qedit create a new Qedit workfile keep test c convert workfile to Keep file text GREEN BOB temp dash list GREEN BOB temp_underbar File names that include special characters might cause problems to Qedit For example Text file name Error Extra or invalid character in Text command If you run into this you can use the file keyword instead The file keyword can be used wherever a file name is expected such as in the Text Add List commands The syntax is Sfile filename File is a reserved keyword which is followed by an optional equal sign and the file name enclosed in string delimiters Without doing anything to the string Qedit tries to open the specified file The previous example now becomes Text Sfile file name 10 lines in file Full S
23. This may cause unexpected behavior if opened with versions prior to 5 4 11 Because trailing spaces are now treated as significant characters Keep files created from these workfiles may be different from Keep files created with an older version Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Wraparound Set Wraparound chars ON OFF Default ON Initially OFF The Wraparound option is intended to make line overflow in the Add command more friendly When it is enabled and a line overflow occurs during entry of new lines Qedit splits the long line between two words and prompts you with the overflow words on the next line An appropriate continuation line is generated for FORTRAN and COBOL source files There is no wraparound capability in Visual mode due to limitations of the HP terminals The Reflection for DOS terminal emulator however can do wraparound in Visual mode See Set Visual Wrap for details The chars option allows you to specify the maximum number of characters you will be able to type before pressing the Return key You can specify any number of chars between 150 and 5000 When Wraparound is ON and no chars parameter is specified the default maximum number of characters that you can type before pressing Return is 256 When you do an Add command you can burst enter an entire page without looking at the screen Do not press Return at the end of each line just keep typing Qedit will put
24. Visual command is described only briefly in this section see the chapter Getting A Quick Start with Full Screen Editing for full details Here are general guidelines that apply to using the Qedit commands Abbreviations Each Qedit command has a name such as List that you can abbreviate to any leading subset Thus L means List Some commands require more than one letter GARbage DEStroy RENumber SHut VIsual You may append option letters to the command Q T or J Q means quiet T means template and J means various things depending on the command Qedit Commands 83 84 Qedit Commands fully spelled out maximal abbreviation list quietly list quietly with template list quiet jumping with template most recent external file name Set Decimal command Shut command Uppercase or Lowercase You can enter the commands in uppercase or lowercase Shell commands such as Is and cd can only be in lowercase These commands are identical LIST ALL uppercase list all lowercase Multiple Commands per Line You can enter several commands on a single line if you separate them with semicolons The maximum command line is 256 characters and is not supported for continuation If you want to have an HP UX command or a calculator command in the stack you should enclose it in parentheses This prevents Qedit from passing the rest of the line as parameters For example List 5 find name tes
25. When disabled an Open command is treated as any other command In other words Qedit continues to prompting for more commands until you explicitly tell it to go into full screen mode Esc Set Visual Esc nnn char Default None If you edit text containing Esc characters most will appear as dots with a at the left of the line Otherwise the escape sequence would be executed by your terminal and be lost To get around this problem you can define another character as a translation for the Esc character For example Set Vis Esc defines as meaning Esc When Visual needs to print an Esc on the screen it prints a instead When Visual sees any on the screen it converts it into an Esc internally To avoid every valid occurrence of an alias character turning into an Esc Visual mode looks for alias characters that already occur Any line with a valid alias in it is printed with a and Visual will not let you update it use Modify instead Field Set Visual Field nnn char Default When you divide a line with VV or glue lines with GG Qedit looks for a special character in the first line as the field separator The field separator is the tilde by default but you can redefine it to another character with Set Vis Field if you have many natural occurrences of the tilde in your text For example Set Vis Field redefines the field separator as Halfbright Set Visual Halfbright ON Default Off The
26. and Press keypad 5 again to move by full words Qedit defines a full word as a sequence of non blank characters For example if a b contains these 2 full words if and a b Press keypad 5 once again to return to move by single character Editing the Text Lines You revise the screen image by using these keys Key ction S Return Insert mode split line at current position Overwrite mode move to start to next line Backspace Delete previous character Insert mode rest of line shifts left Overwrite mode rest of line unchanged At start of line join line to previous line Toggle insert overwrite mode Remove Delete character at current cursor location rest of line shifts left Getting a Quick Start with VT Full Screen Editing 35 Insert blank line above current line Delete line at current cursor U Search and Replace a Undo changes to current line before you move cursor off the line In Search and Replace Qedit asks you three pieces of information the string to search for the string to replace with and the search options The search options are the same as the ones in the Find String function which is documented in the following section Control Functions To return from Screen mode to Line mode Key AE Exit to Line mode Browsing Through Your File key pen SSCS You can go to a specific line number by pressing G The first line in the file is line 1 You can quickly go to line
27. and the last 1 000 are retained Use the Listredo command to display the previous commands You can redo a single command a range of commands or the most recent command whose name matches a string The Redo command uses MPE style commands D I R U and gt to modify a line The following are some common commands A complete list of commands appears at the end of this section The default mode is to replace characters To delete type DDDD under the characters to be removed To insert type I under the insertion spot then the new characters To undo your changes type U To append to the end of the line use gt xxx To delete from the end of the line use gt DD To replace at the end of the line use gt Rxxx And to erase the rest of the line use D gt See below for a complete list of edits Examples ls users obb bob is not spelled right users obb not found Redo redo most recent command ls users obb last command is printed bob you enter changes to it ls users bob the edited command is shown you press Return listredo all redo redo 5th command in stack redo redo previous command redo redo command before previous redo redo 8th through 10th redo redo 10 through last redo redo last rm command redo redo last rm test c redo redo last containing test Editing in Redo Redo uses the same edits as the MPE iX Redo command except that control characters in lines are pri
28. back or a to move forward lt hh gt is any pair of hexadecimal digits Note When modifying a line longer than 79 characters some commands e g D B E will not update any line of the screen display other than the one you are on Whenever you want to see an accurate display of your text line press X to refresh the display This limitation could be fixed but only at the cost of slowing down response time while editing these longer lines Note You cannot use the special keys on an HP terminal e g cursor keys insert char delete char clear because they are designed to either send no characters to the computer when they are pressed or two characters and both of these choices cause difficult problems unless you are on an HP e3000 with a Type Ahead Engine Thus these keys should not be used If you use them by accident a X will refresh the display of the line you are editing Qedit Commands 163 164 Qedit Commands Qzmodify with a Type Ahead Engine The Type Ahead Engine TAE from Telamon can be in one of three states from the Qzmodify viewpoint disabled enabled or ignored Each is defined below Ignored Qzmodify will not do anything to either encourage the use or discourage the use of the TAE This is usually the initial state see below Enabled Qzmodify will place the TAE in single character mode at entry and restore it to Line mode at exit This means that the HP3000 won t lose typed ahead
29. could need to write COBOL PowerHouse or other programs and to prepare documentation Therefore Qedit has Line mode for batch editing and full screen mode for interactive editing On HP terminals Qedit s full screen mode is called Visual mode On VT terminals Qedit s full screen mode is called Screen mode See Getting a Quick Start with VT Full Screen Editing on page 31 As of HP UX 11 0 HP has dropped support for block mode terminals For this reason full screen editing as implemented on HP3000 computers only works on HP UX versions earlier than 11 0 On HP UX 11 0 or later full screen editing is available in Screen mode Set Visual Screen On on VT type terminals or in Visual Blockemulation emulation Set Visual Blockemulation On on HP type terminals As its name implies Blockemulation emulates block mode operations by reading each line one by one instead of reading the whole screen in a single operation Depending on the type of connection this process might take a few seconds as the cursor moves down the screen Qedit s Visual mode is a powerful but friendly full screen editor designed specifically for programmers It gives you full access to the editing capabilities of your terminal in block mode with low system overhead You can move copy mark and delete blocks of text with Visual s cut and paste functions and page backward and forward through your file with function keys To use Visual mode you must have an HP term
30. e The TERM variable has been exported Use export to see a list of your exported variables e The value used in your TERM variable is a valid terminfo entry Type in untic STERMoruntic terminfo value to check this You can also manually put Qedit into Screen mode by typing in the following command set vis screen on Screen Layout The screen starts with the Status Line several Text Lines and ends with the Message Line 32 Getting a Quick Start with VT Full Screen Editing Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual fip daffy robelle com rlw Reflection for HP File Edit Connection Setup Macro Window Help ll Dw gt h L 4 C1 I var tmp qscr CAfal 7327 You don t have to learn every command in order to use Qedit Hith just a few of the basic functions you can take care of editing job streams programs memos or big text files First find out how to run Qedit on your system Your system manager may have set up an easy way to access Qedit try typing I5qedit Look for a slash prompt on MPE or qux on HP UX uhich tells you Qedit is ready to go This introduction will make the following activities familiar to you adding lines to a file looking at the contents of files searching files for specific characters changing one line or many lines deleting moving and copying lines and saving files In the examples to follow watch for comments on the right hand side en
31. etc The prefix character can be in any column as long as it is preceded by spaces only Even though Qedit allows prefix indentation other programs such as compilers might require prefixes to be in specific columns e g column 1 So as far as Qedit is concerned the following examples are valid Include source lines Sinclude globals source Sinclude constant srcinc include headers include lt strings h gt include parser bnf c include somefile include chapterl book You cannot combine the use and include options Listing C Include Files Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit UX assumes that any include statement such as include lt stdio h gt is a C include file If the file name starts with a letter it is qualified with usr include This is where the standard C include files are located C file names that start with h are ignored because they indicate Include files for rebuilding the HP UX kernel Usefiles The use option is very similar to the include option If you specify the use keyword Qedit will also search any usefiles for a string Usefiles are commonly used in PowerHouse source code Qedit and Suprtool command files and jobs streams that run Qedit and Suprtool list Suse data def The lines that contain the use directive must have the word use as the first word in the line Leading blanks are allowed Everything after the word use i
32. exit Adding Lines to a File Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual You add text with the Add command Qedit numbers each line you add Pressing Return at any spot in the line moves you to a new line This means that you can put a blank line into your text if you press Return twice in a row Qedit continues to add your lines of text until you type two slashes at the beginning of a new line and press Return Try typing Add right now and Qedit moves the cursor and prints some identifying information Getting a Quick Start with Line Mode Editing 39 add remember to press Return QEDITSCR Qedit displays this line Temporary File List 1 and this line too Ds go on Qedit is waiting for you Continue to add by typing in this example MEMO TO Drama Staff News Simulation Dept FROM Marie Reimer Publicity Dept Please check your in baskets daily and respond to your fan mail within a week stop adding for now Qedit is waiting again You can add lines anywhere in the file by typing Add followed by the line number where you want to start your insertion For example if you decide to date this memo type at the slash prompt add 2 2 3 DATE November 18 2000 1 2 2 2S LF You have added line 2 1 for the date and line 2 2 which is blank Line 2 3 is not put into your file since typing the double slash stopped the adding Notice that Qedit used line numbers that would fit between line 2 and line 3
33. metacharacters 265 negated class 269 optional character 267 repeating characters 267 repeating class 269 single character 267 Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual subpattern 271 Regular Expression 287 relative line numbers 284 remapping the keyboard 79 removing columns 101 removing garbage from listings 137 renaming workfile 231 renumber automatic 88 216 Renumber command 176 renumbering 88 176 repeating characters 267 repeating class 269 Replace command 177 replacing a string 35 replacing words 42 replicating a block in Visual 20 reset 700 9x terminal 256 reset cut and paste 21 37 reset Visual Set Visual Stop 60 218 reset ZZ 248 restarting Modify on a line 156 restricting users 195 retain current line 212 Return means display next line 291 Right Justify 127 Set 201 right margin 284 Colmove 108 justify 130 right margin in Visual 245 Right margin Visual 215 RL Set 201 RLABELDEFAULT variable 65 221 Robelle Set Mod option 197 ROBELLE environment variable 67 roll amount 241 roll up function 241 Roman 8 characters 15 89 184 Roman 8 versus ASCII 147 RPCVERSION 132 columns 219 RPCVERSION variable 64 RR cut and paste replicate 21 Run lib 194 restricting 195 running Qedit with Reflection 77 S s option 55 save 47 Index 315 saving function keys 216 scratch file 56 screen layout Screen 32 Visual 13 Screen mode startup 32 troubleshooting 32 scrollup character full screen mode
34. opt robelle If you wish to use a specific path explicitly you need to set the ROBELLE environment variable to the new directory For example export ROBELLE There are two limitations to the path name the full path name of the file must be no more than 240 characters and the path name to the robelle directory must be no more than 219 characters A slash mark is optional at the end of your ROBELLE environment variable To set up the log files in the new directory you have to manually create the log or help subdirectory in the alternate search path So in order to determine the location of support files Qedit goes through the following e Uses the ROBELLE variable if it exists e Ifthe ROBELLE variable does not exist Qedit tries to identify the location it is running from and if successful determines the location based on that information If the information from the previous steps is not available Qedit assumes the files are in the opt robelle directory Converting Qedit Files with qcat Qcat is a filter program similar to cat and zcat Qcat reads a set of Qedit files and prints the lines on standard output Type man qcat for more information Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Running Qedit under HP UX 67 Differences Between MPE and HP UX We have tried to make the MPE and HP UX versions of Qedit as compatible as possible This section describes how Qedit UX is different from Qedit MPE Open Shut Qedit
35. opt robelle help qedit Within the Help command use to see what levels exist beneath you and for help on Help The help file is organized into levels to go back to the previous level press Return instead of entering a keyword Press F8 to exit the QHELP subsystem completely and return to Qedit Use the Prev Page or Page Up key on your terminal to review help already printed Qedit Commands 123 Hold Command HO 124 Qedit Commands Lets you explicitly write lines to the Hold file HOLD filename rangelist Default hold current line Q hold without display J append without erasing You can refer to the current contents of the Hold file by the actual file name hold in any of the commands that access external files Add File List Use Examples hold 50 60 erase Hold hold lines holdj 100 198 append more lines to Hold ho direct hold lines with string open abc src add 33 hold adds held lines to abc src holdq etc profile list hold Implicit Hold When using the Add command to move or copy lines within a file Qedit overwrites a file named Hold0 with a copy of the lines It counts the lines and tries to select a line number increment that will accommodate the number of lines being added to your workfile So if the command fails or if you wish to copy the same lines again you can refer to the Hold0 file Adding from an external file also holds the lines if you specify
36. the standard 80 columns However Qedit can not change the display width using the usual escape sequences Setting the right margin also caused problems for some users That s why we introduced the RCRTMODEL 1234 This tells Qedit that the terminal can be polled to determine the current display width and has basic block mode capabilities At the same time we introduced Set Visual Marginfixed When RCRTMODEL is set to 1234 Marginfixed is automatically enabled In this case Qedit does not try to change the display width nor does it change the right margin It assumes both are set by the user and have the same value If needed a user can manually enable Marginfixed on a terminal or emulator other than hpterm Qedit Commands 249 Words Command W The Words command is not available for Qedit UX 250 Qedit Commands Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Zave Command Z Saves or recalls a string of Qedit commands Z commands Default if no commands Z prompts Use Z to save some Qedit commands for later use Use to combine multiple Qedit commands If Qedit does not find anything after the it reads the commands from the terminal Qedit saves the commands and you can execute them again at any time by typing Z There is only one Z in Qedit When you enter a new Z string you lose the existing one When you type Z with no sign Qedit inserts the saved commands in place of Z The total length of the Z string plus t
37. 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Delete Last A D Spaces remove characters at end of line Replace End A O Replaces from end of line overwrites Delete Line T D 1 Deletes current line Overwriting Characters To overwrite characters in a line type the new characters underneath the ones to be replaced There is no need to type a control character overwrite is the default edit function Once you are in Overwrite mode you can also use the Space bar to erase the columns that you move through If you have not yet typed any characters the Space bar just moves your column position to the right one place You can get into Overwrite mode at any time while in modify by pressing Control O Terminate overwrite mode and go into space transparency mode by typing Control T Start Over Editing a Line To correct a Modify mistake enter the Goof control code Control G and press Return Qedit restores the line to its original contents and restarts the Modify cycle Control G does not undo Splits and Splices Doing Several Edits in One Line You can do more than one edit operation in one edit line if each edit is clearly separated from the preceding and following ones When the edits are at different ends of the line you must Terminate the first function so that you can move the cursor right to the next column The Terminate control code Control T provides this capability The following illustrates where
38. 1010 and 1011 To select both ASCII and A4 paper add 3000 Folding Wide Lines Qedit UX might have difficulty handling files without Newline delimiters at the end of each line or files with lines longer than 8 172 characters To be able to access these files you can use the length option to specify the maximum number of characters you want on each line 148 Qedit Commands Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Listredo Command LISTREDO F7 The Listredo command displays any of the previous 1 000 commands LISTREDO _ start stop ABS OUT file string REL ALL LUNN Default display previous 20 commands BJ F7 and are short for Listredo Commands are numbered sequentially from 1 as entered and the last 1 000 are retained You can display a single command a range of commands all 1 000 or all the commands whose name matches the string You can print the commands with ABSolute line numbers the default RELative line numbers 5 4 or UNNumbered The OUT option is not available for Qedit UX If you want to redo any of these commands see Do Redo and Before Examples print all Help commands historical shorthand print last ten commands print entire redo stack print all rm commands print all rm xx commands print all with rm anywhere print all relative numbers 7h Jii 713 pe Jii Ji 713 Jli Jii Jii Notes wow The Listredo command can be abbrevi
39. 2 your hardware has problems 3 you have exceeded your disc space limits or 4 Qedit has a bug Make a copy of your workfile before attempting to Open it again If Open does not recover it satisfactorily contact Robelle Errors in Visual There are a number of problems that you may encounter when using Visual We have tried to list all of them here Using Visual with X 25 When configuring X 25 pads be certain to configure large enough buffers Visual can transfer up to 30 000 bytes in a single read see Set Visual Buf Using Visual on HP UX Visual mode should work on HP UX providing you have an HP terminal or an HP terminal emulator You must configure your terminal for Transmit and Receive XON XOFF Pacing or you risk file system errors You must also configure the host prompt to be a DC1 Control Q Because there are few block mode applications for HP UX the host prompt is often configured as null Terminals Supported by Visual Visual will work on most HP terminals with block mode such as the 700 9x and 2392 It also works on most emulators of HP terminals such as Reflection for DOS Windows and Macintosh AdvanceLink for DOS and Windows and Session for Windows and Macintosh Visual may work over DS but only one machine away and only if you define sufficient buffers for your DSLINE Visual does not work on the 2640 41 44 2621 125 120 110 or the 700 4x terminals Problems with 700 9x Terminals Occ
40. 217 search again 36 search and replace 35 search string 36 searching for two strings at once 99 searching for words 41 Self describing files 119 semicolon 84 semicolon means multiple commands 294 server process 71 Set command 178 Set commands in Qeditmgr 54 Set Open Defer 167 Set Text 205 Set Visual command 209 Setincr Text command 235 Setmsg reset in Visual 215 several files editing 50 shell command history 58 shell command limitations 97 shell commands 57 86 shells setting variables 61 Shift Set 202 shiftin character in Visual 15 ShiftIn characters in Visual 217 shifting case uppercase and lowercase 284 shifting columns 101 shifting listings to the right 139 Shifting Output 138 shiftout character in Visual 15 shiftout characters in Visual 217 Shut command 47 231 SI Set Visual option 15 single file edit s option 55 Size error 254 Smart string matching 100 286 SO Set Visual option 15 sorting lines 151 spaces preserve trailing 224 special characters 287 316 Index Spell Set 202 splicing lines 23 122 127 157 splitting lines 22 37 113 157 Start and Stop Justify options 131 start Qedit server 9 start of line 266 status line 14 33 straight margins 128 string delimiters 26 202 285 String error 254 String range 81 string replacement Hpmodify 163 string search 26 41 222 strings changing 98 definition of 285 maximum length 285 stty 53 subpatterns 271 Substitution variable 208 Supe
41. 288 double option List command 139 even option even number of pages 144 file 237 include option List command 139 lp options 119 137 140 odd option odd number of pages 144 options List command 137 record option List command 137 shift option List command 139 use option List command 140 1 1234 RCRTMODEL 62 132 column mode controlling 219 5 512 column width 210 7 700 92 terminal 14 700 9x and Visual 256 308 Index A A4 size paper 146 abbreviating 83 229 273 absolute file name 134 234 access log 74 Account Set 180 ACD security 135 Add command 40 87 224 adding a string as a line 89 adding lines 39 87 AdvanceLink keystrokes 17 Alias Set 180 Alias Fkey Set 181 Alias Ignorecase Set 182 Alias Off Set 182 Alias Reset Set 182 Alias Trace Set 182 all lines 293 Already error 253 Alt X changing exit key 79 Alt Y Reflection command 174 Alt Y versus Reflect 77 ampersand amp pattern match 222 293 anchors 266 Append command 93 appending Hpmodify 163 appending to the end of a line 157 approval of Changes 99 Colcopy 105 Colmove 109 ASCII Set Keep 188 Asian character sets 184 attached printer 143 Attachmate 210 Autocont Set 54 182 autoindent 88 auto renumbering 88 216 B backreferences 271 backslash means display previous line 291 backslash means literal regexp 291 Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual backslash means special regexp 291 Backw
42. 302 Means End Parameter Command or Subpattern in Regexp 302 Means Ahead Some Lines Add or Quantifier in Regexp 302 Means Back Some Lines Minus or Range in Regexp 5 303 Means Numeric Pattern cci si5c5 cciecssunssesecesteciandsviveesbsnsedasersoisersdegetas 303 Means Spaces Pattern Recent Page or Field eee eeeereeees 303 How to Contact Robelle 305 SUPPOR aeeoo e ETER a a a a E eke 305 Index 307 Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Contents ix Welcome to Qedit Introduction Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Welcome to Qedit the fast full screen text editor for MPE and HP UX To get into Qedit UX enter this command opt robelle bin gedit Qedit version 5 7 has screen editing function keys and commands Commands Add Add copy Add lt move Add file Append Backward Before Change COLcopy COLMove Delete DEStroy Divide DO Exit Find Function Keys F1 Upd Next Visual F5 Backward FINDUp FORM FORward GARbage Glue Help HOld Justify Keep List LISTREDO LISTUndo LSort MErge Modify New F2 Roll Up F6 Forward Open Proc Q REDO RENum Replace Set SHut SPell Text UNDo Use Verify VIsual Words Zave F3 Findup F7 Do gt ZZ ext shell COmp RUN mpe Ude Cmdfile calc F4 Find F8 Exit Welcome to Qedit 1 Documentation LISTREDO Qedit comes with a User Manual and a Change Notice
43. 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Extentsize Set Extentsize keepfile workfile Initially 100 30 sectors This option does not apply to Qedit UX It is still accepted for compatibility with the MPE version of Qedit Extprog Set Extprog program parm Com ON OFF Default none Initially none This option does not apply to Qedit UX It is still accepted for compatibility with the MPE version of Qedit Filename Set Filename Help Hint Qzmod filename Initially opt robelle help qedit By default Qedit looks for the help file as opt robelle help qedit You may force Qedit to open specific file names with the Set Filename command The Hint and Qzmod options do not apply to Qedit UX They are still accepted for compatibility with the MPE version of Qedit set filename usr local help gedit FORTRAN Set FORTRAN ON OFF Default ON Initially OFF When Qedit is TEXTing in a file it must decide what language type that file has If the file is a Qedit file there is no problem because the language type is stored as a field within the file If the file is a Keep file Qedit examines the record length and position of the sequence number field Unfortunately there is no foolproof way to distinguish between SPL PASCAL and FORTRAN source files since all have sequence numbers in columns 73 80 If the current language is set to FORTRAN Qedit treats the external file as FORTRAN If the current language is not
44. 74 79 80 10 ColcopyT editing the Cobol tag area only 73 80 ME0307ME line changed Because the margins have been changed Qedit displays text in the tag area only except when the Justify option is used In this case Qedit prompts for confirmation before making the change It would be hard to determine if a line needs to be changed based only on the tag value So when the Justify option is used Qedit displays the complete line The user has the option to accept the changes reject the changes or manually modify the line If the user chooses to modify the line only the tag is displayed Qedit Commands 109 Delete Command D 110 Qedit Commands Deletes lines from the workfile DELETE rangelist Q no display J verify Default rangelist Delete prints each line in rangelist with an underline character after the line number as it deletes them unless you use DQ Notes If you do Delete All you must answer Y to a verifying question before the lines will be deleted This also applies if you Set Check Delete is ON and you delete more than 5 lines If you delete the wrong lines you can cancel the Delete by striking Control Y However you must use Control Y before you press Return on the next command line Qedit responds by printing Undeleted or Canceled Once you have typed in the next command line and press Return your chance to recover using Control Y is gone and the previous Delete command is final
45. Contents of first line Data 003 End of first line Data 004 Line number Start of second line cont Data and Indent mon Data 006 Data 007 Datat 005 oo End of last line Binary zero Unused portion of block cont Binary zeros are missing Cs cont if the block is full 255 The following definitions are used above Forward pointer block number of the next block 16 bit unsigned Line number a 32 bit integer containing the line number in binary 1 000 1 0 Data the number of words of data in the line byte Indent number of full words of blanks before the data byte Qedit Version Number Open stores the version number of the Qedit program file into the workfile that it opens A 16 bit integer is stored at word offset 363 of Block 0 The format is for example 4258 for version 4 2 58 4300 for 4 3 and 4301 for 4 3 01 Jumbo Workfiles 266 File Formats The Qedit Jumbo workfile is an extension of the original Qedit workfile This format allows files to be up to 1 000 characters wide and up to 99 million lines long The blocks are 1024 bytes long instead of 512 Wide Jumbo workfiles allow lines of up to 8 172 characters and limit the number of lines to 99 million The blocks are 8 192 bytes long instead of 1 024 for Jumbo workfiles As in the old Qedit format each block in Jumbo or Wide Jumbo contains several Qedit
46. E AA 273 Escape Character a r hate lank E A e aE E A orcs 275 Escaped Sequences in Regular Expressions ccccescccessesseceeeceeeecesaeceeeecsaeeeaeeceeeecseeeeaeeneees 276 Backreferences in Regular ExpressiOns cccscecsssseseeceeeeeseceeceeseecesaeceeecnaeeeaeeceeeesaeeeeneenneees 277 Escaped Characters in Replacement String ceccesccesceeseceeeceeeeceaeceeeeceaeeeaeeceeeecaeeseneenstees 278 Qedit Glossary 279 J trod cti onsere ee obs beeen cepts dies treats obs coats danas anes ees ee aI eee aoe van tee ATN 279 AEA E a EEEE A cov aces A AEEA AE St et west ee cohen TA 279 PRIS WTA CIN nnen a E E E 279 Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Contents vii viii Contents Calculator autara n ii e ea i e As 280 CGI 4 ani ee teint oae aE Ea AA eee Am Oa 280 Command e oz asus ode sh sac eas eeaeaey sane ase eae E aa iaaa 281 Control Character icseisensi onin a a a ene nad E ec cites ne 281 CR Prai cated serene EEE A E ase ieee aaa 282 C nent LNE soeren inii A E i i a eee 282 Defaults oat cas iia cere a a aa T r os lane 282 Taaie gate DT E E E E O oan eh ase A 282 File NAMES oitenta raanei a ra aaa a a isten 283 Full Screen Edingen iea i ER ea E 283 Hla File aa a a a a ae EE 284 ON ennen e an a E S 284 Jumbo Files ss ccvcasseids ideaan a a a 284 Keep Filen irirna e aa A EENAA KADARE 284 PANS UA inoata a a a a A 284 SE os aces n ee a E E AT E S oe a E 285 Length inoar unre wack E A E E E A 285 Lineen innon iaia a a Hae
47. Global option Qedit resumes using the saved local tag Set X localtag Local On Verify X Set X localtag Local On Default ME990204 List ON Tab OFF Set X Global On Verify X Set X ME990204 Global On List ON Tab OFF Set X Global Off Verify X Set X localtag Local On Default ME990204 List ON Tab OFF When the local option is enabled the first tag shown on the Verify output is the local value It is followed by the words Local On The global tag is displayed after the keyword Default Null If you want to reset all COBOL tags currently in use global and local use the Set X Null command Change Confirmation The justified option SetJ displays the current X values including the active tag the default tag and the local tag settings It applies the changed settings entered on the command Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual and lastly it displays the revised settings When none of the Cobx tags are set the output is Set X values before this command Active tag value List ON Default tag value List ON Local tag value NONE List NOT SAVED Set X values AFTER the command Active tag value List ON Default tag value List ON Local tag value NONE List NOT SAVED The first 4 lines show the current settings The last 4 show the settings after the requested change has been applied When there is no tag value Qedit displays an empty string or the word NONE When the List option
48. Keep 191 Name option of List 144 names of commands 275 Nearest List command 136 negated character class 269 New command 165 new extra scratch file 51 NewLine character 80 next line display 291 next page function 120 No Line error 254 No Open error 254 No Write error 254 Nomatch window option 281 286 nonprinting characters 89 183 Num Set Keep 191 Num option of List 144 numbered files 235 numerical expressions 249 O off line listing 142 Open Set option 198 Open command 47 166 open stack 167 operator s console Control B 157 optional character 267 Overflow error 254 overlapping columns Colcopy 105 Colmove 108 overlapping lines in a rangelist 283 overwriting characters 42 156 P page numbers remove from listing 144 Page option of List 143 paragraphs start and stop 131 Param error 254 Paren error 254 PATH default for Qedit 52 Pattern Set 199 Pattern window 281 287 pattern matching 281 patterns 314 Index not allowed in Change 100 pause during printout 141 pausing listings 140 PC control from Qedit 78 PC emulators 64 PC keyboards Visual 17 PCL setting List command 145 period two spaces after 130 Permanent redo 200 Persistent redo 200 PH language 191 port number 73 Prep Maxdata 196 RL default 201 previous file 288 previous line display 291 previous page function 94 primary scratch file 50 printer attached to terminal 143 printers 140 Priority Set 199 Proc com
49. LEFT to the blank just after the nearest word on the left of the cursor Valid only if a Type Ahead Engine is present and enabled Only available on HP264x terminals Moves cursor RIGHT until it reaches the start of the next word will not move past current end of text Valid only if a Type Ahead Engine is present and enabled Only available on HP264x terminals Hpmodify No Control Characters Set Modify Hpmodify replaces Qedit s standard Modify in all places with MPE style editing D for delete I for insert R for replace U for undo gt for append gt D for delete at end gt R for replace at end and D gt for clear We suggest Hpmodify when using Qedit over finicky datacomm networks since it does not require any Control codes Hpmodify Keys Reference Directive i d gt gt d gt r Effect INSERT If text follows the 1 this text is inserted in the current line starting at the position of the i REPLACE If text follows the r this text replaces the same number of characters in the current line beginning at the position of the r DELETE Deletes a character from the current line for each d specified in the edit line Note that d d does not specify a range as it does in MPE V but simply deletes one character above each d Multiple d s may be followed by an Insert or Replace operation DELETE Deletes to the end of the current line from the position specified by d gt May be followed by an Insert
50. MANPATH on a system wide or user basis can be found in the chapter Running Qedit under HP UX 8 Installing Qedit UX Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Step 5 Start the Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit for Windows Server optional If you have the Qedit for Windows server software you must start the Qedit UX daemon process before any Qedit clients can connect to your HP UX machine To allow users to connect to the Qedit UX daemon process you must log on as root and issue this command gedit d The Qedit server process requires three log files By default these files are located in the following directory opt robelle log qedit If you have moved Qedit to a different directory Qedit tries to identify its current location and adjust the location of the log files If it is not able to correctly identify its location it will default back to opt robelle If you wish to explicitly identify the logfiles location you can perform the following steps 1 Set the ROBELLE environment variable with the new directory name before you start the Qedit server process 2 Make sure the new directory has exactly the same structure as the opt robelle directory Installing Qedit UX 9 Getting a Quick Start with HP Full Screen Editing Introduction This feature does not work on the hpterm terminal emulator at the moment Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit aims to provide everything an MPE or HP UX programmer
51. Manual Running Qedit under HP UX 69 Qedit for Microsoft Windows Introduction Server Process Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Here we describe Qedit for Windows Qedit for Windows client lets you edit local MPE 1X and HP UX files from a single MS Windows program It consists of a Windows editing client and an MPE iX or HP UX editing server that work together to edit your host files for you To take advantage of Qedit for Windows you need both the Qedit client and the Qedit server Qedit for Windows uses the popular TCP IP protocol for communicating between the client and the server this is the same protocol that you use to access the Web Configuring the Qedit server software requires creating the correct TCP IP environment for Qedit for Windows Qedit clients can connect to Qedit UX only if the Qedit UX daemon process is running the Qedit UX daemon process cannot be started from inetd This process listens for connections on a registered port number described below To allow users to connect to the Qedit UX daemon process you must log on as root and issue this command gedit d The Qedit UX daemon process should always be running so it is a good idea to automatically start the daemon as part of the system startup process On HP UX 9 0 this is done by adding the following command to the file etc re usr robelle bin qedit d HP UX 10 0 On HP UX 10 0 you do not modify the startup shell script Instead you need
52. QUIET Normally Visual re enables messages upon Exit using Setmsg ON on MPE and mesg y on HP UX If you want messages to be left disabled at all times use Set Vis Msg OFF These same rules apply to Qzmodify Renum Set Visual Renum ON OFF Default On When you insert lines Qedit attempts to assign them new line numbers between the existing lines Sometimes this is impossible as between 500 01 and 500 011 In this case Qedit will renumber the lines on your screen to make room for the new lines Qedit uses the appropriate Increment value that ensures proper renumbering The value it chooses might be different from the current Increment value Although this value also affects operation of the Add command in Line mode it does not affect the Divide command You can disable this option with Set Vis Renum Off Roll Set Visual Roll nn Default 6 The F2 key means roll the current screen up by 6 lines You can vary the number of roll lines from 1 to 20 by doing Set Vis Roll nn You can also do an individual roll of any size by pressing Home Up typing n or n and F7 Save Set Visual Save Fast ON OFF 1 Default Off Set Vis Save ON causes Qedit to save your function keys upon entry into Visual and reset them again on exit If you only want to save the keys on the first entry into Visual and reset them to the same values on every Exit use Set Vis Save 1 The 700 92 terminal and Reflection have the ability to save
53. Qedit works with absolute filenames and these names can not have more than 240 characters export TMPDIR You can force Qedit to use only the file named QEDITSCR by using Set Work Random Off Trailing Spaces By default Qedit preserves trailing spaces on all lines in a variable length file Set Work Trailingspaces ON requests that Qedit preserves trailing spaces and make them significant characters The option also allows creation of odd length lines Once enabled all workfiles created or opened from that point will have trailing spaces preserved To check the current status do Verify Work Checks global setting Set WOrk Jumbo ON Block 8 Labels OFF Temp ON Size 3200 Random ON Set WOrk TRailingspaces ON Verify Keep Checks current workfile Set Keep Ascii OFF Cctl OFF COde 0 Lab 0 Num OFF Var ON Checktimestamp ON Set Keep COBfree ON NAme home userl afile txt Set Keep LF ON Verify Info Saved modification timestamp 2003 04 30 13 23 17 Trailing spaces preserved The last line shows that trailing spaces are preserved in this workfile If the option is disabled that line reads Trailing spaces trimmed Disabling the global setting with Set Work Trailing Off does not disable the option in the workfile You have to clear the workfile after disabling it The Trailingspaces setting is stored in the workfile so it s recognized when the file is opened in the future These workfiles may contain data specific to Trailingspaces
54. Screen Editing 17 Function Keys Much of the convenience of Visual mode is due to the power built into the eight user function keys F1 through F8 F1 Update and go to next page F2 Roll Up Screen n lines as per Set Vis Roll F3 Findup search back for current string F4 Find search ahead for current string F5 Backward One Page F6 Forward One Page F7 Execute command typed in gt line F8 Exit from Visual back to Line mode F1 Update and Go to Next Page Qedit reads the current page and updates the file then displays the next page The F1 key combines the Enter key and F6 Forward in a single key However F1 does not execute any command typed in the home line as the Enter key would F2 Roll Up Screen Qedit clears the screen and displays a new one that is rolled up n lines default 6 where n is controlled by Set Vis Roll F3 Findup Previous String Qedit searches backward in the file starting from the line until it finds a line that contains the current string Qedit clears the screen and displays a new page with positioned at the line that contains the found string Visual also displays the target string on the Status line Before you can use F3 you must establish the string for which to search Type the string in quotes prefixed by a circumflex string atthe gt on the home line and press F7 to do the first Findup F4 Find Next String Qedit searches forward in the file starting f
55. Screen Refresh is particularly useful if you ve pressed Clear Display by accident gt F7 When using Set Vis Update On to automatically update the screen use gt F7 or lt F7 to move ahead or back one page without updating the current page Other Line Mode Commands You may enter any Line mode Qedit command in the gt line including Opening another file and calculator commands The ZZ cut and paste indicator can be used to mark a group of lines for use in any Qedit Line mode command gt list Schar zz F7 Truncated Home Line When editing a file with short records e g Set Lang Text Set Len 20 the right margin of terminal display memory is set to match the record length This means that when typing home line commands you wrap the status line at the same width as the records very inconvenient if the record length is 3 bytes You can however cursor past the right margin to type a longer command Therefore Qedit expands the right margin when you use F7 to execute the home line command making it possible to execute a long command even when the data length is short Qedit cannot expand the right margin if you press Enter and may cut short your command Exit from Visual If your function keys do not work for some reason you may not be able to use F8 to exit from Visual Instead press Home Up type and press Enter This updates your current screen and returns you to Line mode Getting a Quick Star
56. See the discussion above about the files automatically executed by the Bourne and Korn shells The easiest way to change the two PATHs for all users on your HP UX machine is to log on as root and add these two lines to the file etc profile after any existing PATH or MANPATH statements PATH PATH opt robelle bin MANPATH SMANPATH opt robelle man Remember to delete any PATH or MANPATH settings in etc d profile so that new users do not override your changes You also 52 Running Qedit under HP UX Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual have to warn existing Bourne and Korn shell users to change the profile file in their home directories C Shell See the discussion above about the files automatically executed by the C shell The easiest way to change the two PATHs for all users on your HP UX machine is to log on as root and add these two lines to the file etc csh login after any existing path or MANPATH statements set path Spath opt robelle bin setenv MANPATH SMANPATH opt robelle man Remember to delete any path or MANPATH settings in both etc d login and etc d cshrc so that new users do not override your changes You also have to warn existing C shell users to change their login and cshrc files in their home directories Control Characters and stty Most HP UX users have Control D configured as the end of file character and Control C as the interrupt character If you use Robelle style modify you must reassign Con
57. UX uses three forms of workfiles original Jumbo and Wide Jumbo The Wide Jumbo format is new and is used for most files on which you use the Text command On HP UX the original format is unable to save some information about your file due to technical differences in how the Qedit workfiles are stored on MPE versus HP UX Once you shut an original file the following is lost e The name of the file from which you texted e The current line number e The ability to immediately reopen the file and Undo changes e The settings for Set Left and Set Right For these reasons Wide Jumbo workfiles will be the standard in Qedit UX Current File Name Qedit UX does not allow substitution of the current file name into shell scripts and commands because the asterisk is an important substitution character in HP UX For example cannot compile your current file Instead it compiles all files in your current directory Missing Features The following features do not work in Qedit UX e Beginfile Endfile commands e Hints are not available e Verify to a line printer e Any MPE style command such as Pause Run etc e Proc command except for Up and Down 68 Running Qedit under HP UX Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual e T O redirection of Qedit commands e Spell and Words commands e Out option of the Listredo command e User Defined Commands and command files e The QEDITCOUNT variable Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User
58. With COLJ Qedit displays the line as it would be and asks you for a Yes No or Modify answer CobX Tags Cobol tags are short strings stored in columns 73 to 80 of CobX source files The Cobol tag value is defined using the Set X command Once enabled updated lines and added lines are automatically updated with the tag They can also be modified manually with custom tag values In its regular form the Colcopy command affects only the text area in columns 7 to 72 If you wish to make changes to Cobol tags use the T suffix You can think of it as the Tag option This option operates only on the tag area itself columns 73 to 80 ColT 73 74 79 80 all copies content of columns 73 and 74 into columns 79 80 ColT 73 74 75 all inserts content of columns 73 and 74 in column 75 Columns 76 80 are shifted To to this the Tag option temporarily changes the margins to 73 80 Qedit displays a warning every time this option is used Because the margin values have changed explicit column range in the source and destination columns can only be between 73 and 80 Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit Commands 105 ColT 23 24 79 80 all Warning ColcopyT editing the Cobol tag area only 73 80 Error The Sourcestart column 23 is not between 73 and 80 ColT 73 74 79 80 10 ColcopyT editing the Cobol tag area only 73 80 ME0307ME line changed Because the margins have been changed Qedit displays text in the tag area
59. a backslash Qedit decrements the current line to the previous line and displays it Entering several backslashes displays backwards several lines You can also use as a string delimiter e g list xxx A backslash in regular expressions is used to indicate the next character must be used as a literal It removes any special meaning this character might otherwise have list regexp is not start of character class A backslash in regular expressions might qualify the next character as a special nonprinting character These are special characters b Backspace e f Form feed n New line line feed e r Carriage return e s Space e t Horizontal tab e ASCII escape character ESC Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit Glossary 297 298 Qedit Glossary e DDD 1 3 octal digits representing a character s ASCII value e xDDD 1 3 hex digits representing a character s ASCII value e C Control code e g Control G G is the Bell character Means Prompt Range Delimiter Stop Exit or Divide Qedit uses the slash in many places e As the delimiter in a line range e g 500 600 e As the delimiter in a column range e g Change 1 2 e two slashes terminate input in the Add command e same as Control Y e In Visual at the gt line means Exit from Visual mode e In the calculator as a divide e g 100 5 Means FIRST default o
60. a combination list first 2 1 last 2 1 MEMO TO Drama Staff News Simulation Dept The slash separating the numbers or words symbolizes the word to Rangelists can also contain strings See the section on strings called Searching the File or the Glossary for definitions of rangelist and string Browsing the File If you want to browse through the file the command you need is LJ LJ stands for List Jump Qedit shows you a screen of text prints More yes at the bottom of the screen and waits for you If you press Return Qedit displays the next screen You can stop browsing by pressing Control Y typing NO or just N or by typing Also you can type any command and Qedit stops browsing to execute it To request a List Jump 1j3 6 begin browsing at line 6 lj etc profile browse configuration file Searching the File Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual So far you typed line numbers to specify which lines you wanted to see There is another way to list lines and that is to specify an identifying string Put anything in quotes and it s a string Qedit lists all the lines that contain that exact same anything fiver your 5 Please check your in baskets daily and 6 respond to your fan mail within a week 2 lines found There are two occurrences of your in the file one on line 5 and one on line 6 Strings can help you find a particular place in the file quickly Getting a Quick Start
61. a named HP UX file after first verifying with the user DESTROY filename Default current workfile The filename parameter can be the name of any file that you have write access to to refer to the last file name mentioned in another command or to refer to either the current workfile or if none is currently open the one just Shut Examples destroy dev src test c dev src test c of lines 162 Purge file no Oui that s French for yes open ctemp des ctemp Qedit file of lines 15 Purge file no Return key means no File NOT purged list datapg2 check contents of file destroy then purge it 112 Qedit Commands Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Divide Command DI Divides a line into two or more lines at specified columns Divide can turn a field oriented record into a series of lines with one field per line It can also append a blank line after every line in a file See also VV in Visual For the opposite of Divide see the Glue command DIVIDE columniist rangelist Default columnilist rangelist The columnilist parameter is one or more valid column numbers in ascending order such as 10 20 30 or it may be a for after end of line 1 e append a blank line All characters from the specified column to end of line are moved to a new line after the original line The rangelist parameter specifies one or more lines in the file Each line is spl
62. a newline character at the end of each record This appears to be what COBOL expects for a data file Language Set Language lang Initially SPL The lang codes accepted by Qedit are COBOL COBOLX ALL SPL FORTRAN Pascal RPG Job Text Data CC CPP PowerHouse PH COBFREE Html XML Java and QSL Qedit Scripting Language Initially when Qedit starts the language is assumed to be SPL but this may be changed when you Text a file SPL stands for Systems Programming Language which is an obscure software tool on the original HP e3000 system files have 80 character records with columns 73 80 containing a sequence number You can override this default this with Set Lang When you Set Lang you also reset the Window the Length the Left margin and the Right margin The language sets the following file attributes 1 Increment between lines Number of digits in line number Placement of line number left or right 2 3 4 Maximum data line length 5 Number of first data column 6 Name of compiler program file 7 Delimiters for Set Window SMART 8 Numbered or not for Keeps The following chart shows the values set for each language a e 6 bf _ a OL We COBOL 0 10 Left 74 COB Special not Yes X 0 OL ps 0 wee Qedit Commands 195 196 Qedit Commands Text 00 Right 256 Null Any special N Data 1 00 Right 1 00 1 Null Any special N 0 0 0 0 pan CPP 1 00 Right
63. acre ames E OAE A S A E E 205 Spe T E eae dod anew ac E 206 SAIS LEC EAA EEA E EA A T AEA TA EAA 206 StringdeliMiterS essesi E E a E EE E a E 206 Tabs n a a a a a a a A 207 Termen aa a a a a a e 208 Text acacia ee ans sate gh ha A acid aati Set el sod 209 ST SOV GEES oa aes eck a veadedes ac eased adies A Beeb a eaaseooadous a ede 211 LEI D1 OEE TE E EE EE 211 Undok a a a aa aiat 211 AVETI NAE A E EAEE EE E A E AE AE EEA 212 AW ISUIAN nischts ah tadaktataiee ssa ceaty aa uiots ctoalaver aac eete Sah oes cod 213 WAPI 8S sidan tack ni ce bagels do am niratesee tae eam mona cee 226 Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual WndOW isos oes cheese a a glacoted tdtar sacra utheen docs TA 226 VO etd fia ic Pie A as Nl rs Seed a is lr a dle 227 Wraparound si reran sen a sis ay e aa A A A O A 229 D E AE ae on aia hae ad Ne 229 Tae ete ee tas Oe E N E Ata Aten ed 234 Shut Command N Pod a 2 eise nescence seksi isin heen red ele ec 235 Spell Command SP cscs ccccscccoses austevessevcascvesssbetsccesesvectocsvaces dacsvevastenaeacesta a EE EEEE ORS 236 Text Command IT eenen enar a ees es tial ale aatanthGe seks EATE OVES EE EGES 237 Undo Command UN E r nees ensen a aea o EE ater EEE E ERE EE R 243 Up Command UP Z r r aT a re eE eaaa EE S REEE eE iE EE ESS 245 Use Command U e e aaan eck r a EEE cade cee acer OE SEES E E och aces oes 246 Verify Command V rir E e EEE AEE N EE A Peds EEA ete O A A 247 Visual Command VIE ereen aeran E EEEE R RER EA 24
64. adjusts the number of rows and columns for that option to match A4 paper For example to print two up landscape on A4 paper use PCL 2010 instead of PCL 10 In general selecting A4 paper gives you more space along the long dimension of the paper and less space along the short dimension If you are happy with the way letter size rows and columns work on A4 paper simply do not add 2000 to the PCL code Summary of Qedit PCL Codes PCL L P A4 A4 Letter Letter Rows Columns Rows oo o 1 e ss fiss jeo jiss Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit Commands 147 ee fe see fof 132 oile o a fo a a e a Co ri fe fip oo n0 oo 10 pup ear L P mean landscape or portrait orientation Note PCL 6 and 11 were designed to print on North American legal size paper and will select that size However you can see what happens with A4 paper by using 2006 and 2011 Some people have found this useful Roman 8 vs ASCII The PCL option requests a Roman 8 character set but some combination font cartridges only supply the ASCII character set half as many characters means twice as many fonts in a single cartridge If you ask for landscape Line printer and get landscape Courier instead your Line printer font probably has the ASCII character set instead of the Roman 8 character set To request an ASCII font add 1 000 to the PCL code For example if you have a Super Cartridge 55 fonts in one use PCL 1001 1004 1006
65. aes e AT es 285 TESTEI OVON a EAE A AT AEEA 286 IVTAT OATS ites sree tein heal e a R A RTE 286 Memory LOCK a icistcataciyasheineiuSedacthiadecwusdaatotte E ates ion 287 Pattes he tnt tha a ae Ad i i ea R aA lnc td a 287 Q iet Q ODO Mitac incu rene bara r at tan suee Genet A fo sla ne unas 288 52102 Rape RnR rs fe ET AcE En SE AROS Pe ICTR OR E Aer RCE 288 R gelist erroris itat a e E e A r eanan teas 288 Relative Line NUMbe f Soininen a ani e 290 RTGS sas wacacieta nnee E E E aN 290 Shifting osr otal eat E AR a a edit ales Daal nea 290 SIN e e A Ais E A Aus A mane 291 TAD PEE A E E connie nes baademasaaieus fastens 291 Template 1 Options Jaxcieie caters etnies Aas cent 291 Visual Editing Sai5 as cape tia rs ase snr eh e ence cecatm ay e E 292 WWE Oy peices cs decassyaotat batt ea cus dan e a ee ep nanan a i aata 292 W OF BUG esena dase ca Oe A Ae AE 293 Special Chara e E Sae ar er ar E ae E E bens des vaehewese conse E E 293 Means Help Nonprinting Characters Alphanumeric in Patterns or Optional Gn Regexp as sees cite e E E E E EA E 294 Means Hex Memory Lock List Option Previous File or End Of Line GA Regexp aroi ir r a a ER A 294 Means Findup Control Char Start of line in Regexp or Negate in IRC BEX I a neve eens e teeny ec ees 295 Means Nonprinting Reset Decimal Point or Any Character in RE QOXP isssccdsciseineiaasineg sagisaviataincdack a a e EE e 295 Means Shell Script or Too Long ssssesssesssssee
66. alias in it is printed with a and Visual will not let you update it use Modify instead TAE Set Visual TAE ON OFF Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Default OFF To make Visual mode work with Telamon s Type Ahead Engine use Set Vis Tae On Qedit sends out a Control A A upon entry to Visual mode and a Control A V on exit These special codes disable and re enable the TAE However Control A may be a code for your modem or network and could cause a problem If you do not have a TAE the V may appear on your screen upon exit from Visual mode Update Set Visual Update ON OFF Except 7 Default Off If you find that you are losing work by pressing F5 or another function key before you have saved your screen work with the Enter key this option is for you When Set Vis Update is ON Qedit does an automatic screen update with every function key This makes it almost impossible to lose your changes but it does slow down Visual mode However you may do gt F7 or lt F7 to move ahead or back one page without updating the current page Note to refresh the screen type in the home line before pressing any function key or Enter If you want to be able to execute a command via F7 without updating the screen use Set Vis Update On Except 7 Widen Set Visual Widen 76 80 OFF Default 80 The Widen option controls whether and when Visual will request and use more than 80 display
67. batch no one is there to correct it Therefore Qedit normally aborts However you can use Set Autocont On to override this abort instructing Qedit to keep processing after errors in batch Command Line Options You can invoke Qedit UX with options or an initial file name to edit or both or neither The syntax for invoking Qedit UX is 54 e Running Qedit under HP UX Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual gedit csv filename See below for suggestions on setting the EDITOR environment variable so that Qedit is automatically invoked as your editor from other tools like elm Initial Command Line ccmdstring You can specify commands to be executed using the c option before the file name The c is followed by commands to be executed There must be no space between the c and the command list If those commands contain a space they must be enclosed in single or double quotes otherwise the quotes are optional When both c and a file name occur the c commands are executed after the file is accessed for editing Here are some examples cvisual myfile c visual myfile c set vis ab 3 bel 12 visual myfile c text abc use fixit k y e Editing a Single File s Sometimes you want to invoke Qedit for a specific purpose such as writing a message in elm You are using Qedit as a dedicated tool for a specific purpose In these cases specify s and a file name You can only edit that fi
68. c ccc eescesccesseceneeceneeeseeeeeeeceeeececeeeesaeceaeeceaeseaeeeeeeeceeseaeceaeees 19 Cuteand Baste sis elicits EEE E EEE E uctoas tsveucs Ade daschse sy dis AEE 20 Cutting Operations aids meas devietaideat a a a Anne etas 20 Pasting Operations aces ses cestes sepaincoNeue auc ostedtiec va Seeds seven eweeeev eeasecsn oea Bes 21 Resetting Cut and Paster 2i 07 aacrs isuesieaclbydagy iran eb ies cbvadeee oars 21 Copying a Block of Text iisisictyss sentdeitiachardin aaienavaienunsioganiesss 21 Cut and Paste Between Files lt iav2sssiveestedhiae sca estestnsenunataltanaseses 22 Dividing and Gluing Operations ss ssssssessesessseessessresressessrssresseesee 23 Dividing Lines in Visual Mode c cccccccssceesceeeeceseceeeeesseecseeceneensees 23 Gluing Lines in Visual Mode s 4s5s5s es savseccsgstianenancacesdarsancaaaaecaataaenaes 23 Excluding Lines From Visual Mode Display cccccessceeteeeeeeeeees 24 Justifying Lines in Visual Mode wu cee eecceesseeeteceneceeeeeeseecsaeenteensees 24 R numbering Lines aie ahha ea actos tet a a nana total alc ue ed 25 Inserting Blank Lines 3 2 cdsecutida neneiradissecevieesitdaeueidincotlets 25 Hold FES ii rie n ea E E a EE AE AERA AEEA i 25 Marking Changes Without Using Line Numbers s seseeseeeeeseeeeeeeese 25 Paste from a Non Qedit File ccc ccccccccsscecesscecssececsseeeesseeeesseeeesseeees 26 Home Line Commands 0 5 02 ciccscsssicscssnssteceesosesstsvacseunssetese
69. certain Qedit commands will shut and open workfiles on your behalf The timestamp warning might appear when you do not expect it By default timestamp checking on Open is disabled If you want to change this setting you can use the Set Open Checktimestamp command 172 Qedit Commands Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Proc Command P Calls internal procedures to downshift and upshift lines PROC DOWN UP J rangelist Defaults previous proc For DOWN and UP the default rangelist is the current line PQ shifts quietly i e without printing the lines and PJ shifts with user verification i e PJ prints each shifted line and asks you to approve it Built In PROCs to Shift Up or Down The Up and Down Procedures put Roman 8 characters into uppercase or lowercase if Set Editinput Extend is On Otherwise they only operate on A Z and a z The first time that you use Down or Up after running Qedit they ask you to configure them There are 4 options 1 means to shift every alpha character in the lines 2 means to skip over characters enclosed in double quotes 3 means to skip over characters enclosed in single quotes and 4 means to skip over characters enclosed in either double quotes or single quotes If Down or Up finds a line with unmatched quotes it prints a warning and stops unless the lines are part of a COBOL program in which case unmatched quotes are okay open gedit doc open document file flist 4
70. class If used anywhere else in the class it is used as a literal If used as a negation it indicates that the match is successful if the character in the specified position of the text is not in the class list list abc regexp successful if not a b or c Means Nonprinting Reset Decimal Point or Any Character in Regexp The most common use of a period is as a decimal point in line numbers 12 3 Visual Qzmodify and List char use a period to represent nonprinting characters in displays A period as a command at the Visual home line means reset the current Cut and Paste task Qedit Glossary 295 A period or dot in regular expressions is a placeholder for any character list a c regexp one character between a and c Means Shell Script or Too Long Put an exclam at the start of a line to indicate a shell script or command fits list current directory When a line is too long to print on the Visual screen Qedit prints an exclamation mark at the start of the line Means Octal or String Percent means either an octal value 454 or a string list XXX Means Current Refresh Multiply or Quantifier in Regexp In the calculator means multiply as in 5 30 In Visual an at the gt command lines tells Qedit to Refresh the screen When using Set Vis Update On to automatically update the screen gt or lt moves ahead or back one page
71. combining commands 84 294 comma means a list 294 command history Shell 58 command names 275 commands 83 comments in commands 84 Compare UX program 3 completion codes 78 configuring full screen mode 216 configuring Qedit 53 178 configuring Visual 209 Confirm deletion 110 console recovering after B 157 console messages 73 Continue automatic 182 control characters 4 183 275 control codes for editing 155 159 Control A codes TAE 218 Control B on the console 157 Index 309 Control D in modify 53 Control S to pause 140 Control Y to stop a command 85 140 Control Y to undelete 46 conventions 3 Copy command 89 copying a block of text 21 copying a file into Qedit 233 copying columns 177 copying from a file 91 copying lines 89 copying text in Screen 36 copying text in Visual 20 CPU time 202 crash recovery 168 creating columns 101 CRT definition of 276 CRT model variable 61 64 CRT width variable 64 curly braces 293 current line definition of 276 position on screen 210 211 cursor movement 15 34 cut and paste 20 36 cut and paste between files 22 25 Cutcurrent Set Visual option 212 D Data Set Lang 193 data files texting 235 DCI 65 DD cut and paste delete 20 Decimal Set 27 183 default answers 4 default text formatting Justify 129 defaults 276 Defer Set Open option 198 deferred write access 167 198 Delete ask approval 183 confirm 110 Delete command 46 110 deleting a block in
72. current line into two lines at the current column position If a line number is available Qedit moves all characters from the current column to the end of the line to a new line that is added after the current line The Goof function recalls the original contents of the line but does not delete the new line neither does Control Y See also Divide command Splicing Two Lines Together Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual To splice two lines together you must be on the first column of the first line you wish to splice Type Control T then Control V and quick as a wink all the characters from the second line are appended to the end of your current one Qedit moves only as many characters as will fit If all the characters are moved the second line now empty is deleted See also the Glue command Editing Lines with More Than 80 Columns To modify long lines i e more than 80 columns use Set Left and Set Right to define a slice through the lines set left 55 quiet with template SOOM aitianes ened Otine sak eeenw BO are ea OU ete SO OOS a ubsequent Sales Follow up Completion Ratio Report Or use Set Modify Qzmodify it handles long lines without the need to set margins Qzmodify WYSIWYG You may want to try Set Modify Qzmodify to replace the normal Qedit modify with a visual modify What You See Is What You Get Qzmodify uses the same Control codes plus many extensions but Qzmodify does single character reads T
73. displays as NOT SAVED it means the Local feature is enabled but the List setting has not been explicitly set yet If the tag values are set the result strings are displayed as in set x local off set x GB yymmdd set x local on setj x LC yymmdd Set X values before this command Active tag value List ON Default tag value GB011213 List ON Local tag value prefix suffix dateform 0 List NOT SAVED Warning Local ON only updates tag for this workfile not defaults Set X values AFTER the command Active tag value LC011213 List ON Default tag value GB011213 List ON Local tag value prefix LC suffix dateform 2 List NOT SAVED In this example the first Set command turns Local X off The second Set command changes the default tag to the prefix GB followed by the current date in year month day format The third Set command turns Local X back on and finally the SetJ command sets the local tag to the prefix LC followed by the date in the same format Looking at the SetJ output there is the then current default tag GB011213 with List enabled There was no local tag and List was not set at that point The new local tag is applied and produces a warning After the change the active tag is the local one and List is enabled default value The default tag is unchanged The last line provides details on how the local tag was constructed The List option still shows as NOT SAVED because it has not been changed ex
74. editor entered via the Visual command Window A window is used to limit the extent of string matching Normally specifying a string in a rangelist implies processing all lines where the string occurs anywhere within the line regardless of starting column and surrounding context With a window string matching can be restricted to a specified column window example 10 30 means column 10 through column 30 Shorthand 1 1 1 30 first column 30 and 30 30 last column Use a 1 132 window with TEXT files to reduce the record width to 132 columns The column numbers begin with 7 in COBOL and 1 in the other languages The complete syntax for a window is column column keyword The window keywords are SMART NOSMART NOSMART UPSHIFT NOUPSHIFT NOUPSHIFT PATTERN NOPATTERN NOPATTERN MATCH NOMATCH MATCH REGEXP NOREGEXP NOREGEXP A single window may specify multiple options separated by spaces or commas and following the column range but if Pattern is included the Smart NoSmart option is ignored That is Upshift Pattern makes sense but NoSmart Pattern does not The options are independent and setting or resetting one does not change the others With the Smart keyword Qedit matches a string only if the string is preceded by a special character or the start of the window and is followed by a special character or the end of the window In SPL the apostrophe is
75. i e ER EEr Ere ESEE KEE n esi nies 26 Finding Strings sienien eree a t E at 2I CATO Strinsi esnan onenian nea a a a aa 27 Help on Visual Mode 5 oa aateeevcaslevs ys Gateacecsascedas cegaccoascdense aetaate nn sentoues 27 Formatting Paragraphs seseeseesesseessesesssressesrrssressessrsseessessrssresseesee 28 Undoing Changes in Visual Mode c eececcceccseceseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeteeeeees 28 Refreshing the Serei a eres cist wacnieeee aa n TE E 28 Other Line Mode Commands sssssessessesseessessresresseeseseesseeseeserssesee 29 Truncated Home Line s 06 4 7 Scary vas ovstatucraviaces aayeceseuyeteoen i taenen atone 29 Exit from Vis al sseui reas cadag uardanach tah szeg a aa Aat 29 Getting a Quick Start with VT Full Screen Editing 31 Intro IB LEANCON t AEPA IEEE P EA A EE EE E TAERE A E 31 Home and End Keys i arircinecerin nanaii a ea a in 31 Starting Screen Modestia saae e EEEE NE E E aaa EAE AEn 32 Troubleshooting ie a aa a i a aaa a iaa 32 SCrEen Layout aaae GE NT T ETETE ETAT TE E A 32 Stats LANE eeii oR E a E EE E R ERREA iR 33 Text lanegun onara ii i a Ea a i an 33 Me ssage TING sts Piers eiaeaetiatatd a a E A a a T Et 33 Usme Your Keyboard onna e R ee a A ed pd ee R 34 Moving th Cr SOR cant ceri na ne R a ei aN ae 34 Editing the Text PA eS 06a aac a avons tatasec sauces soso cde vases eens 35 Control FUNCHONS esteto aesan a e Ea ea raa aoai 36 Browsing Through Your Fileisenscssnseaugrt enei ee E EE R 36 Cuttan
76. in full screen mode QEDIT find the next occurrence of the word QEDIT QEDIT colon prefix identifies a system command You can specify more precise string matching by appending a window to the string SAM UPSHIFT etc A null string refers to the previous string entered with the same window as before For example c QEDIT Quedit change spelling in all lines 1 QEDIT upshift match uppercase and lowercase find withh find spelling error fix it change with Tab The TAB key can be used to skip logically to the next Tab stop also physically if Tabs are set on the terminal If more Tabs are included in a line than there are Tab stops a new work line is created The default tab key is Control I TAB but it can be changed Set Tabs The default Tab stops are every 10 columns MPE or every 8 columns HP UX but you can set the tabs to whatever columns you like with Set Tabs Template T Option You may append one two or three option letters to a command Q J or T For example the List command has these variations ListQ ListT ListJ ListQJ and ListQT The T option causes a column number template to be printed once before the command is processed The T option is most useful with Add List and Modify Qedit Glossary 291 292 Qedit Glossary Visual Editing Besides the traditional Line mode editing that Qedit supplies it has another editor built into it a full screen
77. input anymore and that the special keys e g cursor keys will work nicely Disabled Qzmodify will disable typeahead by sending A V to the TAE at entry and enable it at exit In this mode the TAE is effectively taken out of the circuit With Qedit you configure TAE treatment as part of the Set Modify Qzmodify command Set Mod Qzmodify ignore the TAE Set Mod Qzmod TAEOFF TAE exists disable it Set Mod Qzmod TAE TAE exists enable it When the TAE is present and enabled you can use these extra commands WT Toggles the Type Ahead Engine through three states disabled enabled ignored leftarrow The HP26xx left arrow key will move the cursor 1 space to the left rightarrow The HP26xx right arrow key will move the cursor 1 space to the right up arrow Move up to the prior line of text leaving cursor in the same column The terminal screen is scrolled DOWN so the line you were just editing is moved down 1 down arrow Move down to the next line of text leaving cursor in the same column The terminal screen is scrolled UP so the line you were just editing is moved up 1 delete char Deletes the character under the cursor like D insert char Turns on Insert mode like B insert line Asks Qedit to add a new line after the current line delete line Asks Qedit to delete the current line Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual leftarrow rightarrow Moves cursor
78. insertion point and Press V to add the block Splitting and Joining Lines To split a line move the cursor to the position where you want the new line to start Make sure you re in insert mode and then press Return To join two lines move the cursor to the beginning of the second line and then press Backspace 38 Getting a Quick Start with VT Full Screen Editing Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Getting a Quick Start with Line Mode Editing Introduction You don t have to learn every command in order to use Qedit With just a few of the basic functions you can take care of editing job streams programs memos or big text files First find out how to run Qedit on your system Your system manager may have set up an easy way to access Qedit try typing gedit Look for a slash prompt on MPE or qux on HP UX which tells you Qedit is ready to go This introduction will make the following activities familiar to you adding lines to a file looking at the contents of files searching files for specific characters changing one line or many lines deleting moving and copying lines and saving files In the examples to follow watch for comments on the right hand side enclosed in curly braces Whatever you see in is an explanation not part of the command although Qedit will accept it Press Return after each command line When you finish your session getting back out of Qedit is easy Type Exit and press the Return key
79. instances the width has to be entered using the RCRTWIDTH variable or the Set Term Columns command 4 Qedit sets the option that eliminates changes to display width Set MarginFixed On This option also ensures that the right margin is always set at the right edge of the display width Normally the right margin is set at the last valid column of the file which might be less than the display width You can use this option with other emulators if you wish to stop Qedit from changing the display width Please read the section on Set Visual Marginfixed to learn about its advantages and disadvantages 5 The only way to change the display width with hpterm is manually If you use the Set Term Columns command to specify a new width Qedit prints the following message and waits for you to change the width manually Running Qedit under HP UX e 63 Please change display width and press Enter Qedit does not verify that you have done this correctly so if you make a mistake do another Set Term Columns command to fix the width 6 Set Visual Stop normally resets all the jcws to their default state forcing Qedit to re identify the terminal However for hpterm the RCRTMODEL and RCRTWIDTH jews are not reset since the terminal cannot be identified automatically If you wish to stop using 1234 mode you must reset RCRTMODEL to 0 manually 7 Set Visual Widen should normally be set to 76 or 80 default with hpterm Otherwise you will n
80. is Control B B decimal 2 Because many terminals use specific control codes for local functions i e Control B may clear the screen Qedit allows you to change the control codes assigned to Modify functions However the control codes for Qzmodify cannot be redefined Using Set Modify any or all of the control function codes can be changed The current codes are displayed in the Verify command Each control function change consists of the first letter of the function name followed by a space then the circumflex character and the desired control letter For example set modify t Z This specifies that Control Z equal to decimal 26 is the control key for the TERMINATE function Certain control codes are not allowed and will be rejected Each function must be assigned a unique control character from among these A BC DG K LN O PRT UV WwW 2 Open You can control the behavior of Qedit when opening workfiles With the first option you can get Qedit to warn you if the workfile you are working on is not synchronized with the file it is based on The second option helps you preserve timestamps on workfiles so that you have a better idea when the workfile has actually been accessed and modified Set Open Checktimestamp ON OFF Initially OFF Qedit stores the file modification timestamp in the workfile It uses the timestamp to determine whether the file has been modified since the initial Text command or since the last tim
81. labels Marginfixed do not change terminal right margin MSG leave Setmsg OFF or mesg n on exit from Visual Renum renumber screen if out of line numbers Roll adjust number of lines on UP F2 Save save and restore existing function keys SI define printable substitute for ShiftIn SO define printable substitute for ShiftOut Stop reset Visual mode forces restart TAB define printable substitute for tab characters TAE make Qedit work with Telamon Type Ahead Engine Update automatically update screen every time Widen whether to go beyond 80 columns of display Wordwrap enable wordwrap in Reflection Above Set Visual Above n Default 0 By default the line is the first text line on the page Set Vis Above specifies that from 0 to 9 lines are to be shown above the line ATtachmate Set Visual Attachmate OFF ON Default Off When enabled and used in conjunction with the Attachmate s KEA Terminal emulator Qedit is able to work with up to 512 colums Bell Set Visual Bell nnn char Default None If you edit text containing Bell characters they will appear as dots with a at the left of the line Otherwise they would disappear from your file when you press Enter because Bells are not saved in display memory To get around this problem you can define another character as a translation for the Bell character For example Set Vis Bell defines to represent Bell Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manua
82. line for the line to be selected Each string can have its own search window Escape sequences to set reset terminal tab stops appear in output file when Qedit s output is redirected as in S gedit gt gedit out Qedit now resets the tab stops when running in interactive mode only Redirection is assumed to be batch mode The server correctly returns error 90 when the modified record length is greater than the maximum allowed in the current workfile Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Installing Qedit UX General Installation Notes Here we describe how to install and configure Qedit The following are general notes about installing Qedit Who Should Use These Instructions The system manager should use the following installation instructions to install Qedit UX No one can be using Qedit UX during the installation The installation should only take a few minutes Summary of Installation Steps To install Qedit UX follow these steps 1 You must log on as root 2 You must create the correct directory structure 3 Qedit UX and its associated files must be restored from the distribution tape 4 Youcan set up a PATH for Qedit UX or copy it to an existing directory in your PATH optional step 5 Ifyou have the Qedit for Windows server you need to start the daemon process optional step Step 1 Log On as Root There are two ways to log on as root 1 Exit from HP UX and log on with root as the user name 2 Ifyou a
83. listing options such as PCL or duplex You cannot interrupt Record mode with Control Y but you can do a soft Reset This unlocks the keyboard and causes the rest of the output to appear on the screen You can then stop it with Control Y LP Listings with Headings To have Qedit do a page break every 60 lines and put a heading with a page number on each page do List page On lp or record lpa lpb To configure paging as the default do Set List Page On Two lines at the top of each page are used as a heading The first line contains the page number the file name or the last Text file name in the case of Qeditscr and the time of the listing and the second line is blank In this mode Qedit also looks for title page pragma page and pragma title commands in your file and uses them to create page breaks The optional string parameter of these commands replaces the date and time in the page heading e g page Monthly Staff Review A page or title command without a string clears the title area of the heading To vary the number of lines per page do List lines nn or use Set List Lines nn for a permanent override where nn is a value between 1 and 256 Assumes Set List Page On Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual set list page on lines 59 To print the heading only on the first page use lines 0 This causes continuous printing with no page ejects list Slp lines 0 all ig
84. look at any file on a system to which you have read access security list etc profile Qedit studies the file and determines whether it has sequence numbers or not If you ask for a rangelist of lines Qedit implicitly numbers a file without numbers It starts at line 1 0 and adds the current Set Increment value If the file has sequence numbers Qedit uses them unless it finds illegal numbers or numbers out of sequence It then prints the following message Error line number out of sequence 001200 renumbering the rest The string in parentheses is the incorrect line number You should make sure it contains numeric digits only and that it is greater than the number on the previous line To check this information you should text the file using the Unnumbered option After reporting the information Qedit then assigns new numbers to the lines starting with the last valid number and adding the current increment Qedit uses this shorthand character to refer to the most recent external file name For example list report cob page 1 5 list 500 600 Template Listing The LT command prints a column number template before the first line of the listing training of Qedit users is so easy that you will Remember that the first column number in a standard COBOL source file is column 7 not column 1 For a COBFREE file the first column is 1 In addition if you have done Set Left and Set Right to define margins for
85. mode like there is in vi Perform edit operations with control key sequences To exit Screen mode press E Edit Several Files at Once Qedit s primary scratch file is called Qeditscr By default this file is created in var tmp usr tmp is the default on older versions of HP UX or the path name specified in the TMPDIR environment variable The scratchfile name is qscr xxxxxxxxx where XXXXXXxxx is a random string generated by the HP UX tempnam routine If you want to move scratch files to a different directory you can set the TMPDIR environment variable TMPDIR home user1 tmp export TMPDIR Keep in mind that Qedit works with absolute filenames and these names can not have more than 240 characters Whenever you use the default options for Opening or Texting a file your work will be in the Qeditscr scratch file 50 Running Qedit under HP UX Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual How to Edit Several Files What if you want to edit two or more files and copy lines between them You could Text the first file Hold the selected lines Keep your changes then Text the second file and insert the lines However if you are doing numerous edits the constant Text and Keep operations are inconvenient It is faster to Text each file into an extra scratch file of its own Then use the Open or the Open n command to switch quickly between them By default Text always copies the file into the Qeditscr scratch file However Qe
86. not considered part of the data This means that the tag string on the next line is not moved to the new line It also means you cannot glue to columns past 73 Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Help Command H Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Gives instructions on the use of Qedit Everything in the Qedit User Manual is also in the Help command means the same as Help HELP command keyword TERMS word INTRO NEWS Default browse through the entire help file Q Quick Reference Guide Quick Help The parameters have the following meaning command explains command lists subsidiary keywords to select command keyword finds keyword under command command prints everything about the command TERMS word explains word see Glossary INTRO explains how to apply Qedit to typical problems NEWS shows any new features in Qedit Examples h text explain the Text command and show sub keywords h text tell all about Text Comma is required Quick Help HQ HQ looks for entries under the keyword Quick in the helpfile Quick contains the text from the Qedit Quick Reference Guide offering the experienced user a review of command syntax hq visual full screen options hq shortcuts quick list of shortcuts Notes The help file must be on the system for the Help command to work If the file is missing Qedit still works fine but you cannot get any on line help The default file name is
87. not a valid construct with the second statement is Delete bug start proc end proc Error Linenum Delete bug 10 30 You can use the Find command and the ZZ marker to work around the problem If you enter a simple strings on a Find command Qedit stops at the first string occurrence and sets the current line You can then perform any operation on that line or use it as a starting point If you specify a line range the Find command sets the ZZ marker to the block of lines You then use the ZZ marker on subsequent commands F start proc first 5 Start Procedure 1 F start proc end proc first Lines 5 11 saved in ZZ Delete bug zz 8 _bug display section 1 line Deleted Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit Commands Introduction General Notes Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit operates in Line mode or Visual mode depending upon the type of terminal The same commands are used in both modes In Line mode you do everything with commands In Visual mode you do most editing with built in functions of your terminal but use commands for some things Line mode commands work in Visual mode and Visual mode function keys work in Line mode Here we describe the Qedit commands in alphabetic order For each command we show both the longest and the shortest name that Qedit can recognize as in Add A Highlighted terms e g inenum and jargon words e g workfile are defined in the Glossary The
88. of a Job file Tab Character By default Qedit retains tab characters in a file when it Texts the file However another option is to expand the tab characters into spaces to the next tab as established by Set Tabs Stop You can expand tabs on a specific file by using the Expandtabs option on the Text or List or Add File command To force all file accesses to expand tabs do Set Expandtabs On the default is Off With Set Expandtabs On use the Savetabs option to access a file without expanding tabs into spaces text srcfile expandtabs set expandtabs on text dbfile savetabs override Set Expandtabs On If you are editing files with tab characters see Set Vis Tab Overriding Qedit s File Type Sometimes Qedit will interpret the format of the external file incorrectly You can override the file type that Qedit would assign by appending a file type keyword to the file name filename COBOL filename FTN or FORTRAN filename SPL filename PASCAL filename JOB filename RPG filename TEXT filename COBFREE filename DATA forces Jumbo workfile filename UNNUMBER ED filename HTML filename XML Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual filename QSL filename JAVA The keyword may be shortened to any leading substring but the comma is required You cannot use this option to force Qedit to warp a file into something that it is not You can only use it to resolve ambiguities i e between FORT
89. one by pressing Home twice Similarly you can go to the last line by pressing End twice The Home key equivalent is keypad 7 or Find on VT220 and the End key equivalent is keypad 1 or Select on VT220 You can also go to a line by searching for a string Press F to begin searching Qedit will ask you for two pieces of information First you need to enter the string you want to search for Second you need to enter the search options The search options are as follows Action o O Ignore type case of words Default case sensitive Search string must be a word surrounded by blanks or punctuation I Specified string is a pattern Default not to use patterns 36 Getting a Quick Start with VT Full Screen Editing Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Cut and Paste Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual a Default string can be anywhere in line 1 Start searching from line 1 Default start from current line To search for the next occurrence of a string press A Once the last string has been found Qedit will not return to the start of file Action O O L Begin marking a block of text press once to mark by complete lines press again to mark by partial lines press again to cancel marking line Copy marked lines to Hold0 file Cut marked lines to Hold0 file Paste lines from Hold file before current line Screen mode s model for cut and paste is similar to the cut and paste of Microsoft Windows First you mark a bloc
90. or renumbered The commands can only be undone in reverse order one at a time and no commands can be skipped Therefore you don t have to specify which command to Undo you are always presented with the next one then asked if you want to actually undo it If you want to see the commands in the Undo Stack use the Listundo command After an Undo another Undo will cancel the command that was one further back In this way you can Undo back to the time the file was first Texted or Opened If you Undo one step too far you can cancel your preceding Undo task using the Undo Redo command This option is accepted until there are no more Undo tasks to be cancelled Once you enter a non Undo edit command you have approved your Undo tasks and they can no longer be cancelled Or you can use Undo All to undo all the updates since the last Text or Open If you don t like the results after an Undo All you can put the file back in the edited state by doing another Undo i e you can Undo the Undo All Examples cq Bob Robret all mistake in Change 23 lines changed undo reverse Change command Command to Undo CQ Bob Robret all Update 8 shows actual update counts Undoing Changes in Visual Mode You can use the Undo command to cancel changes in Visual mode as well as in Line mode All of the changes you make on the screen before pressing Enter are treated by Qedit as one undo able command except for cut and paste operati
91. paste When you use HH HJ AH BH PH or FH Qedit must access a temporary file called Hold When you use MM CC DD JJ RR AO BO FO or PO Qedit must access a file called Hold0 This message means that an error has occurred in accessing this file Does another process in your session have it open Or are you out of disc space File full Part update Suggest Exit see qscreen If you add enough lines to a workfile eventually it will fill up Visual will then be unable to add in the new lines from your screen When this happens Qedit appends a copy of your screen image to the qscreen file from this file you can recover the lines that were not added if you desire To expand a workfile named ABC do Text ABC and Shut File nearly full Qedit will warn you when your workfile has only a block or two left This is your advance warning that soon you must do a Garbage collection in your workfile or expand the workfile Read error on CRT Try again or reduce speed Screen mode only works with HP type terminals and emulators If you use a VT terminal or emulator you should use Screen mode for full screen editing Refer to the appropriate section for a discussion on working with VT terminals You might also get this error if you run certain combinations of HP UX and the Windows 95 TCP IP stack If you think you might be in this situation please contact our technical support staff for details Troubleshooting and Error Messages 263
92. prompt set modify hp select MPE style modify set visual save on update on full screen options Each Set command may specify one keyword from among those listed below Here is a list of the Set keywords Account Alias Autocont Check CompatVarsub Decimal DL Editinput Expandtabs Extentsize Extprog Filename FORTRAN Hints Hppath Increment Interactive Justify Keep Language Where to find Qedified compilers and help files Redefine Qedit commands or create new commands Do not abort in batch on errors Verify Delete or Justify gt 5 lines hold programs Passes token thru if variable not set Apostrophe means Control Character 7 Bell Reserve memory in DL area for user Procs Remove line noise allow Roman 8 Expand tab characters into spaces when Texting Minimum sectors extent for Keep and New Attach an external program such as MPEX to Qedit Override file names on Help Hint Qzmodhlp files External files default to FORTRAN not SPL Disable the hint of the day Override default path for cmd prog files MPE V Default increment between added lines Override batch session mode Margins and options for justifying and centering Format of the next Keep file Type of program or text to be kept in this file Qedit Commands 181 182 Qedit Commands Left Length Lib Limits List Modify Open Pattern Priority Prompt Right RL Shift Spell Statistics Suspe
93. range3 and range4 The same column can be included in multiple column ranges The total Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual DOUBLE SHIFT SRIGHTBY spaces INCLUDE USE Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual number of columns listed cannot exceed the absolute line length maximum 8 172 characters Although a template Listing is allowed with columns the output might not be very helpful For example LT column 15 20 Taaie A 10 2 pp 3 QQQ 4 rrrr List include is supported with columns but included files are treated as if they are the same type as the main file For example if you include a COBOL file within a Data file the COBOL file will start at column one You can specify a rangelist e g a search string with columns Qedit first searches for the string which can appear anywhere on the line then applies the columns specification Double space the listing or DBL Shift the listing four spaces to the right Shift the listing to the right by the number of spaces The rightby option works like the shift option It allows you to shift the printed output to the right The shift option shifts the output by four spaces The rightby option allows you to specify the number of spaces by which the output is shifted This number can be between 1 and 30 List Sshift LP shifts output by four spaces List Srightby 4 LP also shifts output by four spaces List Srightby 20 LP shifts output by 20 s
94. search for caseless abc in columns 30 35 and smart xyz in columns 50 60 If either string is missing the line is not selected The complete rangelist is saved and used when the previous string syntax i e a null string is entered For example List Qedit Glossary 289 290 Qedit Glossary Each command has a default rangelist The following commands default to the current line Add Append Change Delete Find start search at Hold List Modify Proc Replace Visual enter Visual mode at current line ZZ Justify defaults to for Center Left or Right and to end maintaining blank lines between paragraphs for Format or Both Before Do and Redo defaults to the last command entered Relative Line Numbers When you tell Qedit which line you are interested in you can either specify the exact line number as in list 5 or list last or you can specify a position relative to an exact line as in list 6 or list last 1 The first lists a line that is 6 lines after the current line and second lists the second from last line in the file The is optional Relative line numbers can go forward or backward 10 000 lines To modify the text around the current line use modify 5 use Control Y to stop the Modify modify 5 the is optional Qedit will even let you use relative line numbers when looking at an external file as in list invoice job last 10 last Right
95. set no tab stops Set Tabs STOP n every 2 to 15 columns or Set Tabs with a custom list of column numbers The maximum number of custom tab stops is 32 Remember that the columns of input text are numbered differently depending on the source language In SPL Pascal FORTRAN RPG Text Data and Job the first column is numbered 1 in standard COBOL it is 7 You cannot set a tab in the first column set tabs stop 8 every 8 columns 9 17 25 33 set tabs 5 10 15 SPL FORTRAN RPG Job Text Pas set tabs 12 16 20 COBOL set tabs null cancel all tabs Term Set Term Columns nnn Default 80 Initially 80 When you run Qedit it tries to determine the number of columns in the display width of your terminal The default is 80 You can override this value by setting the display width manually and putting the correct value in the RCRTWIDTH variable If the variable is not set Qedit queries your terminal for the width If you change it manually from within Qedit you can force a re query by doing Set Visual Stop However there is an easier way On most terminals Set Term Columns nnn adjusts the display width of your terminal You must be on an HP type terminal whose width can be varied and the column value nnn can be between 80 and 999 It is better to use this command to change the number of columns than to do it manually because the command also adjusts your terminal listing file width and other parameters within Qedit
96. set to FORTRAN i e to JOB COBOL SPL etc Qedit treats the file as an SPL or Pascal file If a file is mistakenly created as SPL or Pascal you can change it to FORTRAN with Set Lang FORTRAN You can also resolve the Qedit Commands 189 190 Qedit Commands ambiguity by specifying the language after the file name when you Text it e g text abc fortran If you primarily edit FORTRAN source files you can avoid this problem with Set FORTRAN When this option is set Qedit will always resolve decisions on external files in favor of FORTRAN regardless of the current language setting You may then have to convert the occasional file from FORTRAN to SPL or Pascal Halfbright Set Halfbright ON OFF Initially ON Certain monitors do not support halfbright display enhancements very well Some messages and prompts are hardly visible To prevent Qedit from using halfbright enter Set Halfbright Off Hints Set Hints ON OFF Initially ON This option does not apply to Qedit UX It is still accepted for compatibility with the MPE version of Qedit Hppath Set Hppath path list Initially hpgroup pub pub sys This option does not apply to Qedit UX It is still accepted for compatibility with the MPE version of Qedit Increment Set Increment Jinenum Initially depends The default increment between new lines is 1 000 in SPL FORTRAN Pascal TEXT RPG JOB and COBFREE and 0 100 in standard COBOL You can over
97. shuts the current workfile and removes it from the list of recently accessed files This is useful to stop desired file names from dropping off the bottom of the list If the file is a scratch file you are prompted to Discard Changes Set Open Defer On If you use Set Open Defer On the Open command does not acquire write access to a workfile until you make a change to it The workfile is opened with read access by default unless Qedit knows you are going to be writing to it as when Text or Add force an Open If you Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual only browse through the file the Last Mod date does not change This includes full screen mode viewing However if you make any changes to the file or use Set Left Right Length Lang Qedit reopens the workfile with write access It is important to remember that certain workfile attributes and settings are normally saved when the file is opened with write access Some of these settings are the ZZ marker the current line marker and a new default Keep name modified with Set Keep Name If you explicitly open a workfile in Browse mode or use Set Open Defer On these settings are not updated permanently unless the file is re opened with write access You can override the current Set Open Defer value by doing Open filename Defer or Open filename Nodefer There are a few error conditions that may occur if you attempt to modify a file because now someone e
98. standard status line uses display enhancements all across the screen to highlight the status fields For a status line with fewer display enhancements use Set Vis Halfbright On Hidetags Set Visual Hidetags ON Qedit Commands 217 218 Qedit Commands Default Off The Hidetags option replaces the 1 2 3 line tags on your screen with a Security Video enhancement and some line drawing characters This makes the Visual screen cleaner and less confusing However the option only works if your terminal supports both Security Video and line drawing It works on the 700 92 the 2392 the Cumulus terminal and with Reflection 1 for DOS It fails with hpterm HP UX on some versions of Reflection for Windows and Macintosh and all versions of Session Home Set Visual Home ON OFF Default On After processing the Enter key or a function key Visual places the cursor on the gt line This makes it convenient to enter a command You must then press Return a few times to move the cursor down into the text Set Vis Home Off puts the cursor at the first column of the line instead After a Find or Findup this means the cursor will appear on the first character of the found string Ignorelf Set Visual Ignorelf ON Default Off Normally when Qedit reads the screen it finds a Return and line feed at the end of each line Qedit uses this information to divide the characters of the screen read into lines and then match them up with
99. t indicates tab characters qux Set Decimal On qux Change t 9 change t to actual tab characters qux Keep You can now use the file command on these files file myfilel myfilel ascii text myfilel work Qedit 48 Getting a Quick Start with Line Mode Editing Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Running Qedit under HP UX Running Qedit To run Qedit for HP UX type this command opt robelle bin qgedit Qedit Copyright Robelle Solutions Technology Inc 1977 2001 Version 5 7 Type for help qux Qedit prints its version number and prompts with qux You type commands ending each with Return For example to edit a file enter a Text command qux text filename To save your edits use the Keep command When you start Qedit you are initially in Line mode you type command and text lines ending each with the Return key Qedit has two full screen modes Visual mode for HP terminals and Screen mode for VT terminals Visual Mode for HP Terminals Full screen editing as implemented on HP3000 computers only works on HP UX versions earlier than 11 0 On HP UX 11 0 or later full screen editing is available in Screen mode Set Visual Screen On on VT type terminals or in Visual Blockemulation emulation Set Visual Blockemulation On on HP type terminals As its name implies Blockemulation emulates block mode operations by reading each line one by one instead of reading the whole screen in a sin
100. the file is erased If the file has been modified Qedit prompts for a confirmation shut Reminder you have not saved the changes to home bob testisql c var tmp qscr CAAa09829 Clear file no If you answer No nothing happens The workfile remains open the original file is still in use and a warning is displayed File NOT cleared Files still open When Text Exclusive is On workfile must be cleared to Shut If you answer Yes the workfile is cleared and the original file is released This accomplishes two things e releases the file so it can be used by someone else and does not remain blocked e forces the user to stop and decide what should be done with the changes e forces the user to text the file in again to make sure he has the latest version Fixed length Cobol Source Files By default all UNIX files are processed as variable length files If needed you can override this option using Set Keep Var OFF Some Cobol compilers prefer to have fixed length records It can quickly become tedious to enter the Set Keep command after every Text command not to mention the likelihood of forgetting to do it If you wish to force all Cobol source files to be processed as fixed length files use Set Text Cobolfixed ON Every Cobol source texted in from that point will be fixed length If a file has already been texted in the Keep command will switch to fixed length records automatically Qedit displays a warning in this case
101. the lines in your file However some networks strip the line feed from the lines sending only the Return In this case Qedit will print an error such as Missing status line and the qscreen dump will indicate that Returns were found without line feeds It may be easier to reconfigure Qedit than your network the Set Vis Ignorelf On option directs Qedit to accept screens with only a Return at the end of each line and without the line feed Qedit enables the Ignorelf option whenever it is being run on the Qcterm terminal emulator If you are using the Minisoft 92 terminal emulator from Minisoft Inc you should always enable the Ignorelf option Inschar Set Visual Inschar ON Default Off Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual By default Visual mode disables Insert Char and you must enable it after each time you press Enter or a function key Set Vis Inschar On tells Visual to enable Insert Char each time it displays the screen Label Set Visual Label ON OFF Default On When you memorize the eight function keys you can speed entry into Visual by disabling the labels on the screen Use Set Vis Label OFF This only works with a 2645 terminal where the labels must actually be painted into the display memory every time a new page is written Marginfixed Set Visual Marginfixed ON OFF Default none Qedit normally adjusts the terminal right margin and display width based on the file s record lengt
102. the number of lines defined in the 5Set Visual Roll option Enter 2 minus signs to scroll up twice the number of lines and so on The minus sign is the default scrollup character You can change it to another character that you may find easier to type It must be a printable character and must not be a valid copy paste code Valid codes are A BC DFGHJMPR VZ UseSet Visual Scrollup c to change the character You can enter Set Visual Scrollup to reset it back to the default character Stop Set Visual Stop The Set Visual Stop command resets Qedit to an uninitialized state On your next function Qedit will re identify your terminal and re check the entire context Use this when changing your terminal configuration while inside Qedit Tab Set Visual Tab nnn char Default None If you edit text containing tab characters most will appear as dots with a at the left of the line Otherwise the tab characters would be executed by your terminal and be lost To get around this problem you can define another character as a translation for the tab character For example Set Vis Tab defines as meaning tab When Visual needs to print a tab on the screen it prints a instead When Visual sees any on the screen it converts it into a tab internally To avoid every valid occurrence of an alias character turning into a tab Visual mode looks for alias characters that already occur in the text Any line with a valid
103. to every user that invokes Qedit If you can t build opt robelle qeditmgr or you don t think your Set options will appeal to everyone create the file HOME geditmgr with your personal Set commands A typical configuration file for a COBOL shop might look like this Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual These are default Qedit values for all users set lang cobolx all on always use 80 columns set x date list off mark changed lines with date set check on verify delete format of gt 5 lines set vis save 1 Visual saves function keys z listj last define Z command set shift down 3 up 3 shift everything but strings Syntax of Set Commands The syntax descriptions that follow list the initial values These are also the defaults that are used if you omit values in Set commands For example Set Foo ON OFF Default ON Initially OFF The imaginary Foo keyword may be set ON or OFF Initially when Qedit starts up it is OFF Thereafter if you type Set Foo without specifying ON or OFF the default will be as though you had specified ON Error Messages If you type a Set command that Qedit does not understand you usually get an error message telling you specifically what is wrong sometimes suggesting valid values Occasionally you will see the error message Error Param This is Qedit s catch all message for when you have typed something that it doesn t like and cannot g
104. to insert use Control B If you prefer HP style modify D R I and U use the Redo command instead of Before or do Set Modify HP Examples ls users obb users obb not found Before ls users obb bob ls users bob bob is not spelled right redo most recent command last command is printed you enter changes to it the edited command is shown you press Return listredo 10 before 5 bef 8 10 b 1s b temp before 2 before 5 2 show last 10 commands redo 5th command in stack redo 8th through 10th redo last ls command redo last containing temp redo command before previous redo by relative lines Notes Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit Commands 95 96 Qedit Commands HP UX reacts to certain control characters which might conflict with the Qzmodify codes For example control D sends an end of file signal to HP UX but is also the delete character in Qzmodify You should use the HP UX stty program to change the default end of file signal Please see the section Control Characters and stty on page 53 for more details If you wish to change any characters within the line the modify operators are the regular Control Codes used in Qedit Any printing characters replace the ones above Control D plus spaces deletes columns above Control B puts you into insert before mode Control A starts appending characters at the end of line Control A Control D plus s
105. to the end of the current line gt ddxyz Deletes the last two characters from the end of the current line and then places xyz at the end of the line gt IXyZ Replaces the last three characters in the current line with xyz gt IXyZ Appends xyz to the end of the line In this case the i command is superfluous because gt accomplishes the same result Using gt xyz would be sufficient c ab def Changes all occurrences of ab to def starting at c c ab Deletes all occurrences of ab starting at c CXYZ Replace the current text with cxyz starting at c Because delimiters have not been specified as they were in the previous two examples this is a simple replacement with the four characters Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit Commands 167 New Command N Creates a new empty Qedit workfile and opens it This can be either an unnamed extra scratch file or a named workfile The advantages of a workfile are that you can instantly Open and Shut it and that it compresses your data You can use Text to make a copy of a Qedit file when you wish to protect the work you have done NEW filename language size NEW Default extra scratch 3200 lines Qedit shuts the current file and builds filename which it then opens for editing If you leave out filename Qedit creates a new extra scratch file and assigns it a number 1 2 3 so that you can recognize it in Verify Open and Open Up to eight extra scratch files are a
106. way a string search is done However each subpattern can then be used in a replacement operation Subpatterns are numbered from 0 to 9 Subpattern 0 is reserved and represents the complete matched string Note that subpattern 0 is implicit and is always available even if the expression does not contain parentheses Explicit subpatterns are numbered from 1 to 9 starting from the left of the expression Subpatterns can be referenced in a replacement regexp by using the escape character a backslash followed by the subpattern number When applying the replacement string backreferences are substituted with the actual matching text Backreferences can be used as many times as needed Each reference ends up with the original text Let s say we have a file that contains a series of phone numbers In North America and possibly other countries phone numbers contain a 3 digit area code followed by a 3 digit exchange number and finally a 4 digit individual number Unfortunately in our case the phone numbers are just series of 10 numeric digits without separators For example 1234567890 1112224444 9087374456 We would like a fast and easy way to format them so that the numbers are easier to read To find all these strings we can use the following regexp 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 We use the 0 9 character class to specify that we are expecting only numeric digits In this example there are t
107. without updating the current page You can refer to the current line in your workfile by means of e g Modify 10 10 is usually the default rangelist for a command if you do not specify one The pointer is moved by these commands Command Status of After the Command Add last line added Change last line changed Delete previous or next line it depends Find last line found or end of file Findup last line found or start of file Hold last line held Justify last line updated Keep no change to current line 296 Qedit Glossary Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual List last line listed Lsort last line sorted Modify last line modified Proc last line passed Replace last line replaced Text first line in file Visual line of last page displayed An can also refer to the current or recent workfile as in Open or Use The shortcut refers to the currently open Qedit workfile unless none is open then it refers to the one most recently Shut An asterisk in regular expressions indicates the preceding element might repeat zero optional or more times in the text list op q regexp p might be missing or appears many times Means Previous String Literal Match in Regexp or Special Characters in Regexp If you enter only a Return in a command line Qedit increments the current line pointer to the next line and displays it If you enter a command line containing only
108. work Current 1 Margins 1 80 qux sh myfilel newwork File renamed Examples open crept45 dev open source file to edit fmodity Bf ies make some changes shut close workfile Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit Commands 235 Spell Command SP The Spell command is not available in Qedit UX 236 Qedit Commands Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Text Command T Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Copies a file into Qedit Use Text to convert a file into Qedit format or to make a copy of an existing file After a Text the new copy is open and ready to edit or browse TEXT filename type filename SAVETABS filename BROWSE filename NEW filename SETINCR filename LABELS filename LENGTH size workfile workformat size filename tvpe Q unnumbered J extra scr file same as NEW Defaults size 50 bigger If you do not specify a workfile Qedit checks to see if you have a workfile Open and it is empty If it is Qedit will Text filename into it If not Text uses the primary scratch file If you do Text xx New or TextJ Qedit creates an extra scratch file to receive the copied file You can have up to eight extra scratch files as well as the primary scratch file and switch among them with Open Use filename type to override the attributes that Qedit assigns to your file Use workfile workformat to override the attributes assigned to the workfile See below for detail
109. 0 of CobX source files The Cobol tag value is defined using the Set X command Once enabled updated lines and added lines are automatically updated with the tag They can also be modified manually with custom tag values In its regular form the Change command affects only the text area in columns 7 to 72 If you wish to make changes to Cobol tags use the T Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual suffix You can think of it as the Tag option This option operates only on the tag area itself columns 73 to 80 change CUST SUPP all change cust to supp in all lines cust must be between columns 7 and 72 changeT CUST SUPP all change cust to supp in all lines cust must be between columns 73 and 80 To to this the Tag option temporarily changes the margins to 73 80 Qedit displays a warning every time this option is used Because the margin values have changed explicit column range in a Window can only be between 73 and 80 changeT CUST 50 60 SUPP all Warning ChangeT editing the Cobol tag area only 73 80 Error Window changeT CUST 73 80 SUPP all ChangeT editing the Cobol tag area only 73 80 SUPP0102 line changed Because the margins have been changed Qedit displays text in the tag area only except when the Justify option is used In this case Qedit prompts for confirmation before making the change It would be hard to determine if a line needs
110. 000 press Return again Here is a partial list of special things you can do with Modify B insert text Before this column D DELETE text from this column onward AL add text after the LAST column in the line 42 Getting a Quick Start with Line Mode Editing Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual O OVERWRITE or replace columns T TRAVEL over the line without changing it G GOOFED Put the line back the way it was please Note The little symbol is a shorthand way of saying that you hold down the Control key on some keyboards abbreviated Ctrl while at the same time pressing the letter For example B or Control B keep the Control key down with one finger while with another type a B These symbols won t show up on your screen HP UX reacts to certain control characters which might conflict with the Qzmodify codes For example control D sends an end of file signal to HP UX but is also the delete character in Qzmodify You should use the HP UX st ty program to change the default end of file signal Please see the section Control Characters and stty on page 53 for more details This command is easy to use but awkward to describe you ll understand how to use it much faster if you give it a try Let s take a typical example and modify line 5 of our memo Begin by typing m5 and of course pressing Return Then to replace daily with every day our first step is to delete the word Use the sp
111. 0100 86 Qedit Commands Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Add Command A Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Adds lines into the workfile There are five varieties of Add that cover all the ways you can add lines into a Qedit workfile NEW Add new lines to your workfile from Stdin STRING Add a new line from the command prompt COPY Copy lines from one place to another MOVE Move lines from one place to another FILE Bring lines in from an external file Add Adding New Lines Add some new lines from the terminal keyboard Insert them at a given line number or after it ADD linenum Q no linenums J justified T template Default linenum The inenum parameter specifies where to add new lines and also determines the increment between new lines If Jinenum is 9 1 lines will be incremented by 0 1 if 9 01 then 0 01 If Jinenum already exists Qedit increments it and begins adding after the existing line If linenum is 0 Qedit adds new lines before the first existing line in the file If you don t say which inenum Add inserts the lines after the current position See Miscellaneous Points below Examples add 5 add new lines after line 5 Qedit prompts with line number you enter line of text and Return you enter or Control Y to stop add after line no prompt This is new text end the Add command Temporary Workfile If you do not have a named workfile Open when you Add Qedit autom
112. 1 00 1 Null Special not No 0 0 sda PH 1 00 Right 1 00 1 Null Special not No 0 0 we COBFR 1 00 Right 1 00 1 Null Special not No EE 0 0 HTML 1 00 Right 1 00 1 Null Special No 0 0 XML 1 00 Right 1 00 1 Null Special No 0 0 JAVA 1 00 Right 1 00 1 Null Special not No 0 0 ii a a 0 0 Taa COBOL and COBOLX are identical except that COBOLX allows data to extend into columns 73 80 while COBOL does not This is a protection against compile errors for those programmers who do not use columns 73 80 for comments You can force all COBOL files to be in COBOLX format by using set lang cobolx all on This is useful when you are using Set X to tag program changes with a string or the date You can change from a non COBOL to a COBOL language if the highest line number in your file is less than or equal to 999 999 Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual The COBOL and COBOLX languages follow the COBOL standards very carefully These standards describe the format of a statement Most if not all compilers support the standards Some compilers however allow a source file to be in a different format Here is a quick summary of the differences between COBOL COBOLX and COBFREE COBOL COBOLX COBFREE Line numbers columns 1 6 columns 1 6 none Control column column 7 column 7 column 1 Statements columns 8 72 columns 8 72 columns 1 1 000 Comments non
113. 15 1 display a line 415 You will need to Purge the old file proc down 415 1 try it lowercase Set Shift DOWN 1 2 3 4 or 415 you will need to purge the old file proc up 415 1 try it uppercase Set Shift UP 1 2 3 4 or 0 2 415 YOU WILL NEED TO PURGE THE OLD FILE proc down lowercase is better proc 410 415 downshift some more lines pq 420 1002 many more quietly pj up 1003 upshift with approval 1003 gt GET D LINE Okay yes If you always configure the shifting routines to the same option e g skip strings with double quotes you can use Set Shift to define the configuration set shift down 2 up 2 Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit Commands 173 Q Command Q 174 Qedit Commands Prints a message on stdlist Q string Default print a blank line The string of up to 80 characters is printed on stdlist Use the Q command to print prompts from usefiles This works especially well when you use a file quietly Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Redo Command REDO Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Enables you to modify and repeat any of the previous 1 000 command lines REDO start stop string ALL Default redo the previous command The Redo command allows you to modify the commands before it executes them If you don t need to change them use the Do command Commands are numbered sequentially from 1 as entered
114. 2224444 4456 Middle 737 Area 908 Complete 9087374456 Escaped Characters in Replacement String Escaped sequences can also be used in the replacement string of a Change command making it easier to insert special characters All escaped sequences are valid in the replacement except for octal values these are coded using octal digits For example 007 can be used to represent the bell character However backreferences in the replacement string are represented by n where n is a digit from 0 to 9 Because of that 007 might be interpreted as backreference 0 followed by the literal 07 bell character To work around this limitation a backslash followed by a digit in a replacement string is always assumed to be a backreference To specify special characters using numeric values you should use hexadecimal notation e g x007 278 Regular Expressions Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit Glossary Introduction Terms Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Certain symbols and terms are common to many Qedit commands They are defined here in alphabetical order The slots for variables within the command definitions are highlighted in the text You replace these variable fields with your real life item For instance the syntax for the Use command is Use filename You replace the term filename with any valid filename For example use sample quse Abbreviating You can abbreviate many Qedit commands You can s
115. 286 Qedit Glossary 55 01 Sample line of text Linenum Each line in the workfile has a linenum e g 999 99 that determines its relative location in the workfile Because each line number has a fractional part lines can be added between existing lines For example add 1 1 1 1 line inserted between 1 2 line inserted between 18 ff list 1 2 REMARK 1 line inserted between 1 1 1 2 line inserted between 2 IDENTIFICATION DIVISION The smallest increment that you can have between two lines is 0 001 After adding enough lines in a single spot you will not be able to add any more For example lines cannot be added between 5 111 and 5 112 When this happens use Renum to renumber all or part of your file or use Set Vis Renum On The simplest form of Qedit commands refers to a single linenum e nnnnn nnn 1 1 0 1 05 05 100 1000 10000 001 FIRST the first line in the file lowest line number e LAST the last line in the file highest line number e default abbreviation for FIRST e default abbreviation for LAST e the most recently accessed line Examples of commands that refer to a single inenum are add 50 1 add new lines at line 50 1 Jo REY 100 change X to Y in line 100 delete last delete the last line in the file ylisti list the first line in the file modify modify the current line replace 1 replace penultimate line in file list 200 1 list line 200 1 if it exists Qe
116. 5 page in column 1 of previous file set left 55 set right 132 set margins in wide file listt all show template above columns list bob upshift bob BOB Bob ette list UPD MASTG pat strings UPD and MAST both in line pattern matching Options You can configure permanent options for the List command using Set List you can also select temporary options within a specific List command The temporary options are preceded by a dollar sign LIST option filename UNN rangelist The temporary options come after the command name and before the external filename and rangelist Here are the options accepted in the List command DEVice device The device option sends output to a specified device The device must be a valid printer name or class The following command sends lines 1 through 30 in the current file to the device printer list device printer 1 30 lp lpa lpb record lp lpa and lpb send output to a device associated with an environment variable of the same name For example to print to the device called Laser with the lpa option you must set the LPA environment variable to Laser as in export lpa laser If the LP environment variable is not set Qedit will attempt to send the output to the default system printer But if the LPA or LPB environment variables are not set with a valid device name an error will occur Record sends output to
117. 5 535 lines if original format workfile Unable to write to a file example L LP ALL K KFILE Unable to write a block to the current workrfile Probably indicates a confused workfile The external workfile cannot be accessed because it is being edited on some other terminal or someone aborted Qedit with the file open You can recover such files by Opening them The current language setting has been changed by Open Text or Set Lang This may also change the INCR WINDOW etc The command contains an invalid line number example L 5 9999 Unable to open a file to the LP Illegal control character in a Modify line an ASCII character with a value less than 32 that is not in the Set Modify list of codes A specific line number is required but does not exist example AJ 100 when line 100 doesn t exist Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual No Open No Write Overflow Param Paren Proc Range Recovery Size String Target Too High Window A workfile must be Opened before any editing can be done The workfile cannot be Opened with write access Someone else may be editing the file or you may not have proper security access to the file A data line has been entered Add Replace or created Change Modify that is greater than the maximum length allowed by the current language setting Or a file has been Texted that is too large for the wo
118. 51 2 fghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 1 line changed colm 1 5 88 90 2 fghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 1 line changed Approving Each Changed Line Use COLMJ to give yourself approval over each change before it is updated With COLMSJ Qedit displays the line as it would be and asks you for a Yes No or Modify answer CobX Tags Cobol tags are short strings stored in columns 73 to 80 of CobX source files The Cobol tag value is defined using the Set X command Once enabled updated lines and added lines are automatically updated with the tag They can also be modified manually with custom tag values In its regular form the Colmove command affects only the text area in columns 7 to 72 If you wish to make changes to Cobol tags use the T suffix You can think of it as the Tag option This option operates only on the tag area itself columns 73 to 80 ColmT 73 74 79 80 all copies content of columns 73 and 74 into columns 79 80 ColmT 73 74 75 all inserts content of columns 73 and 74 in column 75 Columns 76 80 are shifted To to this the Tag option temporarily changes the margins to 73 80 Qedit displays a warning every time this option is used Because the margin values have changed explicit column range in the source and destination columns can only be between 73 and 80 ColmoveT 23 24 79 80 all Warning ColcopyT editing the Cobol tag area only 73 80 Error The Sourcestart column 23 is not between 73 and 80 ColmoveT 73
119. 8 Words Command Weren nie E TEE E A an eerste 250 Lave Command Z ine ee bees EEE EO E EE N RE E E 251 ZE COMMANA nes nE EEA EET EE ous Soest tonne seis EE ctu venice ims O E 252 Calculator Command F niinen E EE AE E hem eee 253 Troubleshooting and Error Messages 257 TNtHODUCHON gt enana na a a a A tee R E eee a E tee 257 Messa SES vers a a E A e A A EAER 257 QUIM THOT S i ssscc ce bowetceds E a E ads weeks E E E Ea 260 Errors 1M VASUAD ensinar a e N E O nantes ted N a a Ae 260 Using Visual with Ds 2 Dc ates cacindancyau cheney otac vay eeececveaseseigesacco ete cme 260 U i g Visual on AEP Xs iret es ccs neues eas ens oaahcee nies ER E 260 Terminals Supported by Visual c cccsscssssscssscserssssesencseensesees 260 Problems with 700 9x Terminals 6 siidasssctdsanetassinacmetioeea ees 260 Visual Error Messages scat lacie sictut oxen acess cadeculastes she laneaul cao ey iad cel 261 File Formats 265 Tint OGUC UI OM sis arnee EEE A EE ncaa tas losses cine eeus tesa seas cove E been rS 265 Qedit Work files re ee EE E EE EEEE E S E E E EE E N o Eie 265 Original Format Work tiles Senare stoe E de caste TREE O EEE eet O T REEE 265 JUMO W Orke Se nsee oE hese E EAE N ewe eck apie gees seein tees A EERE 266 External File gramaren steen e e sual E EEE AO ese Naini A EEES 267 Regular Expressions 271 Tatrod ctions ai erea E E EE oh lea EEEE E 271 Metacharactei Sis nana n r E A A E AE ETE E AE ENR 271 Character Clas Siia RE cede e AE A E
120. Both means it checks the file code and the file extension Qedit maps an ASCII external file into one of these file formats Qedit checks the last eight columns of each of the first five lines for an ascending sequence number If five lines with valid sequence numbers are found the file is treated as a Numbered file Qedit may sometimes mistake a data file for a source file with sequence numbers If there is an ambiguity in identifying the language of an external file you can direct Qedit to the proper choice by appending a file type to the file name in the Text List and Add commands For example List abc unn Text def pascal External files with 80 character records and no valid SPL sequence numbers are treated as RPG files if the current language setting is RPG otherwise they are treated as JOB files File Formats 269 Regular Expressions Introduction Metacharacters Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Regular expressions might look like wildcards used in the Pattern search option Regular expressions are sometimes compared to wildcards but in fact they are much more powerful and can be much more complex You have to practice in order to use them efficiently and to their full potential For brevity we will often refer to regular expressions simply as regexp In Qedit s line mode you can use regular expression in most places where you can use a string or pattern In fact you specify regular expressions in Qedit similar
121. C Shell Ssetenv EDITOR gedit s cvisual Scratch File When Qedit needs a disposable scratch file e g for Text or Add it creates a Qedit format file in var tmp by default usr tmp is the default on older versions of HP UX or the path name specified in the TMPDIR environment variable The scratchfile name is qscr xXXXXxXXXXX Where Xxxxxxxxx is a random string generated by the HP UX tempnam routine Keep in mind that Qedit works with absolute filenames and these names can not have more than 240 characters Because all HP UX files are permanent Qedit must purge this scratch file when you exit Qedit If you have made any changes Qedit asks whether you want to discard the changes that you have made 56 Running Qedit under HP UX Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Hold Files Qedit has two Hold files Hold and Hold0 The first one is created using the Hold command or with HH HJ in Visual mode Lines are written to the Hold0 file every time you move or copy with the Add command MM CC and DD in Visual mode or justify JJ or replicate RR lines in full screen mode By default these Hold files are created in var tmp usr tmp is the default on older versions of HP UX or the path name specified in the TMPDIR environment variable The Hold files are called qholdxxxxxxxxx explicit Hold and qholdxxxxxxxxx 0 implicit hold file where xxxxxxxxx is a random string generated by the HP U
122. DADUNBPWNHRrR OW N Deleting Lines To demonstrate the Delete command we ll get rid of our memo template On some systems Qedit asks for confirmation before deleting a large number of lines If so you can cancel the deletion just by pressing Return to confirm the deletion type yes and press Return The abbreviation for Delete is simply D Ja first 12 MEMO TO News Simulation Department DATE November 18 2000 FROM Marie Reimer Publicity Department DELETE 6 lines no yes If you typed yes without due consideration you now have a chance to take it back Press Control Y and Qedit saves your bacon with the message Undeleted But you must press Control Y immediately if you do anything else between the deletion and the rescue Qedit will commit to the deletion However in this situation the Undo command can bring your lines back even if you have made more changes You must undo each change to the file in reverse order See the Qedit Commands chapter of the manual for details Help Command On line help is available on every topic in Qedit After you ve become an expert with the commands introduced here you can use Help to teach yourself all sorts of amazing new commands To get Help type a question mark or the word HELP help or 46 Getting a Quick Start with Line Mode Editing Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Saving the File Qedit responds with a list of its commands and at the bot
123. Index Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual
124. LINE 5 prints existing contents 5 NEW LINE 5 prompts you with linenum Column Editing with Hold You can use the hold option of the Replace command to do extensive column editing 2s oe aN SAS oo ee OG A KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK x Page One x kkkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkkkkxk kxxk kxx k kkkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkkkkkxxk kxx k Page Two 6 kkkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkkkxkxk kxxk kxx holdq 4 6 hold the second page of text deleteq 4 6 now delete those lines set left 20 set your left margin to starting column repq Shold 1 3 overlay from the Hold file set left 1 don t forget to reset left margin 1t EE lO ewetee 20 seks he ha ew ete ce tO 2 KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK z Page One A nE Page Two 5 KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK You can copy columns of text from one position in a line to another by setting margins with the Set Left and Set Right commands holding the columns of text that you want to copy setting new margins and replacing the new column range with the text in the Hold file 180 Qedit Commands Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Set Command S Changes configuration options of Qedit SET keyword value Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual You can use Qedit in its default mode as it comes out of the box To get the most out of Qedit you will eventually want to try some of the optional features To see all of the Set options available and their minimal abbreviations type Verify All at the
125. LPCRT stdlist via Record mode Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit Commands 137 138 Qedit Commands HEX OCTAL DECIMAL CHAR PCL code DUPLEX EVEN ODD SCOLUMNS range Numeric dump Remove garbage combines with Hex Octal Dec LaserJet fonts and orientation Double sided printing on certain LaserJets Outputs even or odd number of pages Lists only certain columns The columns option allows you to list only the contents of certain columns You can specify up to four column ranges The ranges have to be enclosed in parentheses and can be separated by commas or spaces A range must have a start column and optionally an end column If only a start column is specified the end column is assumed to be the same In this case Qedit lists only one column For example List columns 5 lists only the contents of column 5 List columns 5 10 lists the contents of columns 5 to 10 List columns 5 20 30 lists column 5 and 20 to 30 Column numbers must be valid for the Language of the file For most files the first column is 1 For COBOL type files the first column is 7 Column numbers must also be within the current left and right margins The column numbers do not have to be entered in a particular order For example the column numbers in the first range can be greater than the column numbers in the second range The text appears in range order i e rangel range2
126. O labels 2645 2 display user keys 3 display modes keys 4 remove labels from screen 5 display default F1 F8 key labels 6 display the Qedit labels These values define which key labels will be displayed when you are in Line mode rather than Screen mode Technical Notes Qedit turns echo off echo is reset to its previous state on exit disables the Break key and disables messages from other users Setmsg OFF on MPE and mesg n on HP UX Visual disables your Type Ahead Engine if you have one and have not done Set Vis TAE Off and puts your HP terminal into block mode page mode but with Format off Qedit loads the function keys with their default values and writes descriptive labels for them Qedit Commands 225 226 Qedit Commands Warnings Set Warnings ON OFF Default OFF Initially ON When you put commands in a usefile for an end user it is often irritating to have Qedit print numerous warnings and status messages i e Shut Qeditscr 55 Warning Noline etc Set Warnings OFF will suppress all of those warnings It also suppresses printing the line when you enter a line number to move the current position i e 55 sets to 55 but does not print line 55 Whichcomp Set Whichcomp keyword value Initially COBOL FORTRAN 66 Pascal V IN Robelle This option does not apply to Qedit UX It is still accepted for compatibility with the MPE version of Qedit Window Set Window window Def
127. Output Record Separator ORS argument is used to specify the character to be inserted between lines In this case you don t specify any Because of a limitation in awk you cannot assemble lines with more than 3 071 bytes So you have to remember not to exceed this maximum in the fold command Another option is to use the UNIX tr command and remove all Newline characters tr d n lt shortfile gt longfile Lines Strings and Ranges Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Character strings can be used of line numbers to qualify lines on most commands In its simplest form a command can have a single string using all the search window defaults List enhancement The search string can be further qualified using temporary window settings as in List enhancement Upshift 20 50 This example searches for the word enhancement regardless of the case used in columns 20 to 50 Qedit allows up to 10 search strings on a single command Individual strings are separated from each other with the OR keyword Each string can have its own temporary window List enhancement U 20 50 or bug or customer 1 30 The search range can be different depending on the command it is used on For example a List command searches all the lines in the file by default while a Find command starts from the current line The search range can be specified on individual commands using a rangelist A rangelist is often specified using line num
128. P UX User Manual you wish If you do not set RCRTWIDTH Qcterm emulates a 700 92 terminal but can display 200 columns as well as 80 or 132 columns normally available on a 700 92 terminal Qedit will query the terminal to see how wide display memory is at startup Qedit must determine the width of display memory in order to properly fold listings of lines that will overflow that width and to reset the width after it has been changed To change the Line mode display width while within Qedit do Set Term Columns Function Key Labels You can set the RLABELDEFAULT variable to specify what function key labels appear upon entry into Qedit terminal lacks labels show modes keys no keys blank F1 to F8 labels Qedit s labels If you wish to use Qedit s function keys in Line mode set the RLABELDEFAULT variable to 6 before running Qedit You must have the G and H straps set to yes for the function keys to work RCRTSTRAPSGH for Handshaking The G and H straps of the HP terminal control datacomm handshaking If you pull up your Terminal Config screen it should look something like this InhHndShk G YES Inh DC2 H YES Since these are inhibit straps YES actually means no don t do the handshake G and H control whether the terminal waits for a DC1 and or DC2 prompt character from the computer before sending input such as on terminal status requests or upon pressing Enter in block mode If the straps are configured inco
129. Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual by Robelle Solutions Technology Inc Program and manual copyright 1977 2015 Robelle Solutions Technology Inc Permission is granted to reprint this document but not for profit provided that copyright notice is given Updated Wednesday January 14 2015 Qedit and Suprtool are trademarks of Robelle Solutions Technology Inc Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation Other product and company names mentioned herein may be the trademarks of their respective owners JA robelle solutions technology Robelle Solutions Technology Inc 7360 137 Street Suite 372 Surrey B C Canada V3W 1A3 Phone 604 501 2001 Fax 604 501 2003 E mail sales robelle com E mail support robelle com Web www robelle com Contents Welcome to Qedit INntrOdUCHONS 6 66 25 Se Aa A RS TPOCUIMI TILA LIONS 4 seenen ceases A r ts A a ese avis User Manual dnni ae aaeoa eaa iea Printed Documentation ccccccccceceeesesesseseeseeeees Additonal SoftWare teer sas cou eens r REE RER AOO a a a E NN Highlights Highlights In Version 6 0 wo eee ccesecsesecsecssecseceeeesceeessceeeeeeeeeeeeeseaes Highlights In Version 5 9 woo ccssceesesecsecnsecsecseeseceseseeceeeeeeeeaeesesenes Highlights In Version 5 8 wo ceccesessesecsecssecseceseeseceseeseceeeeseeeeeeeesenes Highlights In Version 5 7 woo eceecesesceesessecsecssecsecseeeceseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeesenes Installing Qedit UX General Installa
130. Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Command Qedit accepts two basic types of commands those such as Add Change and Text that can be combined on a line using semicolon to separate them and those such as who and Is which can only appear once on a command line because semicolon is reserved for separating parameters text abc modify 5 two Qedit commands ps one shell command new abc who Qedit and shell command We call the first style qedit commands and the second style shell commands although they are all equally Qedit commands With the first style the command name can usually be abbreviated to one letter Add is A although some commands require several letters Findu for Findup With the shell style the command name must usually be spelled out completely vi vi means Visual c abc xxx all c means Change 1s means show files not lsort Control Character You create a control character by holding down the Control key while you strike another key Control plus A generates Control A These are normally nonprinting characters but they may do things to your terminal For example Control G rings the bell We assume that Control Y is your interrupt character and that you do not use Control D for end of file Qedit uses control characters for a number of purposes In Modify control characters specify the edit functions e Control D for delete Control B for before
131. Qedit to automatically renumber part of the file so that you do not have to renumber it manually See the Set Visual Renum option Line Wraparound If you enter a line that is too long Qedit divides it into several lines Set Wraparound ON divides lines on word boundaries only Any words that will not fit on the current line are moved to the next line If only a small number of words are moved to the next line Qedit prompts you to complete the line To end the Add when this happens press Return before typing If you are editing FORTRAN source code Qedit generates a valid continuation line for you Automatically Indenting Lines AJ for justified is a special option to indent new lines The dinenum you specify must be an existing line You enter new lines beneath it Qedit will then indent the new lines by exactly the same number of spaces as the existing line You can shift the indentation left by typing s at the start of a line or shift it right with y s To redefine the and characters use Set Zip Modifying a Line During Add Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual When you know you made a typo and prefer to fix it now instead of going on the auto modify character will help you Enter the command Set Zip or better yet put it in your Qeditmgr configuration file The character or other special character of your choice is called the auto modify character It allows you to modify the line you are currently entering T
132. Qedit under HP UX 51 new user If you want to make global changes to the commands executed at login time you should change two files etc profile always executed at login etc d profile default profile for new users C Shell The C shell executes the file etc csh login when you log on to HP UX It then looks for the file login in your home directory If it exists it is executed Next the C shell executes the file cshre in your home directory also executed any time you invoke a new copy of bin csh If you use SAM to add new users the files etc d login and etc d cshre are automatically copied to the home group of the new user If you want to make global changes to the commands executed at login time you should change these files etc csh login always executed at login etc d login default login for new users etc d cshre default cshre for new users Setting Up a PATH for Qedit You can invoke Qedit with the command opt robelle bin qgedit If you want to be able to just type gedit to invoke Qedit UX you must either add opt robelle bin to your PATH or copy opt robelle bin qedit to a directory that is currently on your PATH Similarly the man pages for Qedit are found in opt robelle man man1 gedit 1 To make the man pages available to everyone you can either add opt robelle man to your MANPATH or you can copy the man pages to a directory that is currently on your MANPATH Bourne and Korn Shells
133. Quick Start with HP Full Screen Editing Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Reflection for DOS Keyboards If you are using a PC with Reflection for DOS you need to map the PC keys into the HP keys Note that the PC keyboard has two keys labeled Enter which are used differently in Qedit The Enter key above the Right Shift key is called the Return key in this manual and is used to execute commands in Line mode In Visual mode this key moves the cursor down by one line The other Enter key on the numeric keypad is called the Enter key and is used to update the screen in Visual mode Here are the default Reflection keystrokes for common functions Terminal Keyboard Reflection Key Sequence Enter Enter on the numeric keypad If that doesn t work try the on the numeric keypad or try Shift F10 Home Up Control Home Shift Home Control End Ins Line Alt I Del Line Alt D Clear Line Alt K Clear Display Alt J avoid in Visual User keys F9 System keys F10 then F7 for help Additional Functions Reflection Key Sequence Begin Line Column 1 Home End Line End Help about Reflection Alt H Exit Alt X Other PC Keyboards AdvanceLink is similar Alt H is help Alt I is Insert Line Alt D is Delete Line but Clear Line is Alt L and Enter is Alt F3 Other terminal emulators have their own keystrokes for common functions See your emulator s manual for details Getting a Quick Start with HP Full
134. RAN Pascal and SPL which look the same text funny this should be a COBOL file Language is now JOB but it has a file code of 0 678 lines in file text funny cobol Language is now COBX 678 lines in file File Modification Timestamp When you use the Text command on a file Qedit stores the file s modification timestamp in the workfile You can display the timestamp by using the Verify command Qedit uses the stored timestamp to perform some verification if you try to either Keep the file or Shut and re open the workfile File Keyword File names containing special characters might cause problems to Qedit For example Text file name Error Extra or invalid character in Text command If you run into this problem you can use the file keyword instead The file keyword can be used wherever a file name is expected such as in Text Add List The syntax is Sfile filename File is a reserved keyword which is followed by an optional equal sign and the actual file name enclosed in string delimiters Without doing anything to the string Qedit tries to open the specified file The previous example now becomes Text Sfile file name 10 lines in file Implicitly Folding Wide Lines When texting files Qedit assigns a language to the file This is done by looking at file characteristics such as the file extension Each language has a set of predefined attributes One of these attributes is the maximum lin
135. Record Mode lines per screen for List Jump quiet for List Jumping no seq no End question in List Jumping outputs even number of pages outputs odd number of pages displays warning or nearest line Qedit Commands 199 200 Qedit Commands For more information on Set List options including examples see the List command For a quick list of the PCL values and their meanings see also the Quick Help hq set list Maxdata Set Maxdata nnnn Initially no stack expansion This option does not apply to Qedit UX It is still accepted for compatibility with the MPE version of Qedit Modify Set Modify option value Qzmodify HP Robelle Prompt ON OFF codes Set Modify controls what style of line modify is used throughout Qedit The defaults are Qedit style D for delete in Modify and Before with MPE style D for delete in Redo only Set Mod HP forces MPE style in all places while Set Mod Robelle selects Qedit style and Set Mod Qzmod selects Qzmodify a what you see is what you get version of the Qedit style If you type Set Modify with no parameters you go back to the defaults You also use Set Modify to control placement of the Modify line number and redefine the Qedit style control codes Prompt Option Where to Print Line Number Robelle Modify normally prints the line number on the same line as the data This makes lines look alike in List Delete Add and Modify and also makes maintaining your
136. Screen 36 deleting a block in Visual 20 deleting blank lines 111 282 deleting characters 156 delimiters 26 99 285 310 Index Destroy command 112 differences MPE versus HP UX 68 dirty workfile 133 134 Discard changes on exit 55 display enhancement cut and paste 21 display width Visual 245 display width in Line mode 204 Divide command 113 divide function Modify 157 divide function VV Visual 22 DL Set 184 Do command 114 dot dot dot 3 Double option double spacing 139 145 double sided printing LaserJet 137 downshifting lines 170 Duplex option List 137 duplex printing 145 E edit several files at once 50 234 editing columns 177 editing the text Screen 35 Visual 16 Editinput Set 15 89 Editonopen Set Visual option 212 EDITOR variable 56 embedded words 100 Empty error 253 end of line 266 EOF In error 253 equal sign 274 Equals error 253 error abort override 182 Error Already 88 91 176 Error Full 121 Error in Visual CRT read error 258 Error in Visual Cut and paste 257 258 Error in Visual Define string 256 Error in Visual File full 258 Error in Visual No update 257 Error in Visual Not enough lines 256 Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Error in Visual Parameters 256 error log 74 error messages 253 256 errors in Visual 255 Esc Set Visual option 15 escape character 269 escape character in Visual 15 213 escape sequences 183 escaped sequences in regular expressions 270 escaped sequences in r
137. T100 terminals these keys correspond to keypad 7 for Home and keypad 1 for End because there are no keys labeled Home and End In addition to the keypad equivalents VT220 terminals also correspond Home to the Find key and End to the Select key Getting a Quick Start with VT Full Screen Editing 31 Starting Screen Mode After you have invoked Qedit and used Text or Open to access a file you can switch from Line mode to Screen mode by typing vi If you don t have a file open when you type vi Qedit will open an empty scratch file and fill it with a blank line In Line mode you must type command and text lines and press Return after each line In Screen mode you can edit a full screen of text by moving the cursor around the screen inserting and deleting lines and characters and joining and splitting lines To move through the file use PF3 and PF4 or the Prev and Next keys if you have a VT220 or above You can perform additional editing functions by using control key sequences For example to mark the first line in a cut and paste operation press L When you are finished editing use E to exit Screen mode Troubleshooting If your TERM environment variable is set to a VT terminal Qedit will automatically use Screen mode when you type vi If you are running Reflection with HP and VT emulation and Qedit is still using Visual mode you should check the following items e The RCRTMODEL environment variable is set to 0
138. TOR Vata De snena aane a ar a aana 56 Serate h File srs raakoina tes A A te A tales 56 Hold Fles ena a basal A i 57 Shell Commands rennuna n e a a n a a 57 Shell Command Histor sossissnariiessnsrineir niaii 58 Fab Stops nannan a a aa 59 Hatd od d Fil Names eeksena Enn r i O E E pee saevsaebee saerea oes E T E T ENE 59 POPU TO BEE GSUIIMOT canovctdudsingec aaa cerantnaescs ava ae edaunecamenawaNaueatens 59 SHOME d ditMiT rona aa dn dae tata s 59 lopt robelle help qedit cscri anniren aa 60 Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Contents iii iv Contents Vista MOE oceses EE E covets axh eee oes Seb AE AE coda Cec b eds AET 60 Variables that Drive Qedit matene ooer ar a e E E E ceeeesiheeteot lates ba e 4 60 Setting Variables in Your Shell csccssssssccesecseseccssncsscessceenacenes 6l RCR TFMODEL Vania le ireren ana a a a a aiie 61 RPCVERSION Variablen irna Ss tics halen a Mite i dies Ae enone Mae 64 RCERTWIDTH Area Gries acti ou au Mca dadsoss acest n ences aa accesses 64 Function Key Waele cio eccte Raps an ais hae cot a eho 65 RCRTSTRAPSGH for Handshaking c ce ccccececeeeeceeeteeesteeeteeeees 65 QOEDITIMGRERAC EV ariableis tas nsetiinns aa rarantaweweudwieneche 66 QEDCURWFILE Variablen s oadst ee ctss case diaeeasveeawaenscaes 66 QEDSTOREDPWD and QEDPROMPTEDPWD Variables 66 ROBELLE Environment Variable cccccccccccssesssccessscceceessceeecnes 67 Converting Qedit File
139. UX User Manual Only Qedit files can be opened and shut It is much faster to use the Open command than it is to use the Text command because you make changes directly to the Open file With a Text file you must wait for Qedit to make a copy to which you make your changes Getting a Quick Start with Line Mode Editing 47 Using the Shut command saves the current scratchfile as a permanent Qedit workfile In the case of a scratchfile the name of the new workfile must not exist You can Shut a new file or a file that you made a copy of with the Text command Name the file as described above If you are working on a Qedit workfile Qedit renames it before closing qux t myfilel Language is now DATA copy of myfile in scratchfile 20 lines in file qux sh myfilel Retained existing file for you myfilel already exists No change qux sh myfilel work renamed to myfilel work qux open Open home userl myfilel work Current 1 Margins 1 80 qux sh myfilel newwork File renamed A workfile looks like any other file from the outside For example 11 myfilel rw rw rw 1 francois users 533 Aug 17 18 33 myfilel rw rw rw 1 francois users 16384 Dec 8 07 15 myfilel work However you can use the HP UX file command to determine the file type In order for file to recognize Qedit files you need to edit etc magic login as root cd etc gedit qux Text magic qux Add last O tstring tQEDIT tQedit
140. When Extend is ON UPSHIFT string windows will work on Roman 8 characters e g List up Asian terminals use a two character code for each symbol in the language When you set Extend ON you also set Asian ON by default This validates all possible character codes from 128 to 255 not just 161 to 254 as used by the Roman 8 character set If you want Roman 8 characters but don t want Qedit Visual mode to display undefined control codes such as decimal 130 which might be included in a file as a printer control use Set Editinput Asian OFF Otherwise some terminals change the value of the codes and other terminals just drop the codes from the file When you turn Asian OFF Roman 8 characters may still be displayed and edited but control codes from 128 to 160 are displayed as dots with a question mark to the left of the line indicating that they can only be edited in Line mode not Visual mode Expandtabs Set Expandtabs ON OFF Initially Off When Qedit encounters tab characters in an external file it can either copy them as is or it can expand them into the appropriate number of space characters using the Set Tab Stops value The default is to leave them as is in the file You can enable the removal of tab characters by expansion into spaces through use of Set Expandtabs On However there are some applications that use tab characters as field separators in their data files Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit
141. X tempnan routine If you want to have these files in a different location you can set the TMPDIR environment variable to the new path name TMPDIR home user1 tmp export TMPDIR Keep in mind that Qedit works with absolute filenames and these names can not have more than 240 characters So that you don t have to remember these names you can refer to these files as Hold or HoldO in Qedit commands For example hold 50 60 save lines in the Hold file open report cob switch files aq last hold lines copied from the Hold file The value of TMPDIR can be a relative or absolute path Internally Qedit always uses the absolute path It converts the relative path if needed You cannot use Qedit to look at files in your current directory called hold or hold0 unless you qualify them with the directory or a relative path name as in hold The Hold files are removed when you exit Qedit Shell Commands You can execute shell commands by typing them at anywhere you can type a Qedit command If Qedit determines that it is not one of its own commands it assumes it s a shell command and tries to execute it as such If the shell command matches an existing Qedit command you must precede it by a colon or an exclamation mark Shell commands are executed by your default shell the one configured in etc passwd for your user name If you want to enforce the use of the colon or exclamation mark prefix you can enter Set Limits Colo
142. You can still undo the deletion using Undo Delete All resets the Set Keep Name default for Keep command so that a later Keep command will not wipe out the wrong file by mistake Confirm Each Deletion Use DJ to give yourself approval over each delete before it is carried out With DJ Qedit displays the line even if the Quiet option is used and asks you for a Yes No or Stop answer Answer No or Return to keep the line Answer Yes to delete the current line Unlike the basic Delete operation where lines are removed with the next command lines confirmed in DJ are deleted immediately They can be recovered with an Undo command Answer Stop if you wish to stop the delete process When you use Stop lines that have been deleted are not recovered automatically Use Undo to recover them Examples Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual elete 5 6 remove lines 5 and 6 from file 5 _this is line 5 6 _and this is line 6 q 2 10 49 delete lines 2 and 10 49 elete 1 1 delete lines with in column 1 Implied rangelist is ALL el 1 1 nomatch delete lines without pattern delete all blank lines j 3 66 3 this is line 3 Delete it Y N or Stop 4 this is line 4 Delete it Y N or Stop 5 this is line 5 Delete it Y N or Stop 6 this is line 6 Delete it Y N or Stop 1 line Deleted Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit Commands 111 Destroy Command DES Purges the current workfile or
143. You may have received printed copies of these If you wish to have printed copies you can order them by filling out the form on our web site They are also available as PDF or HTML files You can download the files from the Robelle web site at http www robelle com library manuals User Manual The user manual contains the full description of all the Qedit commands as well as usage tips The manual is up to date with all the latest changes incorporated in Qedit Printed Documentation The latest user manual and change notice are available in Adobe PDF format If you do not already have the Adobe Acrobat reader you can get a copy from http www adobe com prodindex acrobat readstep html If you wish to have printed copies you can order them by filling out the form on our web site Additional Software 2 Welcome to Qedit Qedit comes with additional software e qcat for converting Qedit files e qaccess archive library for reading Qedit files and e Compare UX for comparing two text files Qcat Qcat is a filter program similar to cat and zcat Qcat reads a set of Qedit files and prints the lines on standard output Type man qcat for more information qceat QeditFile gt TextFile Qaccess Qaccess is an archive library for reading Qedit files It has two parts Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual e aheader file qaccess h in opt robelle include e and an archive library qaccess a in opt robelle lib Type m
144. a command in the home line that Qedit cannot understand because it is incomplete or typed incorrectly Not enough line numbers to add new lines If you add too many lines in one area Qedit can run out of unique line numbers to assign to new lines Check that Set Vis Renum is ON it is by default Unfortunately even this will sometimes not make room In this case Qedit writes your screen image to a disc file named qscreen the file is temporary on MPE and does not update the lines A recovery method is to renumber that part or all of your file and then copy in the lost lines from the qscreen file Since qscreen contains a screen image you will need to remove certain rows and columns to extract the raw text Press F8 to return to Line mode renum all list 10 10 list qscreen now select line range to copy add 100 10 qscreen 5 23 text lines only change 1 4 100 10 remove columns No at the end so no UPDATE see qscreen If you press the Clear Display key and then press Enter Qedit will read your screen and object to it Qedit looks for in the first two columns of the last screen line the one containing the column template If Qedit does not find these two slashes it concludes that you Troubleshooting and Error Messages 261 have done a Clear Display or deleted the template line or typed in so many new lines or characters that Qedit does not have a big enough buffer to read the entire screen Qedi
145. a column window Qedit changes only the columns within the window Columns outside the window are untouched change CUSTREC 10 39 CUSTOMER RECORD In this example CUSTREC is expanded to CUSTOMER RECORD but the data at column 40 and beyond is not moved In addition the Change must not cause the rest of the window to overflow Changing Uppercase and Lowercase If you specify an upshift window Qedit ignores the case of letters when matching the target string It will match words that are spelled with caps or without change JONES upshift Fitz Jones all In this example Change selects lines containing JONES Jones or even joneS Avoiding Changes to Embedded Words If you specify a Smart window Qedit rejects those matches in which the target string is actually in the middle of another word change FRANK smart Frank all This example selects FRANK but reject FRANKLYN You can combine Smart and Upshift Patterns and Windows In other commands the window can specify a pattern to match In the Change command patterns are not allowed because Change cannot perform pattern changes However a string specified in the rangelist portion of the Change command may be a pattern For example change CUSTREC CUST REC O1 PIC pattern change custrec to cust rec in all lines that also contain 01 and PIC in that order CobX Tags Cobol tags are short strings stored in columns 73 to 8
146. a rangelist for the file and if the file is not the Hold file itself add 55 hold0 list holdo the Hold file is temporary Notes By default the Hold files are created in var tmp usr tmp is the default on older versions of HP UX If you want to keep your Hold files in a different location you can enter the new path name in the TMPDIR environment variable TMPDIR home user1 tmp The file name starts with qhold and ends with a random string of characters The Hold0 file ends with 0 Keep in mind that Qedit works with absolute filenames and these names can not have more than 240 characters Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Every time you use hold or hold0 by themselves as a file name in any command Qedit replaces the word with the fully qualified file name of the appropriate Hold file Add 1 hold translates to Add 1 var tmp qholdDAAa05429 0 Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit Commands 125 Justify Command J With Justify you can do text formatting center lines right justify lines left justify lines and fill text into margins JUSTIFY option keyword rangelist Q no display Default option Null or Set Justify When the Justify command is processing the range of lines you specified if you decide not to continue press Control Y to stop the formatting Options Specify Which Function Justify Right right justify each line Justify Center center each line Justify Centre Canadian
147. ace bar to move to the column under the d in daily Press D you won t see anything remember then space across all the columns you want to delete Don t press Return yet The second step is to insert the two new words Press B and type every day Now press Return to see the line with the revisions Qedit lets you see your revisions and continue modifying with as many different changes as you can fit into one pass before you press Return In order to make changes at different locations in a line press T to space over the intervening characters without disturbing them If you goofed press G instead you ll get your original line back The final step is to accept the revisions by pressing Return one last time If your fingers are so trained to MPE s style of Modify e g D for delete that you cannot remember to use the Control key do not despair As with most things in Qedit there is a configuration option to solve this problem The command Set Mod HP instructs Qedit to accept HP style modifies i e MPE modifies such as D and I instead of Qedit style See the Modify section of the Set command Getting a Quick Start with Line Mode Editing 43 Global Changes There is another way to modify lines in your workfile The Change command allows you to make changes throughout the entire file without the bother of working on each line one by one For example with one Change command to your memo you can replace all the co
148. al mode type a in the top screen line at the gt and press the F7 key If you are a novice use Set Vis Update ON Qedit now automatically reads your updated screen when you browse or use a function key Other tips Do not add more than 60 lines before pressing Enter If you have trouble at 9600 baud try turning your terminal down to 2400 baud Avoid the Clear Display key if you press it by mistake type in the top screen line and press F7 this will refresh the screen To save and restore your function keys use Set Vis Save ON To get out of Visual use the F8 function key Visual Blockemulation on HP UX As of HP UX 11 0 HP has dropped support for block mode terminals For this reason full screen editing as implemented on HP3000 computers only works on HP UX versions earlier than 11 0 On HP UX 11 0 or later full screen editing is available in Screen mode Set Visual Screen On on VT type terminals or in Visual mode emulation Set Visual Blockemulation On on HP type terminals Blockemulation emulates block mode operations by reading each line one by one instead of reading the whole screen in a single operation Depending on the type of connection this process might take a few seconds as the cursor moves down the screen Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual In most cases Qedit is able to detect that block mode is not available and activates Visual Blockemulation automatically If it do
149. alculation is referred to using 254 Qedit Commands Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual 12 octal 12 or decimal 10 Resul 12 octal input and octal display format Resul 10 Result 177766 octal number that is really negative 1t 10 0 abcd h 1t 61626364 1t 6162 97 98 ab 6364 99 100 ca Calculator Help The calculator offers a number of options You can refresh your memory on the calculator s abilities by entering gives help prints a summary of functions Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit Commands 255 Troubleshooting and Error Messages Introduction When Qedit encounters an error condition it prints an error message Error xxx or a warning message Warning xxx For file errors Qedit prints the intrinsic name Fopen the file system error number Err 50 or a message for common errors and the file name if available An error message will cause the rest of the command line to be skipped and in batch mode will cause Qedit to terminate with an error abort A warning message on the other hand does not stop the rest of the command line from being executed nor does it cause Qedit to abort in batch mode Messages Most error and warning messages are self explanatory The older more cryptic ones are explained below Message Explanation Already The line number that would next be created already exists in the workfile duplicate line numbers are not al
150. an qaccess for more information Compare Compare UX compares two text files Keep or Qedit format and prints out the differences The basic comparison unit is a line Compare UX identifies three types of differences e lines that are in the first file but not in the second e lines that are in the second file but not in the first e and lines that are in both files but don t match Type man compare for more information Notation This manual uses a standard notation to describe commands Here is a sample definition VERIFY ALL keyword 1 UPPERCASE If the commands and keywords are shown in uppercase characters in a syntax statement they must be entered in the order shown example ALL However you can enter the characters in either uppercase or lowercase 2 Lowercase highlighted These are variables to be filled in by the user example keyword The variables may be highlighted by underlining or italics Each such variable is defined elsewhere see the Qedit Glossary on page 279 when you have trouble In the Help command highlighting is not available so these variables appear simply in lowercase 3 Brackets enclose optional fields example ALL 4 Braces enclose comments which are not part of the command However braces and comments are accepted in actual Qedit commands listq filename Q means without line numbers 5 Up lines separate alternatives from which you select exampl
151. and restore the current user function keys within the terminal memory If you do Set Vis Save Fast Visual will take advantage of this feature which is much faster and invisible to the user This feature only works on Reflection if the Terminal ID is configured to 700 92 and on versions greater than 3 3 DOS 3 6 Macintosh or 3 7 Windows If Qedit Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual decides that you do not have this feature it will revert to a regular Set Vis Save On Screen Set Visual Screen ON OFF This option only available on HP UX controls which full screen editing interface Qedit will use When it is set to Off Qedit uses Visual mode When it is set to On Qedit uses Screen mode On HP terminals Off is the default on VT terminals On is the default SI Set Visual SI nnn char Default None If you edit text containing ShiftIn characters they will not appear on the screen Even worse if there is ShiftIn character but no ShiftOut character preceding it on a line the ShiftIn character disappears from your file when you press Enter This is done on your behalf by the terminal or terminal emulator To get around these problems you can define another character as a translation for the ShiftIn character For example Set Vis SI defines to represent ShiftIn When Visual needs to print a ShiftIn on the screen it prints a instead When Visual sees any on the screen it conv
152. any unsaved edits in any of your scratch files If so you are prompted to Discard them or stay in Qedit to save them Examples opt robelle bin qedit open gedit doc open file to work on modify 2482 5 do some editing exit ready to quit for the day Notes To avoid accidental Exit as a result of pressing F8 one time too many you can run Qedit with the v option This forces user approval of Exit The string parameter is only allowed when Qedit is running as a server The string is a message sent to the Qedit for Windows client The client receives the exit notification displays the message and disconnects immediately If no string is specified a default message is displayed Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit Commands 115 Find Command F F4 116 Qedit Commands Finds the next line in the workfile that contains a string Use Findup if you want to search for the previous line Find always finds a single line that matches a string Use the List command if you want to find many lines that match a string FIND string linenum FIND string range linenum Q no display Default string recent linenum 1 Find defaults string to be same as last string and inenum to be starting from the next line This saves having to repeatedly type the string and linenum Once you have defined your string and starting position just enter F to find the next line Find does not start searchin
153. arch 284 implicit commands 85 implicit hold 124 In Use error 254 Include file prefix character 139 Include files 139 incorrect line numbers 235 increase size of workfile 258 Increment Set 89 187 indentation 131 indenting a list of points 130 indenting line automatically 88 initial command line 55 Insert Char 214 inserting characters 42 157 Interactive Set 187 interrupting a listing 140 J J option 278 JJ cut and paste justify 24 Join command 91 joining lines 23 37 122 127 157 Jumbo files 193 260 278 jumping List 94 120 241 justification breaks 131 Justify ask approval 183 Set 129 188 Justify command 126 K KEA Terminal emulator 210 Keep Set 188 Keep command 47 133 Keep file 278 keyboard Screen 34 Visual 15 keyboard remapping 79 Korn shell 51 L Label Set Keep 190 labels for function keys 65 Language definition of 278 Set 191 Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Language warning 254 LaserJet 145 fonts and orientation 145 leading spaces removing 127 Left Justify 128 Set 194 left edge floats in Justify 130 left margin 15 279 Length Set 194 Length Text option 238 Lib Set 194 Limits Set 195 line definition of 279 line feeds missing 214 Line mode display width 204 line numbers strange 235 line overflow 224 Line range 81 linenum 126 definition of 280 Linenum error 254 lines fold 238 length 279 Lines option of List 143 List Set 143 195 List command 40
154. ard command 94 batch 54 definition of 273 Before command 95 Bell Set Visual option 15 bell characters in Visual 15 210 binary files 188 blank lines deleting 111 282 block mode 12 Both Justify 128 Bourne shell 51 braces for comments 84 brackets 3 4 browse 41 94 120 141 241 Open 166 Text 233 browsing through your file 19 36 building a workfile 165 Bytestream Set Keep 188 Cc c cmdstring option 55 C shell 52 calculator 86 249 274 carriage control 189 case ignoring 100 284 CC cut and paste copy 20 CCTL Set Keep 189 cd command 97 Center Justify 128 Change command 43 98 change tagging COBOL 225 changing line casing 170 character class 267 character range 268 Check Set 110 127 183 Checktimestamp Set Keep 189 Set Open 198 circumflex 289 clearing the screen 212 clearing the workfile 235 Close command 103 closing workfile 231 Cobfree Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Set Keep 189 Set Lang 193 COBOL tagging changes 225 COBOL comments 226 COBOL left margin 127 Cobolfixed Set Text 206 Cobolx Set Lang 192 225 Cobx tags Change 100 Colcopy 105 Colmove 109 Code Set Keep 190 Colcopy command 104 Colmove command 107 colon for shell commands 293 column definition of 274 column changes 101 column editing 177 column range in list 137 columns copy 104 copying 177 move 107 removing 101 Set Term option 204 shifting 101 columns of display memory 64 Com Name error 253
155. arie Reimer Publicity Dept Change okay Y N or Modify No press Return 5 Please check your in baskets daily and Change okay Y N or Modify No Yes 1 line changed You can use the handy Y to stop in the midst of change jumping just as you used it to stop listing Rangelist You can also specify individual lines or a rangelist to Change For example 44 Getting a Quick Start with Line Mode Editing Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Copying Lines Moving Lines Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual change Dept Department 1 3 1 MEMO TO Drama Staff News Simulation Department 3 FROM Marie Reimer Publicity Department 2 lines changed change Drama Staff 1 changes string to nothing i e deletes it I MEMO TO News Simulation Department 1 line changed Copying lines is a variation of the Add command One reason we might want to copy lines is to make a general purpose form out of our memo We can keep a sample memo form at the beginning of the file then copy it to the end of the file and fill it in whenever we need to communicate This is how to do it add last first 4 vi MEMO TO News Simulation Department 8 9 DATE November 18 2000 10 11 FROM Marie Reimer Publicity Department 12 6 lines COPIED Qedit copies the rangelist first 4 first line to line 4 after the indicated line here Zast line in file To accomplish our goal of placing the sample memo template at the beginning of the f
156. as a literal Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual When it represents the end of a line the dollar sign can find a successful match only when the string is the last thing on a line Means Findup Control Char Start of line in Regexp or Negate in Regexp The circumflex character is a short name for the Findup command In documentation it often indicates a control character A is Control A If you are not on an HP terminal you can use 1 through 8 to simulate the user function keys in Line mode That s circumflex 1 not Control 1 The circumflex in regular expressions identifies the start of a line It takes on this meaning only if it is the first character in the regexp If used as the start of line it indicates that the string must be the first thing on that line for a successful match list Once upon regexp line must start with Once upon If it used anywhere in the expression and is not preceded by a backslash it is used as a literal If the circumflex in a regular expression is preceded by a backslash it indicates a control character combination The character to the right of the circumflex makes up the actual control character list G regexp Control G or Bell character The circumflex in a character class within regular expressions negates the list of characters in the class It takes on this meaning only if it is the first character in the
157. as a subcommand of HP style modify invoked as part of the Modify Redo or Before command and meaning end of line gt is the prompt when in the QHELP subsystem Means String Double quotes are the nominal string delimiter in Qedit List BOB However you can use any of several special keys for string delimiters in a command Qedit Glossary 301 302 Qedit Glossary find witth double quotes as quote find witth use colon instead of quote Means Start Parameter Command or Subpattern in Regexp Left parentheses introduces the size of a file a window for string matches and is always matched by an ending list string smart upshift Left parentheses can be used to enclose commands which include commas or semicolons that might be confused with delimiters Qedit considers everything between the left and right parentheses as one command This is mostly useful when multiple commands appear on one line F test listspf o seleq owner mgr acct Li 5 Left parentheses are used to divide regular expressions into smaller portions called subpatterns Left parentheses identify the start of a subpattern List x abc z subpattern starts with a Means End Parameter Command or Subpattern in Regexp Right parentheses completes a file size a window for string matches and is irresistibly attached to list Robelle upshift Right parentheses complet
158. aserJet it may select one of the cartridge fonts as the default instead of Courier PCL 3 allows you to select the standard Courier font even if another font cartridge is installed Portrait Tiny PCL 4 Some LaserJets provide the tiny Line printer font in portrait orientation as well as landscape orientation PCL 4 selects this option A4 Special PCL 5 To print 80 columns instead of 77 across A4 paper using the standard Courier typeface try PCL 5 This tightens the spacing between characters Legal Landscape Tiny PCL 6 To print tiny letters in landscape orientation on legal size paper use PCL 6 You can combine PCL 1 2 3 4 5 and 6 with Page On and Off with Lines 0 with LQ with DBL with record and with duplex Two Column Listings If your LaserJet supports Line printer font in landscape orientation you can print listings across the page with two columns of text side by side list lp pcl 10 all two column listing format lq Srec pcl 10 1 200 If you have a legal size paper tray you can use PCL 11 to print two wide columns of 110 characters each on a single piece of paper A4 Size Paper Most of the PCL options with the exception of PCL 5 were designed and tested with North American letter size paper PCL 5 is especially for A4 paper it reduces the horizontal spacing between characters so that 80 columns of Courier output can fit on a single line In addition if you add 2000 to a PCL code Qedit
159. asionally a 700 92 or 700 94 terminal will refuse to work properly in Visual mode Symptoms include Qedit saying that it is not a supported terminal or giving the infamous No at end message 260 Troubleshooting and Error Messages Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual when the is clearly on the screen We have found that resetting the terminal to factory default settings sometimes sets this right again This is more than a regular soft or hard reset more than turning the terminal off and on it is a special reset involving a reboot of the terminal firmware from ROM Verify the baud rate at which the terminal is configured then log off the host and power off the 700 9x terminal Wait a few seconds then turn the terminal back on WHILE HOLDING DOWN THE D KEY Keep the D key pressed until you hear a beep The terminal will show the message default configs used Set the baud rate and ensure that the Xmit Pacing and Recv Pacing fields are both set to XON XOFF Log on again and try Qedit Visual mode Visual Error Messages Here are the messages that may appear if you encounter errors in Visual mode Define String press Home Up Clear Line type string press Enter You cannot use F3 or F4 Findup Find until you have defined and found the string once Press Home Up type string or string for Findup then press F7 or Enter Parameter missing or illegal in home line You have typed
160. aste so that these indicators are out of sequence Qedit objects Qedit does not update your lines but it does write them to qscreen If you move lines around on the screen you should erase the n to n indicators Cannot update To Exit press F7 refresh then F8 exit Set Vis Update is ON and you have pressed F8 to exit However Qedit is unable to update the current screen likely due to the bad screen format described above To exit first refresh the screen in the gt line press F7 then press F8 again Inconsistent or badly formed cut and paste task DD MM CC HR If you put both a CC and an MM on the same screen you will get this error message It means that the indicators you have used do not combine in a logical way Check the Status line to see what cut and paste function is pending You may also see this message if you enter an unknown indicator e g NN instead of MM Duplicate cut and paste task press F7 to reset DD MM CC HH Only one cut and paste function is permitted per update For example you cannot copy a block of lines to the Hold file with HH and on the same screen use R to replicate a line 262 Troubleshooting and Error Messages Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Cut and paste operations are limited to 32000 lines or less The maximum number of lines that you can move copy hold or delete in a single task is 32000 Problem accessing Hold file unable to cut and
161. ated to or BJ or can be invoked by the F7 function key Using F7 to invoke Listredo only works in Line mode not Visual mode You cannot use to combine commands on the same line Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit Commands 149 Listundo Command LISTU Displays the complete Undo change log of commands that modified text starting with the most recent and working backward LISTUNDO Listundo shows the complete Undo change log including each command the number of lines updated deleted added or renumbered by that command and the text lines Text for deleted lines is preceded by an underscore _ as in the Delete command and the before value of lines that were updated has a Greater Than gt Commands are printed in reverse order with the most recent command first This is the command that would undone by the next Undo command To stop the Listundo report use Control Y Examples listundo 150 Qedit Commands Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual LS Command LS Display contents of a directory LS names Default current directory Qedit has a command called Lsort Due to Qedit s shorthand command parsing ls would be interpreted as Lsort The Lsort command is retained for compatibility with the MPE version of Qedit but Qedit UX accepts Is to mean the HP UX Is command Examples FES current directory ls a show hidden files also Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit Commands 151 Ls
162. atically builds a temporary workfile for you This file has a random file name and is created in var tmp by default If you want to have temporary files in a different directory enter the new path name in the TMPDIR environment variable Qedit Commands 87 88 Qedit Commands TMPDIR home user1 tmp export TMPDIR Keep in mind that Qedit works with absolute filenames and these names can not have more than 240 characters If you make any changes to the file e g by adding lines Qedit will ask if you want to save your changes when you exit Using the Tab Key By default Qedit defines tabs every 8 columns across the line every 10 for Qedit MPE You can override these default tab stops using Set Tabs Stop n every 2 to 15 characters or Set Tabs 5 10 22 28 for completely custom tab stops When you press the tab key as you Add lines Qedit correctly inserts spaces in your lines and skip to the correct column on your screen assuming you are using an HP terminal Overflowing Lines or Line Numbers The Add command continues prompting until you press Control Y or you type at the end of a line or you run out of line numbers When you exhaust the line numbers possible between two lines Qedit prints Error Already You can continue by doing a range Renumber on the area where you wish to add more lines Thus if your last line added was 4 999 use Renum 4 5 to spread out the lines between 4 and 5 You can configure
163. ault all columns exact match Set Window establishes the default window or conditions for string searches in all Qedit commands You can override the default by specifying an explicit window in any command e g List BEGINKEY 1 10 UPS Once a window is set it remains in effect until the next Set Window command See the Change command and the Glossary for further details on window The window itself consists of two parts a range of column numbers to search and four independently enabled options that determine how to select a line column column option A column is a number between the Left and Right margins of the file Qedit searches only the specified range An option is one or more of these NO Match _ select lines with out string NO Upshift upshift before searching or not NO Smart ensure match is a symbol or not NO Pattern string is a pattern to find or not Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual NO Regexp string is a regular expression to find or not The default window is all columns Nosmart Noupshift Match Nopattern and Noregexp A pattern may include at signs to match anything to match a single numeric character to match a single alpha numeric and tilde wavy line to match zero or more blanks Any other character must be matched exactly To match a pattern character itself precede it with an ampersand amp For examp
164. be No at the end so no UPDATE see qscreen or maybe Read error on CRT Try again or reduce speed Type an asterisk after the home line arrow gt and press F7 If the function keys are properly defined for Qedit your file appears Any changes you made to the screen between your last update and the time you pressed Alt X are lost The qscreen file is of no use in this case Sometimes Qedit is slow to display the status line and error message If you see some flashing on the screen that hints at activity be patient But if nothing happens when you press F7 or if random characters appear right after the asterisk it probably means that F7 is not defined properly But we can fix that Display the menu to define the function keys by pressing Ctrl F9 To set these back to the default values press F3 The labels become F1 F2 F3 Press F9 to activate the changes and go back to your regular screen Pressing F7 should now work then press Return Qedit may display an error message such as UNKNOWN COMMAND NAME but you will still get your file back Again changes to the screen after the last update will have vanished In the worst case you will not be able to recover Log on from scratch When you open your file Qedit will display the message Warning Recovery Your file will be current up to your last update Changing the Exit Keystroke The Alt X keystroke for exiting from Reflection back to DOS is too close to the Alt D delete
165. bers absolute or relative special keywords First Last All or characters To define a block of lines the user can enter 2 line numbers separated a slash e g 1 6 It is also possible to define a block of lines using a string range This syntax allows the use of strings to define the start and end of the range A string range can also be combined with a numeric line range to further define the block Here are some examples Qedit Issues and Solutions 81 82 Qedit Issues and Solutions List start proc end proc Change a b Start proc end proc Delete start proc end proc 20 100 The List command above finds the first occurrence of start proc in the file and uses it as the range start location It then finds the first occurrence of end proc starting from the start location It uses that line as the range end location Finally it lists all the lines between the 2 locations By default List starts at the beginning of the file The Change command above replaces all occurrences of the letter a with a b in the lines between and including start proc and end proc By default Change starts at the current line The Delete command above removes all the lines between and including start proc and end proc found in lines 20 to 100 By default Delete starts at the beginning of the file A string range does not behave like a rangelist e g 1 20 in all cases For example the first statement is
166. case versus lowercase 84 284 Upshift window option 281 284 287 upshifting lines 170 Use command 242 usefiles searching 140 User Defined Commands 207 Set 207 eq _ ca ag c Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual V v option 55 Var Set Keep 191 Variable substitution 208 variable length files 191 variables how to set 61 variables that drive Qedit 60 Varsub Set 208 Vemodify now Qzmodify 158 197 Verify command 243 Visual configuring 209 Set 209 Visual and 700 9x 256 Visual command 244 277 286 Visual error messages 256 Visual mode 60 saving function keys 216 startup 12 VV cut and paste divide 22 213 Ww wall time 202 warning messages 253 warnings 221 what you see is what you get 197 Whichcomp Set 222 wide lines 238 Wide Jumbo create 165 Wide Jumbo files 278 Widen Set Visual option 219 width of display memory 64 width display in Visual 245 window 100 281 definition of 286 Set 222 Window error 255 windows and Change 99 Withindent Justify 131 word processing 126 words move by 35 Words command 246 wordwrap Visual 220 Work Set 165 223 Index 317 workfile 165 definition of 287 temporary 87 workfile format 259 Wraparound Set 88 224 write access deferred 198 X X Set 192 225 Set Global 227 Set Local 227 X 25 networks 255 XX cut and paste exclude 23 XX Visual 220 Z Zave command 247 Zip Set 229 ZZ command 248 ZZ cut and paste mark 25 318
167. ce numbers and writes them to the saved file A warning is displayed before this occurs Keep Warning Lines are now numbered Language changed from Cobfree to Cobol COBFON COBSRC APP OLD EDTCT of records 26 Purge existing file no Set Keep Code nnn Initially lt null gt 0 Any file can have a special file code to help identify what kind of data it contains Qedit workfiles for example always have a Code of 111 while COBOL source files have a Code of 1052 EDTCT You can create files with any code you like using Set Keep Code and the Keep command However the file code cannot be changed if the Language is COBOL or COBOLX Qedit Commands 193 194 Qedit Commands Set Keep Label num Initially 0 This value is set to the number of user labels attached to the file when you Text it Text filename Labels will copy the user labels into the new file Keep will append those labels to the file unless you do Keep filename Nolabels If you want to change the number of user labels to be created on the new Keep file do Set Keep Label n Set Keep LF ON OFF Initially ON To write Newline delimiters use Set Keep LF ON A delimiter is added at the end of each line whether there was one or not in the original file To create a file without Newline delimiters at the end of each line use Set Keep LF OFF The only Newline characters written to the file are the ones included in the data Set Keep Name filename
168. changes and then execute use Enter instead of F7 See the section Home Line Commands for complete details F8 Exit from Visual To return from Visual mode to Line mode use the F8 key Press F8 again once you are in Line mode to exit Qedit and return to HP UX If for some reason F8 fails to exit from Visual type at the gt and press F7 or the Enter key This should get you back to Line mode Browsing Through Your File Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Line Number Move to a specific line e g to line 45 gt 45 F7 gt and lt Move ahead or back a page Use with a number to move several pages e g ahead 3 pages gt gt 3 F7 and Move forward or backward any number of lines e g back 200 lines If you do not specify a number the default is the number of lines configured by Set Vis Roll Getting a Quick Start with HP Full Screen Editing 19 gt 200 F7 The Tilde Key Return to the most recent screen If you jump from line 1500 to line 451 sends you back to 1500 This is handy if you jump briefly to another part of your file to check something then want to get back to your original location The tilde is also available from line mode but it has to be enabled by removing it from the list of string delimiters In order to do this you could do the following Notice that tilde has been removed from the delimiter list entered on the Set command gt F7 FIRST and LAST Move to s
169. ck current ZZ range zz off E7 cancel ZZ range Paste from a Non Qedit File If you want to copy text into your current workfile from another file that is not a Qedit file you cannot use the methods described above You cannot Open the second file if it is not in Qedit format Instead use the List command to find the portion of text that you want to add from it without Shutting the first file Then use the Add command to paste in the text xxx 10 7 22 9 Home Line Commands All Qedit commands are supported in Visual mode To do a command such as Listf or ls press the Home Up key to reach the home line then type your command after the gt and press F7 or Enter To execute a command such as Change on a subset of the file first use the ZZ cut and paste indicators to mark the subset and then use ZZ in the command After most gt commands Qedit prompts you for more commands Next command Visual Type in more commands or return to your Visual screen above by pressing the Enter or Return key Qedit accepts each command executes it and goes back to the Next command prompt There are a few exceptions to this process By default when you enter an Open command Qedit assumes you want to edit the file immediately and switches into full screen mode automatically If you wish to disable this feature enter Set Visual Editonopen Off If the tilde has been removed from the list of string delimiters see Set Stri
170. closed in curly braces Whatever you see in is an explanation not part of the command although Qedit will accept it Press Return after each command line When you finish your session getting back out of Qedit is easy Type Exit and press the Return key Fi als F3 F4 on ae D DelLine F Find L Mark G Goto line E Exit 209 1 VT220 daffy robelle com via TELNET Num Qedit Full screen editing Reflection in VT220 emulation mode Status Line The first line shows the current line number and column location of your position in the file the insert replace mode and the name of the file you are editing For example I di 5 I monthly report Text Lines By default the number of lines on the screen is LINES 2 The default value of LINES is specified in the terminfo entry for your terminal You can override terminfo s default value by setting the shell environment variable LINES Message Line The last line on the screen is the message line When you first enter Screen mode this line displays a list of commonly used control keys As you edit a file Qedit uses this line to display messages about your editing operations After a message is displayed it remains on the screen until you move to another screen e g by scrolling or by Getting a Quick Start with VT Full Screen Editing 33 paging forward or backward Then the list of commonly used keys will appear in the message
171. columns on your terminal For example you can control whether to switch the 700 series terminal into 132 column mode and widen Reflection s Display Memory The default value is Set Vis Widen 80 which causes Visual to go into wider mode whenever Length is greater than 80 columns Therefore with this value Visual will switch your 700 series terminal into 132 column mode and expand the width of Reflection s Display Memory Set Vis Widen Off restricts Visual mode to at most 80 columns Reflection version 5 x and later allows you to set the display width to a value between 80 and 512 Qedit can detect this feature and use it whenever possible Qcterm emulates a 700 92 terminal but supports up to 200 columns Full screen mode takes advantage of the extended width when appropriate If Visual switches into 132 column mode when the Length value for your file is higher than 80 columns this means that a Job file with exactly 80 columns will not go into 132 column mode and you won t be able to see columns 77 through 80 However you can reconfigure Qedit Commands 223 224 Qedit Commands Visual to switch into 132 column mode when Length is greater than 76 by doing Set Vis Widen 76 Some new versions of Reflection will automatically switch into 132 column display when Qedit asks to widen display memory To have Qedit follow the Set Vis Widen rules you must have Reflection 4 2 for DOS Reflection 3 6 for the Macintosh Reflection 4 0 for Windo
172. compare Welcome to version 2 2 of Compare a file comparison program for text files Compare answers the question How different are these two text files Compare will tell you whether lines have been added or whether a block of lines is now different Output lines for T S240 155 7 ten prei t S T 40 155 How Sone WS fl par p5 sl u3 com Define as Start of Paragraph ent 1lWelcome to Compare beginkey compare E Welcome to version 2 2 of Compare a file comparison program for text files Compare answers the question How different are these two text files Compare will tell you whether lines have been added or whether a block of lines is now different 132 Qedit Commands Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Keep Command Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual K Creates a standard disc file and writes the workfile into it Keep is the reverse of Text which copies a standard disc file into a workfile that you can edit Use Text when you need to duplicate a file KEEP filename options rangelist Q no linenums Defaults rangelist ALL filename last Keep Options Qedit allows several options on the Keep command Note that the comma preceding the option name is mandatory and that spaces are not allowed before the comma or the option name Keep filename UNN unnumbered same as KQ Keep filename YES go ahead and purge old file Keep filename NO never purge an old file
173. creen Editing To use the full screen editor of Qedit use the Visual command This feature works on most HP terminals with block mode and provides many powerful features including navigation while in Visual mode Qedit Glossary 283 284 Qedit Glossary Hold File There are two Hold files You can explicitly save lines in the file called Hold by using the Hold command or HH HJ in Visual mode Lines are written to the Hold0 file every time you move or copy with the Add command MM CC and DD in Visual mode You can refer to the contents of these files by their file names in any of the commands that access external files such as Add File List and Use J Option You may append one or two option letters to a command name Q T or J For example the List command has these options LQ LT LJ LQJ and LQT The J option specifies left justified or jumping or other options For example List Jumping to browse type N to stop List Jumping without sequence numbers verify each change before updating add justified after same indentation replace justified same indentation append rangelist to end of holdfile Jumbo Files Introduced in Qedit 4 3 Jumbo files are files in a new Qedit file format They are similar in structure to original Qedit files but Jumbo files can hold lines up to 1 000 characters In addition Jumbo files can contain up to 99 million lines Starting in Qedit 4 6 57 there is a new work
174. d Paste e E ne ee thes cole E 37 Resetting Cut and P Aste sa trccss yes vestaeieetune ais sete ei naseeyy ones 37 Copying a Block of WORE a ca csinaascuacesiecausetecstaasserctonadcouncahutaamenetseanies 37 ii e Contents Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Splitting anid Joining Limes herentennis r a lakes cee tehies de cae EA E OASE E 38 Getting a Quick Start with Line Mode Editing 39 TIMtROGUCTIOT Sse e E aa N e coed a a Ea a n 1M tele 39 Adding Eines 00 2 Pale ra E a E os anh E EE NEIE Ear S 39 Looking at The File eevee vs ys Seoshevbsh a A E E E hee aa a E E a nh Gees 40 Browsing the File sser iea es a E a E E dt bevigteanspanh cones 41 Searching the File seina a a a a a a ar t 41 Biting LINES nern aed eea ee scons E E Ea RE EE A eh betes 42 Global Change Sicana a a a a eve onus hae a a ges 44 Copyn ENES ae o e E E a AE E EAR E S 45 MOVin SE ES r a a a A a 45 Deleting Tine S ehee ea sins E A E EEE ER Ea eet tones 46 Mep Comimanid a r e lous name ters alee E 46 Savina the Flee ceacccscisaccetekccusccessdceugecsescsseccuslvestscsddechadssshsexs tha EERO OMAE SOEI EEOSE EEEO AO EESTE RENERE 47 Open and Shut for Instant ACCESS ccceeccesseceececeseeeneeceeeececeeaeeeeecsaecececueeeaaeceeeecereseaeeeneeenas 47 Running Qedit under HP UX 49 RUNNIN SOSA Ibias ccswvssebenercetoGs beck eee Geecs ince teed TE Sais ee ca RTE ween ee een eee oes 49 Visual Mode dor HP Terminals senan tts on eis Hiei tenets teen eines ree 49 Screen Mode for VE Te
175. data nov99 unnumbered with 50 byte records k notes UNN YES unnumbered purge old file keep yes keep to last text purging old Absolute File Name When you are using CD you may find yourself doing the following Text file xxx change to another directory to add from some other files then Keep to update your original file Keep defaults to the absolute name e g user dev lib src xxx This means you can change to other directories after a Text but still easily Keep the file back under its original name In the past Keep would default to the relative name of the Text file e g xxx saving the file in your current working directory Keep Only When Changes Were Made Keep Ifdirty only does the Keep operation if the workfile has been modified since the last Text or Keep This can be useful in scripts that do Changes by not Keeping files where no string changes occurred you reduce the number of files that appear on the partial backup To see whether your workfile is clean or dirty do Verify Open File Modification Timestamp When you use the Text command on a file Qedit stores the file s modification timestamp in the workfile If you try to Keep the file Qedit compares the stored timestamp with the file s current timestamp If they are different it means the original file has changed since you first opened it Qedit will alert you to the difference by displaying a message similar to the following The file ti
176. de or wavy line to match zero or more spaces e amp match next character use to match e reserved for future use e reserved for future use Important At signs are needed at both ends of a pattern if you want to search for a pattern at any spot in the line List QEDIT PATTERN matches only lines consisting of QEDIT only starting in column 1 The Nomatch and Pattern options are ignored for the Change target string If you try to use them Qedit prints a warning Here are some sample commands containing window options Qedit Glossary 287 288 Qedit Glossary list bob upshift bob BOB Bob etc list BOB pattern lines containing BOB anywhere list BOB pattern lines with BOB in column 1 del amp pattern delete lines starting with mod fix QEDIT pat lines with two strings delete pattern delete all blank lines list A Z a z regexp lines starting with an uppercase Quiet Q Option You may append one or two option letters to a command name J T and Q For example the Add command has these variations AddQ AddT AddJ AddQT and AddQJ The Q option means QUIET without line numbers or without printing the lines processed For example 5 10 list lines 5 10 without line numbers paul save lines without line numbers 5 01 add new lines but don t prompt 10 00 abc add file without printing the lines 45 1 9 replace Hold but don
177. ded as a z You can also combine ranges with single values as in abc 0 9a z A character class range is based on the ASCII character set You could specify a range of Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual and it would be perfectly valid In this case the range would include all uppercase letters a series of special characters _ and all lowercase letters Typically you would enter the character with the smallest ASCII value as the lower limit and the character with the largest value as the upper limit Qedit accepts characters even if they are reversed i e the largest value first as in Qedit detects this situation and swaps the values internally so a z and z a are really equivalent To avoid ambiguity it is recommended that you use the first format The hyphen is interpreted as a range indicator only if it is at a logical place between two other characters If it is somewhere else in the class it is used at face value a z hyphen and lowercase letters a z lowercase letters and hyphen a z 9 lowercase letters hyphen and digit 9 a z0 9 lowercase letters and digits 0 to 9 Negated Character Class The caret takes on a different meaning inside a character class It is used at face value anywhere in the class except if it is the first character in which case the caret negates the whole class This means a match is found if the text does not contain any of the characters in the cla
178. dit also supports relative line numbers as in List LAST 5 or Modify 5 5 Margins Using Set Left and Set Right you can define margins for your workfile The existing data outside the margins is unchanged when you edit within the margins This can be extremely useful for editing files with more than 80 columns per line Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Memory Lock Qedit has commands for enabling and disabling the terminal Memory Lock This is so that you can leave the User Keys displayed on your terminal and still access the Memory Lock function or enables memory lock disables memory lock To use memory lock when prompted for a command just move the cursor up to the desired line type and hit Return This feature does not work in Visual mode Patterns You can ask Qedit to look for a pattern instead of a specific string by using the Pattern window option list key pattern The command above displays all lines that contain a period in column 1 and the string key with anything in between and at the end The string window can also specify Upshift to ignore case and Nomatch to select lines that fail to match Qedit will only find the pattern within a single line of text not spanning two lines The special characters in a pattern are e to match anything including nothing e to match a single numeric digit e to match a single alphanumeric character e til
179. dit can supply up to eight extra scratch files To Text a file called abcd into an extra scratch file type qux text abcd new When you Exit Qedit checks whether you have any unsaved edits in any of your scratch files If there are some unsaved edits Qedit prompts you to Discard them or to stay in Qedit to save them with the Keep command Starting a New Scratch File Sometimes you start editing a new document and have nothing to Text to create the extra scratch file In this case use the New command without parameters Qedit creates a new extra scratch file and assigns it a sequential number 1 2 3 If you use an Open command you would see Extra Scratch file 2 in the list of files If you do a Keep or Set Keep Name command you would see the Keep file as the Text name in Open Configuring Different Shells Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual When you log on to HP UX a program is run called the shell The shell program interprets commands executes them and controls command execution Making configuration changes requires that you know which shell you are using and what files are automatically executed Bourne and Korn Shells The Bourne and Korn shells execute the file etc profile when you log on to HP UX They then look for a file in your home directory called profile If it exists it is executed If you use SAM to add new users the file etc d profile is automatically copied to the home group of the Running
180. e SET CHECK ON OFF The choices are sometimes listed on several lines without up lines Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Welcome to Qedit 3 6 Dot dot dot indicates that the variable may be repeated many times in the command 7 Other special characters literal symbols that must appear in the command as they appear in the manual for example in Add linenum rangelist In examples there is an implied Return key at the end of each line In examples in our documentation we generally show Qedit commands preceded by the Qedit prompt However in Qedit UX the default prompt is actually qux Note that you can change the prompt string with Set Prompt Control characters generated by holding down Control while striking another key are either spelled out e g Control H or abbreviated with a circumflex prefix e g H When Qedit asks you a question the default answer is shown in brackets The default is the answer that Qedit will assume if you press only the Return key 4 Welcome to Qedit Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Highlights Highlights In version 6 0 Qedit now recognizes files with the extension of COB and cob as Cobol files on HP UX Qedit on HP UX now has the command set compatvarsub on which does not replace variables that are not defined with spaces It simply passes the token thru to the Qedit command interpreter if the variable is not defined The Find command could po
181. e followed by the status Line several text Lines and ends with the template Line Columns 3 and 4 Getting a Quick Start with HP Full Screen Editing 13 of text lines sometimes contain special characters and are called the indicator columns Home Line You type commands search for strings and for line numbers after the gt on the home line These are executed when the F7 or Enter key is pressed The home line is also used by Qedit to print error messages You must clear the error message by pressing the F7 or Enter key before you can type another command in the home line Status Line The second line shows the status the current line number i e that of the line the name of the file you are editing the current string with its window and any pending cut and paste task Okay 1691 75 WFILE DOC TACCT verify u Move Ready If you have Texted a file into Qeditscr the status line shows the name of the Text file which is also your default Keep file Text Lines By default you see the current line and 19 lines after it Each line is prefixed by the relative line number and two columns for special indicators procedure abc 1 begin 2 integer def Use Set Vis Above and Set Vis Below to adjust the number of lines shown above and below the current line Template Line The last line has and a column template The signals end of screen to Qedit and must not be erased Visual uses more tha
182. e ROBELLE environment variable The three log files are called access log error log trace log Like most UNIX log files these files will continue to grow until you run out of disc space We recommend archiving the log files in a separate directory and saving them each week After archiving you can remove everything from the log files with these commands 74 Qedit for Microsoft Windows Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual cp dev null access log cp dev null error log cp dev null trace log Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit for Microsoft Windows 75 Qedit Issues and Solutions Running Qedit with Reflection Walker Richer amp Quinn produces Reflection the well known terminal emulator for IBM PCs which can be combined with Qedit in a number of useful ways See also the section Variables that Drive Qedit in the Running Qedit under HP UX chapter Alt Y vs Reflect Q Why do some Reflection command files work fine when I execute them from the Alt Y command line but go screwy when I execute them using Qedit s Reflect command A Qedit s Reflect command sends an escape code to Reflection to invoke the command then Qedit waits for Reflection to send back a status code to indicate when the command is finished While Qedit is waiting for the result code from Reflection it isn t capable of executing other Qedit commands it s already executing a Qedit command The only thing that Qedit is capable of doing while it
183. e calculation from left to right This is similar to an electronic calculator where each keystroke is operated on immediately You can use parentheses to force the calculator to evaluate the expression in a different order 144 16 15 3 compute an average Result 15 0 144 16 15 3 add 14 16 and the result of 15 3 Result 35 0 14 16 15 3 divide 16 15 by 3 then add to 14 Result 24 3333333333 Percentages A number in the calculator expression may be followed by a percent sign The calculator assumes that you want to qualify the number as a percentage 125 5 what is 5 of 125 Result 6 25 1254 125 5 add 5 of 125 to 125 Result 12 5 125 125 5 oops we needed to change the order Result 131 25 this looks like the answer we wanted The last two examples show the importance of the order in which calculator evaluates the expression We needed to use parentheses to force calculator to evaluate our expression in the correct order Display Formats Qedit Commands 253 A calculator expression may be followed by a comma and a display letter The default is decimal and the options are Hex or H Octal or O Double D ASCH A and Binary B With these options the result is treated as a 32 bit integer 10 standard octal format Result 000012 10 negative number in octal Result 37777777766 100 hexadecimal Result S0064 In Double format calculator print
184. e character is optional but if it is there it can appear multiple times The plus sign represents one or more occurrences This means the character must appear at least once but it can appear multiple times matches ac abc abbc etc matches abc abbc but not ac When you have to check for a fixed string of characters it is easy enough to simply type it at the actual regexp Entering abc 123 will only find exact matches What if you want to find the string abc followed by a numeric digit There are no specific metacharacters for digits or alphabetic characters However regular expressions have a concept called character class to address these issues Actually Regular Expressions 273 274 Regular Expressions character class is a lot more powerful and flexible than metacharacters for specific types of text A character class is enclosed between brackets The closing bracket can be left out However it is good practice to code it explicitly to avoid ambiguity Note that most regexp metacharacters listed above lose their meaning inside a character class The start of line anchor acquires a different definition and a new metacharacter hyphen appears A character class is a list of possible values for a specific position in the string The character class can be as long as needed A character class for numeric digits would be 0123456789 Note the list does not have to be in sorted order Y
185. e columns 73 80 None Starting column 7 7 1 Variable length no no Yes Record length 72 80 1 000 The Data Language setting defaults to 256 characters per record but it can handle up to 8 172 characters in a Wide Jumbo workfile In a workfile of Jumbo format the limit is actually 1 000 To use Data your workfile must be in Jumbo or Wide Jumbo format which supports longer lines and more of them 99 999 999 instead of 65 535 If a non Jumbo workfile is open you will have to shut it before you can use Set Lang Data and create a new workfile To check whether your open workfile is Jumbo or not use Verify Open If you see No Recall in the display you are using an old workfile If you see Jumbo or W Jumbo after the Language value you are using a Jumbo file Because RPG is a column oriented language SMART searches on RPG source files are performed in DUMB mode In FORTRAN spaces in the middle of names have no significance i e CUST BOOK is the same as CUSTBOOK If a workfile is empty you can set the Language to anything you like When you change Language you change the maximum line Length If Length is reduced as in going from Job to SPL the lines are not actually truncated to the shorter Length They are only permanently truncated if you modify the lines Therefore you can switch back to the previous Language at once and still recover the full lines Note when you switch from COBOLX to COBOL lines with comments are actual
186. e length As it reads the file in Qedit is able to detect lines exceeding the maximum length When that occurs Qedit folds the line Characters exceeding the maximum are moved to separate lines Qedit Commands 241 242 Qedit Commands Since folding lines is equivalent to inserting new lines Qedit has to renumber the file from that point When all this occurs Qedit displays a warning message For example if Qedit is texting in a Cobol line which maximum length is 80 a line with 200 characters is going to turn into 3 lines qux t home demo longline cbl Language is now COBX Warning Found line s over 80 characters Lines folded and renumbered Error line number out of sequence 001200 renumbering the rest See line 1 2 6 lines in file Line 1 2 is the beginning of the long line The file now looks like this This is really the first line ed This is the second line ee This line is too long Qedit will split it into multiple lines of roughly 22 the same length Line folding is not smart In other words words can be s 4 plit in the middle eS commit work cw Originally lines 1 2 1 3 and 1 4 were together forming one very long line Explicitly Folding Wide Lines There are 2 file types on UNIX files with Newline delimiters at the end of each line and files without Newline delimiters By default Qedit UX can not handle files without Newlines or files with lines longer than 8 172 characters I
187. e marked range Examples verify show nondefault values ver open describe the Open workfile ver visual Visual mode status and options v print full status on Stdlist verify version Qedit version number verify string current string for F3 F4 verify lastfile previous file for List IS abbreviation for previous file verify exit does Qedit suspend on Exit verify zz currently marked range Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit Commands 247 Visual Command VI F1 This feature does not work on the hpterm terminal emulator at the moment 248 Qedit Commands Switches to full screen editing at the current line at a specified line or at the next occurrence of a specified string VISUAL linenum string Default linenum Qedit allows you to edit text in full screen mode on most HP terminals that have block mode and on PCs equipped with terminal emulators such as Reflection and AdvanceLink You use the terminal s special keys to edit the screen instead of using Qedit commands When the image on the screen suits you press Enter and Qedit reads the screen and records the changes in your file For full details see the Getting a Quick Start with Full Screen Editing chapter Examples visual start full screen editing now vis 45 start full screen editing at line 45 Yvi qo find go then change to full screen Notes For a help screen that summarizes most of Visu
188. e range Every line of the range is divided at the specified field columns If no is found a blank line is added after each line When marking several division points insert them into the first line of the block from right to left As you insert them they shift the following text to the right one space each Otherwise if you insert them from left to right it is difficult to select the proper division point for subsequent fields Gluing Lines in Visual Mode To Glue the next line to the current line use a G in column 3 or 4 To Glue two lines with a space inserted at the joint use GJ in columns 3 and 4 To glue pairs of lines within a block use GG to mark the start and end of the block By default G and GG append text after the last nonblank character in a line but it is also possible to glue text to specific columnar fields You do this by inserting a field separator at the start of each field mark the first line only The default field separator is the tilde but you Getting a Quick Start with HP Full Screen Editing 23 may override this with Set Vis Field If you specify three fields G glues the next three lines to the first line GG glues the next three lines to the first line and then go on to the next group of four lines If the precise column number where each field starts is important to you insert the field separators from right to left since each one that is inserted shifts the column numbers that fol
189. e the Keep command was used By default timestamp checking on the Open command is disabled If you want to enable it type Set Open Checktimestamp On Set Open Defer ON OFF Initially Off The Open command is used to access a Qedit workfile for editing Normally the workfile is opened with write access which updates the Last Modified Date of the file even if you don t actually make any changes to it However by doing Set Open Defer On you can instruct Qedit to defer the write access until a modification is attempted Qedit opens the workfile with Read Access initially then reopens it Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual with Write Access later if it is necessary to post a modification to the file See the Open command for more details It is important to remember that certain workfile attributes and settings are normally saved when the file is opened with write access Some of these settings are the ZZ marker the current line marker and the new default Keep name modified with Set Keep Name If you explicitly open a workfile in Browse mode or use Set Open Defer On these settings are not updated permanently unless the file is re opened with write access Pattern Set Pattern Old New Initially New Qedit uses 2 and to define a pattern to be matched The original pattern match logic in Qedit did not allow you to look for a pattern that contained a literal The current pattern match logic allows am
190. egexp range of lowercase letters list az regexp character class a and z Means Numeric Pattern In pattern matching crosshatch matches a single numeric character list rec pattern rec followed by 2 digits In the calculator you can use to include the previous result in the next calculation Means Spaces Pattern Recent Page or Field In a Pattern tilde means to look for zero or more spaces At the Visual home line the tilde command means display the page that you most recently left It actually corresponds to the Visual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit Glossary 303 current line So it can be used from line mode to reference that line The tilde is also used in Visual mode as a field separator within text lines that are to be divided VV or glued GG 304 Qedit Glossary Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual How to Contact Robelle Support You can contact us at the following address Robelle Solutions Technology Inc 7360 137 Street Suite 372 Surrey B C Canada V3W 1A3 Phone 604 501 2001 Fax 604 501 2003 E mail sales robelle com E mail support robelle com Web _http www robelle com For our international distributors listing please consult our web site Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual How to Contact Robelle 305 Index means back some lines or minus 297 means range regexp 297 for shell commands 57 in Visual m
191. end of the paragraph Verification Before Formatting If Set Check Justify is ON Justify Format and Both require user verification before formatting more than 5 lines This should eliminate inadvertent formatting of entire source programs You can also use the Undo command to undo the effects of the Justify command Left and Right Edges for Justify Justify works within borders called the left and right edge The left edge is usually column 1 or column seven 7 in standard COBOL The right edge is usually the highest column number allowed in the file e g 80 for JOB files However if you use Set Left and Set Right to create margins for your file Justify operates within those limits Set Left will be the left edge and Set Right will be the right edge You can also use the Margin keyword to establish the right edge for Justify but remember that this edge is relative to any Set Left value Examples justify center 5 6 center lines 5 through 6 j right 5 6 right justify lines 5 through 6 j left 5 6 left justify lines 5 through 6 j format 5 50 format lines 5 50 into margins 7 5 6 splice lines 5 and 6 into one line J both 5 format a paragraph even right edge from line 5 to the next blank line Right Justifying Lines Justify Right shifts each line of rangelist to the right until the last nonblank character is at the right edge For example justify right margin 50 rangelist Input lines Robelle So
192. eplacement string 272 even margins left and right 128 even or odd number of pages 137 exclude lines full screen 23 220 Exclusive Set Text 205 executing commands in a file 242 Exit command 115 exit from Visual 19 exit keystroke Reflection 79 exit screen mode 36 exit with verify 55 expanding a workfile 258 Expandtabs Set 185 extension file 262 Extentsize Set 185 external command process 185 external files 91 definition of 276 Extprog Set 185 Extra error 253 F F1 function key 18 F2 function key 18 241 F3 function key 18 F4 function key 18 F5 function key 18 94 F6 function key 18 120 F7 function key 18 148 F8 function key 19 fast scrolling 35 Fclose error 253 Fcontrol error 253 Fgetinfo error 254 field separator in Visual 213 file modification timestamp 189 198 file extension 262 file format Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Jumbo 193 260 278 original 259 260 Wide Jumbo 193 260 278 file formats 259 file full 121 258 file name definition of 277 file names hardcoded 59 log 74 File nearly full 258 file open error 168 file timestamp 134 168 237 file type override 236 Filename Set 185 Filename error 254 filling text even left margin 128 Find command 42 116 Findup command 42 118 fold lines 238 Fold lines List 147 Fopen error 254 force disconnection 115 Force 80 Columns in Reflection 220 Form command 119 form feed causing Return Line feed 78 Format Justify 128 formatting list
193. ere is an odd number of pages by sending an extra page eject sequence before closing the output file These even and odd options are mutually exclusive 1 e they cannot be both enabled at the same time If you try use them both on the same command Qedit uses the last one in the sequence For example you can type List Seven Sodd lpa myfile Qedit does not see this as an error and uses the odd option ignoring even Qedit Commands 145 146 Qedit Commands These options only make sense if you are sending the list to a printer either attached or spooled They have no effect when listing the file to the screen For this reason you have to specify a destination printer using lp lpa lpb record or device You can also use one of these options as the default by using the Set List command Specifying a option on the List command overrides the Set value There is currently no way to completely ignore the Set options If you want both options to be disabled you have to issue Set List Even Off Odd Off prior to the List command Double Spaced Listings When listing to LP you can force the result to be double spaced with List double This feature can be combined with most of the other features of List including LT LQ and Set List Page On To make all printer listings double spaced do Set List Dbl On LQ ona CCTL file disables the Double option because the CCTL codes in the file control the spacing on the listing
194. erts it into a ShiftIn internally To avoid turning every occurrence of the alias character in your file into a Shiftin Visual prints a for any line with a valid alias already in it and will not let you update that line in Visual mode use Modify instead nje sO Set Visual SO nnn char Default None If you edit text containing ShiftOut characters they will not appear on the screen From the location of ShiftOut the display switches to the alternate character set which typically is the Line Drawing set When you press Enter the terminal or terminal emulator automatically inserts an escape sequence in front of the ShiftOut The escape sequence is lt esc gt B To get around this problem you can define another character as a translation for the ShiftOut character For example Set Vis SO defines to represent ShiftOut When Visual needs to print a ShiftOut on the screen it prints a instead When Visual sees any on the screen it converts it into a ShiftOut internally To avoid turning every occurrence of the alias character in your file into a ShiftOut Visual prints a for any line Qedit Commands 221 222 Qedit Commands with a valid alias already in it and will not let you update that line in Visual mode use Modify instead Scrollup Set Visual Scrollup nnn char Default You can enter a minus sign in one or both copy paste columns in full screen mode A single character scrolls up
195. es command enclosure which include commas or semicolons that might be confused with delimiters Qedit considers everything between the left and right parentheses as one command This is mostly useful when multiple commands appear on one line F test listspf o seleq owner mgr acct Li 5 Right parentheses identify the end of subpatterns inside regular expressions List x abc z subpattern ends with c Means Ahead Some Lines Add or Quantifier in Regexp Plus means move ahead a relative number of lines Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual mod 1 A plus sign at the Visual home line means move roll ahead a number of lines gt 415 roll ahead 15 lines Plus in the calculator means add e g 5 10 A plus sign in regular expressions indicates the preceding element might repeat one or more times in the text list optq regexp p must be there one or more times Means Back Some Lines Minus or Range in Regexp Minus means back a relative number of lines list 20 Minus in the Visual home line means roll back a number of lines gt 10 roll back 10 lines Minus in the calculator means subtract e g 1010 40 Minus in a character class within regular expressions indicates a range of characters It takes on this meaning if it appears between two other characters If it appears at the beginning or end of the class it is used as a literal list a z r
196. es not use the Set Visual Blockemulation command Visual Blockemulation also has the following limitations e Does not allow more than 20 contiguous blank lines e Can not add more than 30 new lines at a time e Can not display more than 260 characters on a line Visual Blockemulation sometimes can not detect it has read all the lines To workaround this Qedit assumes that 20 contiguous blank lines indicates a potential transmission problem and stops reading the screen If you have to insert more than 20 empty lines make sure you insert less than 20 and hit Enter Repeat until you have all the lines you need Of course you can use the Add command outside of Visual mode Similarly you can not add more than 30 new lines to the current screen before transmitting your changes Make sure you insert lines in smaller numbers then hit Enter or use the Add command Visual Blockemulation can not display more than 260 characters on each line To edit wider lines change the Set Left and or Set Right values Right Margin and Display Width Full screen mode can take advantage of most features available on the terminal or emulator it s running on A couple of these features are the ability to adjust the display width and the right margin based on the file s record length Unfortunately these features are not implemented equally well on all devices and may cause undesirable behavior For example the hpterm emulator supports display width larger than
197. etc e Control Y stops execution of the current Qedit command e Control H causes the cursor to backspace one position in the current line e Control I skips to the next tab position e Control X cancels the current input line e Control S pauses a listing that is printing too fast for you to read e Control Q resumes a listing that you have paused with Control S Editing control characters can be tricky If you use Set Editinput to clean your text of line noise Qedit will not let you enter control characters in Add or Replace If you use Modify it treats all control Qedit Glossary 281 282 Qedit Glossary characters as edit functions If you use Visual the block mode terminal strips all control characters from the text There are three things that you can do 1 use Set Decimal ON and insert control characters using Change 26 2 use Set Editinput Data OFF and enter them using Display Functions in Add and Replace and 3 use Set Mod Qzmod and insert them using Control W Control P put CRT CRT Cathode Ray Tube is a generic term used to refer to the terminal It refers equally to real HP terminals clones of HP terminals made by other companies and PCs that run terminal emulation software Current Line The current line is the line you last accessed You can refer to it using the special character instead of a inenum For most commands is also the default rangelist For example VIS sends you into
198. f searching for the start of line anchor moves to the next line and puts the cursor at the first position If you search for the end of line anchor Qedit goes to the next line and puts the cursor after the last character on the line if the last character is visible If the anchor characters are used anywhere else they lose their metacharacter status and become ordinary characters Match Any Character The period or dot is used to match any character The character can be of any type As long as there is something in that position there will be a match For example selects any line that contains the strings abc and xyz separated by a single character That character can be anything e g 1 w etc Optional Character You can check the absence or presence of a character by following it with a question mark In a regexp the question mark indicates that the preceding character is optional If it is present it must appear only once ab c matches only ac and abc Repeating Characters There are different ways you can check for the repetition of characters If there is potential for a character to appear more than once you can use the asterisk or the plus sign quantifier These quantifiers are applied only to the character to their immediate left There is a very small difference between the two quantifiers The asterisk represents zero or more occurrences of the preceding character In other words th
199. f exactly the same length Two Spaces at End of Sentence Normally when Qedit adjusts text with Format and Both it inserts one space between each symbol regardless of the number of spaces between symbols in the input text If the Two keyword is ON Justify maintains two blanks after the end of a sentence i e after a or or one of those three followed by a quote mark or a right parenthesis and a space The default for this keyword is OFF Justify does not insert two spaces if the input only contains one it merely maintains two spaces if they are there already this means you don t have to worry about getting two spaces in a name like Calvin C Cook justify format two on margin 70 99 5 Formatting a List of Points The Indent keyword is a special capability for handling lists of numbered points 1 2 3 It assumes that your text is indented and that the numbers for each point appear to the left of that indentation The Indent parameter specifies the number of spaces at the start of each line that will not contain text to format Justify leaves anything to the left of this border as is In fact the existence of text to the left of the border acts as an end of point indicator eliminating Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual the need for a blank line between points to stop the justification Indent is relative to any Set Left The end of each point in a list is effectively an end of paragraph Here is a sample
200. f points just f with 9 this is a list of points Justification Breaks and Formatting Commands Justify has options to define characters that start and or stop justification when found in column one These options make it much Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit Commands 131 easier to justify text in files which contain embedded commands and special characters for a format program e g Prose TDP etc The specific characters are defined using the Start and Stop options set justify stop start gt This command says that any line with or in column one stops text justification and that line is not changed Any line with or space in column one ends justification of the previous paragraph and signals a new paragraph i e that line is formatted as part of the next paragraph It s important to note that a string rangelist has precedence over Start and Stop characters In other words the latter options are ignored Here is an example which justifies some text from a Robelle document that consists of both text and embedded Prose formatting directives Note that lines beginning with and are not altered and the line beginning with properly appears as a new paragraph justify start stop margin 50 format all Input lines S 40 155 Hae Sone tate Pf T 40 155 pn 1 p5 sl u3 com Define as Start of Paragraph ent 1l1Welcome to Compare beginkey
201. fic workfile with the List option To enable the local tag option simply enter Qedit Commands 231 232 Qedit Commands Set X Local On From that point any changes to the tag are recorded in the workfile The statement above sets the local tag to a null value You can specify the new value on a similar statement so that it can be used immediately Because a local tag is workfile specific if you switch to a different workfile the local tag option is automatically disabled and Qedit starts to use the default tag again If you want to stop using the local tag enter Set X Local Off This clears the local tag value and Qedit starts using the default default tag Enabling the local option again does not return the tag to its previous value If you are strictly using the Text and Keep commands to edit your source files the information is lost as soon as the workfile is purged or cleared Global By default users can define their own local COBOL tag If this is undesirable system managers can enforce the use of a single tag for all COBOL files by using Set X Global On Once enabled users are not allowed to use the Local option of the Set X command They can still use the Set X command but only the global tag value can be changed To allow the use of local COBOL tags again simply enter Set X Global Off The global tag has priority over any local tag If you are accessing a workfile with a local tag and you disable the
202. fied line to Qedit Note that M is the same as Return Initiates Overwrite mode and turns off Insert mode B In Overwrite mode if you enter a character it will replace the one on the screen Moves up or down some number of lines of text For example P3 moves back three lines Displays list of Qzmodify functions Find previous occurrence of lt c gt The cursor will be moved to the first occurrence of lt c gt to the left of the current cursor position If lt c gt is not found you will hear a beep Find nth occurrence of lt c gt where 1 lt n lt 8 Terminates Insert mode and Overwrite mode After T if you type blanks the cursor simply moves right one space without affecting the text Transparent mode is always turned off automatically whenever a nonblank printable character is entered then Overwrite mode is turned on If done at column one this deletes the entire line If done at column one this will join the next line to the end of the current line and display the spliced line for editing If not a column one then is the same as V Qedit Commands 161 162 Qedit Commands U jUmpback AV split X eXamine Y abort W Wordproc AWC W D W H W L W N W lt c gt D W P lt c gt Move back to the previous tab stop This is the opposite to I As an aid to remembering them I is the same as pressing the tab key and U is just to the left of I on the keyboard
203. file format known as Wide Jumbo These expanded Jumbo files can hold lines up to 8 172 characters If you pass a Jumbo file to a program that knows about Qedit files but not Jumbo files the file will appear to be empty to the program Keep File A Keep file is a disc file that is created by the Keep command of Qedit See external file A Keep file cannot be edited per se because you cannot insert lines in it A Qedit workfile is designed to hold the same data as a Keep file but more compactly and with the ability to insert lines Use the Text command to copy a Keep file into Qedit format Language Qedit works on files of standardized formats called languages Most are programming languages COBOL FORTRAN SPL and Pascal The language Data is provided for files with a nonstandard line Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual length e g Set Length 45 Set Length 132 but less than or equal to 1 000 columns per line The language Text is like the language Data but for lines with less than 256 columns The anguage of a file tells Qedit how long the records may be where the sequence number goes and much more For Qedit workfiles the language is assigned to the file when it is created see Set Lang New and Text Qedit also determines a language for each external file COBOL COBOLX SPL FORTRAN Pascal RPG Job Text by looking at the maximum record length the file name extension and the fo
204. files If so you are prompted to Discard them or Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual stay in Qedit to save them Qedit also asks you to Discard your changes if you Close a scratch file which removes it from the Open Stack and purges the file Clearing the Workfile Sometimes Qedit will ask you if it is okay to clear the existing contents of the scratch file and sometimes it won t If you have not made any changes to the scratch file since you last did a Text or Keep Qedit assumes that you have another copy of the lines and it is okay to delete the copy in the scratch file In batch the answer to the Clear question will always be yes If you know the answer you want you can append it to the file name parameter just as you do in the Keep command text abc yes Using Set Keep for File Attributes When you Text a file Qedit remembers as many attributes of the file as possible When you later Keep the file Qedit attempts to reproduce the original file The Text command does an implicit Set Keep command to record what it has discovered about the Text file Using TextQ for Numeric Data Files TextQ means text quiet or text unnumbered and is the same as using UNN after the filename Use TextQ to edit any data file that may contain numeric digits in the last eight columns Otherwise Qedit may interpret those digits as sequence numbers if the first five records of the file contain data that loo
205. for the file before that do open 1 then open 2 and so To select from a list of recently accessed files do open Examples open mail want to edit Mail c stop start open reopen previous file list all open select a recent file visual open 1 select file before last list function open 2 select file before that hold 400 500 open edit scratch file Notes Since you must Open a file before editing any command that requires an Open file creates a scratch file if none is Open If you attempt to Open a file which is not a Qedit workfile you see a message similar to the following open qpart2 Error Cannot open a non Qedit file Use Text command You need to Text this file not Open it The Open Stack Qedit maintains an Open Stack of the ten most recently Opened files One of these is always reserved for the primary scratch file You can have up to eight extra scratch files see TextJ and New which take priority over named workfiles in the Open Stack To reopen one of these files do an open command Open prints the list and prompts for a relative file number starting with zero for the most recent same as Open Open n allows you to open one of the recently accessed files directly Open 2 opens the third file in the list since zero is the first When you open any file it moves to the top of the list and the other files are pushed down one position The Close command
206. full screen mode around the current line Defaults When Qedit asks you a question it puts the default answer in brackets e g Purge file no The default is usually the option that would do the least harm to your file That is do not complete the task do not erase the file or do not upshift the line If you press Return to the question Qedit will take the default In batch processing there is no one available to answer the question so Qedit must decide on the proper answer for you Qedit assumes that you want your batch task to complete so it always selects the option that will complete the command successfully That is do clear the file or do upshift the line External File Although you can only edit the workfile that is currently Open Qedit accesses files for other purposes than editing Qedit reads external files in the Add Hold List Merge Text and Use commands add 100 1 tfile adds lines from tfile at line 100 1 list tfile lists the contents of tfile text tfile makes a copy of tfile use tfile executes Qedit commands from tfile merge tfile merge in contents of tfile hold sample 1 5 write lines 1 5 of sample to Hold file Qedit recognizes three types of external files Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual e Other Qedit workfiles e NUMBERED text files Each record contains a line number field The lines are sorted by the line number
207. fy command If there are no default settings Qedit assumes the text should be justified within the current display width The justified lines are written to the Hold0 file A single J indicator is not valid 24 Getting a Quick Start with HP Full Screen Editing Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Renumbering Lines When the insertion point is on the current screen Qedit renumbers the screen if needed and if Set Vis Renum is ON Inserting Blank Lines When entering a lot of new text it is tiresome to keep pressing Ins Line for each new line To insert a block of 10 blank lines quickly press Ins Line to create one blank line Cursor Left twice type R9 and press Enter This reproduces nine copies of the blank line immediately after it as well as updating the paragraph you just finished typing Repeat as needed Hold Files Visual has both an implicit and an explicit Hold file The Implicit Hold0 File Any block processed by the CC MM JJ RR or DD indicators is also written to a disc file called Hold0 Hold zero This allows you to copy the lines back into your workfile using AO or BO add from Hold0 After or Before the line on which you place the indicator The Explicit Hold File The HH indicator writes a block to the Hold file without moving or modifying it Use H for a single line To copy the line s back into your workfile use AH or BH You may need a Hold file when creating a file t
208. g at the beginning of your file Find will start searching for the string at the line after the current line unless you specify a inenum to start the search If you want to search from the beginning of your file use Find string FIRST The F4 user key does the same function as Find with no parameters Examples find Exe first find first line with exit 45 this command will cause an exit from the 28 find next line with exit after you exit from a module the program 11 continue finding lines until you reach end of file Warning No Line prints error and rewinds Error End of File ee next Find wraps around Warning Rewind to FIRST 45 this command will cause an exit from the 28 fq Spage 1 5 m find next Spage and modify it ftqz o exit find next string and change it JEg enun find next string and remove it start end find string range and set ZZ Lines 5 11 saved in ZZ Notes The Q option lets you find the line without printing it Use FQ if you intend to Modify the line after you find it Find prints an error when the search reaches the LAST line without locating the string Then if you enter another Find without a line Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual number the search starts from the FIRST line in the file after printing a warning To find see all occurrences of a string in a file use the List command When a string range is used and a corresponding b
209. gin Remember the left and right margins apply to most commands including Visual and Keep To reset the margin to the far right edge Set Right with no parameter RL file name Set RL filename Default none Initially none This option does not apply to Qedit UX It is still accepted for compatibility with the MPE version of Qedit Shift Set Shift DOWN 7 UP 7 Qedit Commands 205 206 Qedit Commands Default none Initially both 0 Configures string logic for the built in PROCedures DOWN and UP Valid values are 0 through 4 0 not configured 1 shift every character in the line 2 ignore characters within double quotes 3 ignore characters within single quotes 4 ignore characters within either single or double quotes Spell Set Spell option value Default lt null gt This option does not apply to Qedit UX It is still accepted for compatibility with the MPE version of Qedit Statistics Set Statistics ON OFF Default OFF Initially OFF If you turn Set Stat ON Qedit prints the CPU and wall time after each command Stringdelimiters Set Stringdelimiters POSIX DelimiterList Initially The initial list indicates the characters that can be used as valid delimiters The single quote is removed from the list if Set Decimal is enabled On Quote characters are always valid delimiters 1 e they cannot be removed from the list From full screen mode
210. gine e TAEOFF means to disable your Type Ahead Engine e TAE means to enable your Type Ahead Engine e The default is to ignore the Type Ahead Engine Qzmodify replaces the regular Qedit modify with a routine that allows visual editing on HP terminals Once you do Set Mod Qzmod all modify operations within Qedit will use Qzmodify including Before Redo modify from within Change and the Modify command To disable use of Qzmodify enter Set Modify with no parameters Qzmodify uses single character reads which you may find are a significant drain on the resources of your HP e3000 Qzmodify will work over DS lines but will be very slow However avoid Control Y and Break because there are bugs in DS that confuse the state of the terminal Qzmodify does Setmsg OFF on your session and Setmsg ON when it is exits use Set Vis Msg OFF to leave Setmsg OFF all the time For details on the Qzmodify edit codes either enter Qzmodify and type Control Q or see the Modify command Changing the Control Characters You can change the default code assigned to any function in the Qedit Modify command by using Set Modify Set Modify BX D T GL O V A The Modify command uses nonprinting control characters for function codes These characters have ASCII values between 1 and 31 which are generated by holding down the CONTROL shift key while striking Qedit Commands 201 202 Qedit Commands another key For example the code for Before
211. gle operation Depending on the type of connection this process might take a few seconds as the cursor moves down the screen On HP terminals Qedit s full screen mode is called Visual mode The function keys give you eight quick functions F1 Visual F2 Roll up F3 Findup F4 Find F5 Browse backward one page F6 Browse forward F7 Listredo and F8 Exit Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Running Qedit under HP UX 49 Press the F1 key or use the Visual command to switch to full screen mode where you can edit a full screen of text with the terminal keys The Enter key passes the revised screen back to Qedit and the F7 key executes any Line command that you type on the home line If you have an HP terminal or emulator you will want to export RCRTMODEL so that you can use advanced screen features See Variables that Drive Qedit To return from Visual mode to Line mode press the F8 key To save your changes to the Text file use the Keep command To get out of Qedit type Exit or press F8 again qux keep qux exit If you forget to Keep your changes Qedit asks if you want to Discard your changes or stay in Qedit to save them Screen Mode for VT Terminals Screen mode differs from Visual mode by doing edits to a line right away instead of waiting for a screenful of changes Use PF1 for Help PF3 PF4 to browse back and forth in the file You can enter new text right away there is no concept of command mode vs insert
212. gqrstuvwxyz 1 line changed colcopy 1 5 10 11 copy columns 1 5 to 10 11 Line expands 1 abcdefghiabcdelmnopqrstuvwxyz 1 line changed colcopy 1 5 10 20 copy columns 1 5 to 10 20 Line shortens 1 abcdefghiabcdeuvwxyz 1 line changed Trailing Spaces Trailing spaces on the line are not significant This means that a line can expand until a non space character reaches the current right margin Set Right However trailing spaces from the source text are significant and are copied in the operation Ifthe line can not be expanded further Qedit displays a warning message and allows the user to modify it Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual list 2 2 abcd efghiabcdeuvwxyz colcopy 1 8 20 insert columns 1 8 at 20 abcd efghiabcdeabcd UVWXYZ 1 line changed Set right 30 colcopy 1 5 30 insert columns 1 5 at 30 Warning Source columns could not be inserted Please modify Warning 2 abcd efghiabcdeabcd UVWXYZ 1 line modified Overlapping Columns When source and destination columns do not overlap the results are straightforward If source and destination columns overlap partially or completely the results might not be as expected Keep in mind that e source and destination columns are always based on the original line e the destination columns are removed e the source columns are put in their place Approving Each Changed Line Use COLJ to give yourself approval over each change before it is updated
213. gth temporarily use Set Right Lib Set Lib G P S Initially S This option does not apply to Qedit UX It is still accepted for compatibility with the MPE version of Qedit Limits Set Limits option value Sys OFF Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Run OFF Colonreq OFF Hold n Proc x Initially Sys ON Run ON Colon OFF Hold 10 Proc 4 Set Limits Sys Off disables the execution of shell commands from within Qedit It also prevents Qedit for Windows users from accessing host commands Qedit normally accepts shell commands with or without a prefix colon or exclamation mark To enforce the use of a prefix for shell commands use Set Limits Colonreq ON These are one way options once disabled they cannot be enabled again by the user The rest of the options do not apply to Qedit UX They are still accepted for compatibility with the MPE version of Qedit List Set List option value The Set List command controls the format and functions of the List command The valid options are Page ON OFF Lines nn Name ON OFF Num ON OFF Title ON OFF Dbl ON OFF PCL nn Record ON OFF LJ nn QJ ON OFF Endstop ON OFF Even ON OFF Odd ON OFF Nearest ON OFF page breaks on List LP lines per page with PAGE ON file name on each PAGE number on each PAGE title on each PAGE double spacing of List LP LaserJet fonts and orientation use attached printer via
214. h This caused some terminal emulators like hpterm to behave erratically When Marginfixed is enabled Qedit does not change the terminal settings It assumes the right margin is the physical display width This should work properly as long as the user let s Qedit poll the terminal for the information If the user decides to override this function by setting the RCRTWIDTH variable or change the width with Set Term Columns Qedit trusts that the user has set the terminal properly Users should be aware of two things when Set Marginfixed is ON Ifa file is narrower than the configured width nothing prevents the user from entering text beyond the file s right edge This extra text will simply be ignored If the file is wider than the configured width Qedit tries to display as much text as it thinks it can This causes the text to overflow However instead of truncating the extra characters the emulator writes them out on the last displayable column For example if a file has 100 characters but the configured width is 80 the first 79 characters are displayed correctly Characters 80 through 100 are written to column 80 The net result is characters 80 to 99 are lost and character 100 ends up in column 80 on the screen Msg Set Visual Msg ON OFF Default On Qedit Commands 219 220 Qedit Commands Visual always disables messages from other users using Setmsg OFF on MPE and mesg n on HP UX On MPE this is why a Showjob will show
215. hange on a Keep command depending on the Set Keep Cobfree option When accessing files Qedit checks the extension of the file if any It then tries to determine the language based on the extension Currently the following languages are recognized Language Extensions SSSSSC S e e C cer SS TIME umn XML CC CPP HTML HTM HTML ASP EMME QSL JAVA JAVA Qst Qs PASCAL P PAS PASCAL MODULE INCLUDE FORWARD EXTERNAL Extensions are not case sensitive i e cbl is the same as CBL File Num LANG Used Code Unn Ext Jnn COBOLX g 3f COBOL n n um COBOLX n n ext n EE eo ae ca i inal digits F i Lo no digits 8 digits FORTRA N j Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual u EE j Z m m Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual no digits 8 digits not Num SPL Ftn Pas 72 odigits Num COBOL _ N T72 nodigits Pascal ext Unn Pascal 72 no digits not Unn SPL Ftn Pas no digits no Unn JOB digits sags Nam p08 oas eas Num Text Tase rodis Un Text lt a or spent Tio no digits fet Um am T1000 oses exe umn Dee T1000 no digits ext Un Java T1000 no digits Je Um Jost see Set FORTRAN ON In this table the File code Ext column indicates how Qedit determines which language to use Code means it uses the file code only Ext means it uses the file extension only
216. hat line a string means display the next line with that string and means search backwards for a string 55 find and display line 55 or higher FIRST find and display first line TA display the next 5 lines display the previous line 5 move current line back 5 lines string display next line with string string display previous line with string turn on memory lock at this line turn off memory lock Function Keys Qedit accepts the eight user function keys of HP terminals as one keystroke abbreviations for useful functions F1 Go into Visual Update Getnext if in Visual F2 Roll the screen up 6 lines browse F3 Findup find previous line with current string F4 Find find next line with current string F5 Browse Backward One Page Qedit Commands 85 F6 Browse Forward One Page F7 Listredo line or execute gt line Visual F8 Exit from Qedit or Exit from Visual to Line mode I through 8 are another way of invoking the user function keys in Line mode Shell Commands Qedit accepts most HP UX commands and scripts If the shell command matches an existing Qedit command you must precede it with a colon or an exclamation See Running Qedit on HP UX for more details Calculator Commands Any command that begins with an equal sign is treated as a calculator expression This feature can be used to compute temporary values and do conversions from one number base to another 64 0 Result 00
217. hat you want to compile or when using the Use command You must use HH instead of CC for copying text from one file to another When HH is used to mark the beginning and end of a block it copies the block of text to the explicit Hold file With the HH indicator the current contents of the Hold file are erased and replaced with the marked lines If you want to append a block of text to the Hold file you can use the HJ indicator HH or HJ can be used to mark the first line However HJ must be used to mark the last line You cannot hold append a single line of text which means you can append only two or more lines With the HJ indicator the current contents of the Hold file are preserved and the block of text is appended to it Marking Changes Without Using Line Numbers The ZZ indicators mark a group of lines that you want Qedit to remember Use Z to mark a single line Note Z for a single line is valid only in Visual mode in Line mode use ZZ to mark a single line See the ZZ command in the Qedit Commands chapter for further information Once marked the lines are displayed at half bright Getting a Quick Start with HP Full Screen Editing 25 intensity and you can refer to them in any home line command by using ZZ where the line numbers are expected This is especially useful when listing lines to the printer changing or appending strings and formatting text list lp zz F7 change bob Robert zz F7 verify zz F7 che
218. he remainder of the original line must be 80 characters or less Examples z redefine value of Z string list last you enter new line of commands z use Z to mean list last z 1 5 5 define z as list vicinity fq trish z find string and display around it z f 1 p a c Lent find string that matches pattern copy line change a string in the new line Notes You can display and edit the current Z string only if you entered the Z string at the same time as the Z command z q hi z hi redo z Z q hi hello Jz Hello Although the line saved in Z need not be a complete command it is recommended that incomplete strings not be put in Z as they may be upshifted ListJ is a useful command string to save Just type Z and Qedit will start listing from your current position When you find what you want press Control Y to stop the listing Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit Commands 251 ZZ Command 252 Qedit Commands Marks a block of lines so you can refer to them in any command ZZ line line OFF ZZ string range OFF Q no display Default becomes start or end of block ZZ line line marks a range of lines while ZZ line marks the start or end of a range ZZ marks one range only not a rangelist To mark a single line say 5 use zz 5 5 ZZ OFF cancels the currently marked range eliminating the half bright display enhancement i
219. his allows it to respond immediately and visually to each keystroke but means that the performance is unacceptable over NS packet switching LANs and the DTC Once in Qzmodify type Control Q for a list of commands How to Edit in Qzmodify In Qzmodify what you see is what you get The cursor rests on the same line as the text you are editing If you press any printable key ASCII code 32 or greater that key either replaces the character the cursor was on or if Insert mode is on inserts the key before that character moving the rest of line to the right by one character When you initially enter Qzmodify you are in Transparent mode here a blank simply causes the cursor to move one space to the right Pressing any other printable character immediately terminates Transparent mode and puts you in Overwrite mode so the character replaces the one the cursor is on The three basic modes are Mode To enter To exit transparent T any printable char B O or X overwrite O AT B or X insert B or T O or X Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit Commands 159 160 Qedit Commands Qzmodify will not allow you to create a line longer than a maximum specified by the calling program nor can you accidentally lose characters off the right edge when using Insert mode Qzmodify beeps when you try to do something illegal To edit Roman 8 characters use Set Editinput Extend ON Editing Commands Qzmodify has an exte
220. his becomes the default for the Keep command If you Keep with an explicit name Qedit remembers the absolute path of that name If you do Set Keep Name xxx to override the default Keep name Qedit remembers xxx as a relative name not as an absolute name This gives you all the options you need to take advantage of the cd command within Qedit How to Text Several Files Qedit has a primary scratch file that is referred to as Qeditscr Any time you take the default options for Opening or Texting a file your work will be in the Qeditscr primary scratch file What if you want to edit two or more files and copy lines between them You could Text the first file Hold the desired lines Keep your changes then Text the second file and insert the lines However if you are doing a large number of edits the constant Text and Keep operations are inconvenient A faster method is to Text each file into an extra scratch file of its own Then use the Open or Open n command to switch quickly among them By default Text always copies the file into the primary Qeditscr scratch file However Qedit can supply up to eight extra scratch files Use the New option text abcdef new or do Text J textj abcdef The New command can also create extra scratch files Warning If you do New Text file New you will create two Extra Scratch Files not one Saving Your Work When you Exit Qedit checks whether you have any unsaved edits in any of your scratch
221. horten command names for example to a single letter unless more than one command starts with the same letter If that s so enter enough of the command name to distinguish it The reserved words First Last and All can be replaced by and in Qedit commands Sometimes you can even dispense with the command completely means help means back one line 55 means go to line 55 string means find this string string means search backwards for this string and a simple Return means go ahead one line Batch Although Qedit is primarily designed for interactive editing all commands except Visual can be used with stdin or stdlist redirected If either stdin or stdlist is redirected Qedit assumes that it is in batch mode There are two differences in operation An etror causes Qedit to terminate in batch mode but only skips the current command line in session mode Qedit Glossary 279 280 Qedit Glossary Where a Yes or No question is asked in session mode e g Clear the question is printed with an implicit Yes answer in batch mode e g Clear Yes In both session and batch a warning message is nonfatal Set Autocont ON causes errors to be nonfatal in batch mode New work lines can be Added in batch but because Control Y cannot be used the Add should be ended with Calculator Qedit will treat any command that begins with an equal sign as an expression to be evaluated To add two number
222. hree subpatterns in the regexp Each subpattern is enclosed in a set of parentheses The first subpattern 1 repeats the numeric character class 3 times It represents the digits in the area code The second subpattern 2 also has the character class repeated 3 times It represents the exchange number The third and last subpattern 3 repeats the character class 4 times It represents the individual number Subpattern 0 represents all 10 digits Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Regular Expressions 277 To reformat this information we can now combine backreferences with other characters to arrange the numbers any way we like Let s say we want to put the area code in parentheses insert a space after it and insert a dash between the exchange number and the individual number We would use the following substitution string A1 2 3 The list would appear as follows 123 456 7890 111 222 4444 908 737 4456 You can use subexpressions to reorder the text in lines For example if we want to reverse the telephone numbers show the last four digits first then the first three digits of the telephone number followed by the area code we could use Last 3 Middle 2 Area 1l Complete 0 This substitution string produces the following list assuming that we started with the same data in this example and used the same regexp 7890 Middle 456 Area 123 Complete 1234567890 4444 Middle 222 Area 111 Complete 111
223. iate places and break the file into manageable pieces Starting with version 5 3 13 of Qedit UX you can use the Length option of the Text command This option allows you to specify the maximum size in bytes of each line The file will be split in a number of same size lines except the last one if the total size of the file is not evenly divisable by the specified length If the file contains Newline characters these characters are processed as data You should be very careful when editing such files If you inadvertently remove one or more of these characters other programs might have problems using the file again Since Newline characters causes terminals to move to the next line we recommend that you use the Char or the Hex option on List commands For example to break a file into 80 byte lines you should use Text longfile length 80 Another way to accomplish this is by using the fold command fold w 80 longfile gt shortfile In this example the file Longfile is broken down into fixed length lines each line containing a maximum of 80 bytes The result is written to a new file called short file It is then possible to edit the new file using Qedit UX Once you have made all the necessary changes you can put the short lines back together by removing the NewLine characters You can use the UNIX awk to perform this operation Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual awk v ORS print 0 shortfile gt longfile The
224. if f etc rc config then etc rce config else echo ERROR etc rce config defaults file MISSING fi Check to see if this script is allowed to run iE f SQEDIT SERVER l 1 then rval 2 else Execute the commands to start your subsystem opt robelle bin qedit d fi Finally you need a symbolic link to specify when the script in sbin init d will be executed at boot time Typically you would start the server as the last step at run level 3 Get a list of all the startup files in sbin rc3 d with 72 Qedit for Microsoft Windows Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Log Files Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual ls sbin rc3 d S Link names in this directory follow a set of conventions The names start with the letter S or K S links are startup scripts K links are shutdown or kill scripts The next three characters in the name represent an execution sequence number This number must be 3 digits and its value should be a number greater than the highest value on the Is listing For example if the last link is called S100nfs server you could use S111qedit_ server Create the symbolic link with In s sbin init d gedit_server sbin rc3 d S1lllqedit_server For the time being you do not need a kill link Port Number By default Qedit UX listens on port number 7395 This port number has been registered with the Internet Naming Authority so you should not have any conflicts with other HP UX tools for the
225. ify both 5 J justify B both to be interpreted as both margin 70 two on 5 See the Justify command for further details Keep Set Keep option value Default same as Text file Determines the format of the next Keep file Attributes are taken from the previous Text or Keep or they are based on the current Set Lang value Qedit attempts to duplicate the Text file as much as possible when doing the Keep Use Verify Keep to display the current Set Keep values including the default file name The options you can set for the Keep file are ASCH CCTL Checktimestamp Code Lab Name Num Var Cobfree and Qedit Commands 191 192 Qedit Commands Bytestream All options are accepted by Qedit UX for compatibility with the MPE version of Qedit However you should only use the CHECKTIMESTAMP NAME NUM and VAR options Set Keep ASCII ON OFF Initially ON Files can be either ASCII or Binary Qedit takes this value from the file that you Text but will revert to ASCII ON for any new workfile Even though Qedit will create binary files with Keep it is not recommended for use in editing binary files The reason is that Qedit treats Carriage Return as end of line which may truncate some records ASCII files have their records padded with blanks Binary files are padded with zeros nulls Set Keep Bytestream ON OFF Initially OFF POSIX introduces a new type of file called Bytestream These files do not necessarily ha
226. ile we ll have to move the first six lines so they follow our new sample Before we try moving lines a last tip on copying you can copy lines from an external file by including the file name in the command placed after the equals sign and right before the rangelist Moving is very similar to copying it s another form of the Add command But instead of using the equals sign use the less than sign You can specify add 12 lt 1 6 P3 MEMO TO News Simulation Department 14 15 DATE November 18 2000 16 17 FROM Marie Reimer Publicity Department 18 19 Please check your in baskets daily and 20 respond to your fan mail within a week 8 lines MOVED Qedit moves the rangelist in this case lines 1 to 6 after the indicated line in this case 12 In case you were wondering we could have used last instead of the number 12 You can add move or copy lines to any spot In fact we could have copied the first six lines to the Getting a Quick Start with Line Mode Editing 45 beginning of the file in the first place but then we wouldn t have had this fascinating move example The result of this particular move is list all MEMO TO News Simulation Depar DATE November 18 2000 FROM Marie Reimer Publicity Department MEMO TO News Simulation Department DATE November 18 2000 FROM Marie Reimer Publicity Department Please check your in baskets daily and respond to your fan mail within a week CDOM
227. ilename UNN rangelist Q no display Default entire file The inenum tells Qedit where to begin adding the lines from the external file The filename tells Qedit which file to copy from It can be any type of disc file If any of the lines are too long they will be truncated with a warning Use filename UNN when you are adding from a data file with numeric characters in the last eight columns which are not really sequence numbers Qedit Commands 91 92 Qedit Commands The rangelist tells Qedit how much of the file to copy The default is to copy the entire file If the external file does not have sequence numbers Qedit assumes that the file is numbered from 1 by the current Set Increment When you specify a rangelist Add leaves a copy of the lines from the external file in the Hold0 file as well as in your workfile Examples add 500 01 abc 500 001 abc line 1 500 002 abc line 2 aq 5 xyz 5 10 l template Spage up L SPAGE xx 24 SPAGE yy 37 SPAGE zz add 5 template 24 36 shut dev src test c new cust a 1 50 60 Notes copy in the file ABC after 500 01 prints each line copied from file prints new line numbers too copy in lines 5 10 of the file XYZ list page breaks in a file select the template you want copy the lines between Spages establishing previous file open another file stands for dev src test c Add prints each line as it copies it unles
228. iles without NewLine Characters ccccccccccccesssceceneecessececesaecessececessecesesaeccseseesesseeesesescseees 80 Lines Strings and Ranges icc sac2ttes apsvesssouse tees aE ET A asco endes dastvenace cecdebbenedecdasuaedinecoteep bandos 81 Qedit Commands 83 Introductoni 4 lt 3 hc teis kl ee eA tee Sidhe cody Seti ote ated ETE DEE 83 Grenerall Ao AE ER te Ae hectic eee te hed ate ce detache ats Se ENAN EE HePcide Mesias ces 83 INDDTENIAUIONS ahora ys ee oral ams Meter edo eins Miles LAE toe Ss tre ad 83 Uppercase OF LO Wer Casein a2 5 iias sngeteesrastecs tats ean aba a asail 84 Multiple Commands per Line 2 c95 6 tee elaine sehaaasbeleeeseoes 84 Comments on Command Lines ccccccceessececeessececeesseceeeensseeeeessaes 84 Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Stopping Commands with Control Y ceececccecsseceseceeeeeeeeeeeeenaeenes 85 Implicit Commands ssns dansinn vee a o ie clea ode 85 PUNCHOMN Keysar Mega tices E A Seren Sioa Miao Rican 85 SGU C Ota occas acti leah x sansa sucess E EAT 86 Calculator Commands cansan eni a RR ASO ee 86 Add Command A 2 r teks eteeiii 5 Svecee Saeed eats E ieecee Geeta N 87 Add Adding New LANES cssscis ai seccadas Sacteaasdeaviassiocr davies Secieuteaeanies 87 Add Adding a String as a Lite lt i jeushias sctitnsghiseaseal oaeteeatas 89 Add Copying Lines within oF ile ire cteses ce xscnts cs venlerentcaen synced 89 Add Moving Lines within a File 0 0 cc ccceccsecs
229. inal or an HP terminal emulator e g Reflection from WRQ In Visual mode you have access to all Line mode commands including UDCs command files compiling linking and running programs shell scripts and string searching and changing Qedit s Getting a Quick Start with HP Full Screen Editing 11 search and replace functions aim to be simple fast and powerful e g ignore embedded words etc The Undo command allows you to cancel any previous edits to your file working back to the state at which you started Using the optional Open and Shut feature you can switch between files instantly Visual mode is a good introduction to the HP operating systems for users who don t work on HP computers all day Those who may particularly benefit are novice users or users who run Qedit only to update a report skeleton once a week These occasional users no longer have to memorize editing commands Visual mode provides a familiar environment where novices can make changes to the entire screen just as they do on PC editors You can even configure some electronic mail packages HPDesk elm to put your users directly into Visual mode when they edit a message Starting Visual Mode After you have invoked Qedit and Texted or Opened a file you switch from Line mode to Visual mode by typing VI or pressing F1 If you don t have a file open Qedit opens a scratch file and if empty fills it with a screenful of blank lines VI linenum st
230. ind the setting you like you may want to put them in your Qeditmgr configuration file so you won t have to do the Set Justify command every time you run Qedit For example set justify null margin 50 two on causes justify both 5 justify both margin 50 two on 5 but you can override your own defaults as in justify both margin 60 10 20 which merges with your Set Justify values to produce Qedit Commands 129 130 Qedit Commands justify both margin 60 two on 10 20 Configuring the Right Edge The Margin keyword specifies the right most column for processed lines This column is needed for the Right Center Format and Both options The value you specify is relative to any Set Left margin that is effective at the time of the Justify command Determining the Left Edge For the Both and Format options the left margin is determined by looking at the first and second lines of each paragraph If the first and second line are indented the entire paragraph will be indented Of course this indentation is relative to any Set Left justify both margin 50 linenum Input lines The Both keyword performs a function which is equivalent to ad b adjust both in nroff and troff Uneven lines are converted into lines of exactly the same length Output lines The Both keyword performs a function which is equivalent to ad b adjust both in nroff and troff Uneven lines are converted into lines o
231. ings with Set List 142 formatting text 126 FORTRAN Set 186 Forward command 120 Fread error 254 Freaddir error 254 Full error 254 full file 121 258 full screen after Open 212 full screen editing 244 277 286 function key labels 65 214 221 saving 216 function keys 17 85 Fwrite error 254 Fwritedir error 254 G G H straps 65 garbage collection 121 Garbage command 121 Gather command 90 176 GG cut and paste glue 23 213 global COBOL tag 227 Index 311 glossary 273 Glue command 122 glue function GG Visual 23 goof in modify 156 goto linenum 36 H Halfbright Set 186 Set Vis option 213 handshaking 65 header records 236 Help command 46 123 HH cut and paste hold 20 Hidetags Set Vis option 213 highlighted line cut and paste 37 Hints Set 187 HJ cut and paste hold append 25 Hold command 91 124 Hold file 24 57 124 278 name substitution 125 replacing from 177 Hold file 91 124 Hold file in Visual mode 24 holding programs restricting 195 home line 14 home line command truncated 29 home line commands 26 home line not transmitted error 257 Hpmodify Set Modify option 162 196 Hpmodify editing examples 163 reference 162 Hppath Set command 187 hpterm 212 213 hpterm emulator 62 HP UX and Visual 255 HP UX versus MPE 68 T O redirection 295 IBM files 236 identifying the terminal 61 ignore case in string search 100 ignore line feed option 214 312 Index ignoring case in string se
232. int state pic x 2 value ER 11 88 supr print on error value ER 12 88 supr print aluays value AL 13 88 supr print never value NE 14 BL 10 supr total type pic x 2 value CO 1 88 supr total cobol value CO Se EE ee Se eee oe 7 Backward Forward Do gt Exit One Page One Page Listredo Num z Z Visual mode in Reflection for Windows showing cut and paste indicators You copy move hold and delete blocks of text easily by placing cut and paste indicators at the start of the line You may type Line mode commands at the home line gt and execute them via the Enter or the F7 key Combining the cut and paste functions with the Open and Shut commands you can also copy and move text quickly between different Qedit files Use the ZZ cut and paste indicator with any command to mark text easily The Set Visual command controls how Visual mode operates and allows great latitude in configuring Visual to your own liking For example you can choose to have automatic update decide where the current line or cursor appears and select how many lines will carry over when you page up or down When you are done exit Visual mode using F8 then Keep or Shut your file Press F8 again to leave Qedit gt Okay 1691 75 WFILE DOC TACCT procedure abc verify u Move Ready begin integer def Satie eee ll Ove ena Pia Se 20 The screen starts with the home Lin
233. ion range where destination and Destination2 are the same e g Colcopy 1 10 10 A move means the original columns are removed and the line is shifted left Then the source text is inserted at the destination list 1 Hb abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz colmove 1 10 move column 1 to column 10 1 bcdefghiajklmnopqrstuvwxyz 1 line changed colmove 1 5 10 move columns 1 5 to column 10 1 fghiabcdejklmnopqrstuvwxyz 1 line changed If destination and destination2 are specified text in these columns is replaced by the source text If the source text is narrower or wider the line is shortened or expanded as needed colmove 1 10 15 move column 1 to columns 10 15 1 bcdefghiapqrstuvwxyz 1 line changed colmove 1 5 10 11 move columns 1 5 to 10 11 1 fghiabcdelmnopqrstuvwxyz 1 line changed colmove 1 5 10 20 move columns 1 5 to 10 20 1 fghiabcdeuvwxyz 1 line changed Trailing Spaces Trailing spaces on the line are not significant This means that a line can expand until a non space character reaches the current right Qedit Commands 107 margin Set Right However trailing spaces from the source text are significant and are moved in the operation list 2 2 abcd efghiabcdeuvwxyz colmove 1 8 20 move columns 1 8 to 20 1 efghiabcdeabcd UVWXYZ 1 line changed Overlapping Columns When source and destination columns do not overlap the results are straightforward If source and destination colu
234. ique lines The ranges are processed as they appear in the list Rangelist Means 30 40 1 10 lines 30 to 40 then 1 to 10 1 10 5 20 lines 5 to 10 are processed twice all all process the entire file twice A rangelist can also contain a string search Rangelist Means strg search the entire file for strg strg 10 20 search only lines 10 through 20 A rangelist can include up to 10 strings see String for definition Strings are separated from each other by an OR or AND keyword Each string can have its own search setting such as column range and options OR and AND keywords can not be mixed in a rangelist When OR is used each string is compared in turn against the text As soon as a match is found the line is selected Thus most commonly found strings should be placed at the beginning of the list to increase speed For example List abc or xyz search for abc or xyz C 1 2 MEY abe u 30 35 or xyz 50 60 8 search for caseless abc in columns 30 35 or smart xyz in columns 50 60 When AND is used all strings are searched for on each line and all strings must be found for the line to be selected The strings do not have to be in the same order As soon as one string is not found the line is rejected For example List abc and xyz search for abc and xyz Both strings must be present anywhere on the line in any order fC 172 ME abe a 20 735 and xyz 50760 5s
235. is does no allow the stack to be preserved across Qedit invocations Set Redo allows you to assign a permanent file as the redo stack allowing the stack to be available for future Qedit invocations To assign the Myredo file as a persistent redo stack enter Set Redo Myredo If the file does not exist Qedit creates it Otherwise Qedit uses the existing file All your subsequent commands are written to the persistent redo stack The setting is valid for the duration of the Qedit session As soon as you exit Qedit the setting is discarded Next time you run Qedit you will get the temporary stack If you want to use a persistent stack every time you run Qedit you have to insert the Set Redo command in one of the Qeditmegr files If the file name is not qualified the redo stack is created in the current working directory This may be desirable if you want to have separate stacks If you prefer to always use the same persistent stacks you should qualify the name The Verify command shows which stack is currently in use If it shows lt temporary gt then Qedit is using the default stack Anything else is the name of the file used on the Set Redo command Concurrency When Qedit uses the default the temporary stack is only accessible to that particular instance of Qedit You can run as many Qedit instances as you need and each one gets its own redo stack You will never have concurrency problems If you start using a persistent red
236. is still part of the line and is retained when you Text or Keep the file When you edit a COBOLX file in Visual Qedit sets the right margin in column 72 instead of column 80 In this way you can see the comment field columns 73 through 80 but it won t shift left when you delete characters Line Overflow Tagging can be disabled by specifying an empty string Set X Null set x While disabled the text and tag areas are treated as one As such edit commands such as Change are applied to the complete line Also if a tag is specified and the List option is On tag values are treated as part of the text If a line has a tag value and an edit operation such as Change or Modify causes the line to expand Qedit reports an overflow error To avoid this you can Set X to Null but you would have to remember the previous setting A better solution is to turn the List option Off temporarily The X value is preserved but the tag area cannot be edited Margins For those users who still must enter and edit the tag field manually Set X Tab On puts Qedit s Visual right margin at column 80 instead of column 72 This makes it much easier to edit those columns because you can tab to them Local Tag Users can define a tag that is specific to the workfile currently opened The local tag value is stored in the Qedit control blocks Thus the local tag is preserved when you Shut the workfile You can also control the tag display for a speci
237. isabled If Trailingspaces is enabled text is appended immediately after the last significant trailing space If the resulting merged line is too long for the current length the merged line is truncated Let s say the current workfile contains abc def ghj and the external file contains Qedit Commands 153 1111 2222 3333 A MergeJ would result in If the maximum length was 5 the resulting file would be mergej myfile 1 IIL Warning Result line will be too long Truncating merged text 2 22222 Warning Result line will be too long Truncating merged text 3 33333 Warning Result line will be too long Truncating merged text 3 lines merged l all 1 abcl 2 def22 ghj33 154 Qedit Commands Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Modify Command M Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Editing characters within lines using either Control codes default Set Mod Robelle D I R U edits Set Mod HP or Control codes with visible feedback Set Mod Qzmod MODIFY rangelist Q no linenum T template Default rangelist By default Modify displays the first line and puts the cursor under the first column You enter an edit line to specify a changes You use spaces to move the cursor under the word you want to change then type new characters to replace those in the columns above For example modify 5 5 Over 2000 computers use Suprtool prints line 750 you edit it 5 Over 2750 computers use S
238. it into two or more lines according to the column parameter The default rangelist is the current line The default columniist is except when the Divide command has no parameters or only a string rangelist Then the current line is split at the current column When Divide has no parameters the current column is Following a successful string match the current column is the first column of the string position in the line s Examples find abc divide move abc to a new line list 2 divide move ahead 2 lines add a blank line divide 20 all split every line at column 20 divide 20 40 split every line at columns 20 and 40 divide 10 20 30 split current line at 3 places divide 10 add blank line after lines 10 divide 20 Qedit split all Qedit lines at column 20 divide Qedit split all Qedit lines at Qedit divide Qedit add blank line to all Qedit lines Notes After a Divide command the current line is the last line divided To not print the lines use DivideQ Divide works within the current Left and Right margins That is characters to the right or left of the current margins are not moved When working with COBOLX files the Divide command does not consider the tag columns 73 to 80 as part of the data This means that the current tag data is not moved to the new split line It also means that you cannot divide a line past column 73 Qedit 6 0 for HP UX U
239. k of text Then you either copy or cut the text to a clipboard The copied text remains in the file but the cut text is deleted To paste the text put the contents of the clipboard into the new location If you have not marked a block of text when you perform a copy or cut the current line will be copied or cut When you start marking a block Qedit will highlight lines as you move through the file The highlighted lines are your marked block When you press Ctrl L to begin marking Qedit highlights the entire line This means the whole line will be inside the marked block regardless of the horizontal location of your cursor If you press Ctrl L again Qedit highlights only part of the line from the position of your cursor when you first pressed Ctr L to your current cursor position Press Ctrl L a third time to cancel your marked block Resetting Cut and Paste You can cancel the current marked block by pressing L Copying a Block of Text Suppose you want to copy a section of text from one place in your file to another Here is one way to do it Getting a Quick Start with VT Full Screen Editing 37 1 Use a string search to locate the start of the block Move the cursor to the first line you want to copy and press L You should see the current line highlighted 2 Go to the last line you want to mark and press C Go to the screen where you want to insert a copy of the text Move the cursor to the line after the desired
240. king for the first lt c gt If lt c gt is not found nothing is deleted Put the character into the text This is useful when you want to put a control character into the text All nonprintable characters will be displayed as Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual periods so they will take up one space on the line W S D Downshift all letters from the cursor to end of line W S U Upshift all letters from the cursor to end of line W S T Reverse the case e g a becomes A and A becomes a of all letters from the cursor to end of line W T Toggles the Type Ahead Engine if you have one through three states disabled enabled ignored W V Prints the version ID of Qzmodify W Display the ASCII character code for the character that the cursor is on W lt hh gt Replace the character at the current column position with the ASCII character whose hexadecimal value is lt hh gt Symbols Used in Qzmodify Command List lt c gt is any single character Qzmodify will search for this character If lt c gt is W the search will be for the next word words are anything delimited by blanks instead of for a single character lt gt is zero or more digits For example P12 would mean move forward 12 lines P3 would move back three lines lt n gt is one of A B H and is interpreted as the number 1 2 8 respectively lt dir gt is a to move
241. ks like ascending sequence numbers Treatment of Sequence Numbers Qedit retains whatever sequence numbers it finds in the external file If Qedit finds an invalid number it begins assigning new numbers starting from the last valid number and adding Increment If the file does not have sequence numbers Qedit assigns new ones starting at 1 0 and going up by a calculated increment The calculated increment is based on the file s current characteristics such as the number of records This works well in the majority of cases However there are cases where the calculated increment is not accurate enough or the user wishes to have a specific increment This can be done by setting the increment with the Set Increment command Then use the Setincr option on the Text command Text bigfile Use calculated increment Set Increment 02 Set the increment value Text bigfile Setincr Override the calculated increment Files with Header Records Qedit Commands 239 240 Qedit Commands Text has an option to skip 1 to 9 records before deciding the language of the external file The format is as follows TEXT Jines filename where lines is the number of lines to skip over This is useful with source files from external sources such as IBM machines that may have control cards without sequence numbers followed by a numbered COBOL source program By skipping the control cards Qedit may recognize the file as a COBOL program instead
242. l This feature does not work on the hpterm terminal emulator at the moment When Visual needs to print a Bell on the screen it prints a instead When Visual sees any on the screen it converts it into a Bell internally To avoid turning every occurrence of the alias character in your file into a Bell Visual prints a for any line with a valid alias already in it and will not let you update that line in Visual mode use Modify instead i Below Set Visual Below nn Default 19 By default Visual shows 19 lines below the line Set Vis Below can change this to 0 through 99 lines Qedit reads and writes a fixed number of characters per screen see Set Visual Buf If you Set Vis Below to a large number of lines such as 99 Qedit may not have room in the screen write buffer for all of the lines requested Qedit prints an error message attempts to reduce Set Vis Below to a value that will work and returns you to Line mode You type vis to restart Visual mode Blockemulation Set Visual BLockemulation ON OFF Default Off Full screen editing as implemented on HP3000 computers only works on HP UX versions earlier than 11 0 On HP UX 11 0 or later full screen editing is available in Screen mode Set Visual Screen On on VT type terminals or in Visual Blockemulation emulation Set Visual Blockemulation On on HP type terminals As its name implies Blockemulation emulates block mode operations by reading each line
243. le to look for QEDIT followed by TOOL in the same line use set window pattern upshift list Qedit Toole Either or both parts of the window can be Set in one command 1 10 smart upshift 1 20 upshift pattern set window set window set window set window To reset the window to the defaults enter set window Work Set Work keyword value Initially Block 8 Temp ON Labels OFF Jumbo ON Random ON Trailingspaces ON Size 3200 Set Work specifies the default size attributes and functions of Qedit workfiles Most of Set Work does not apply to Qedit UX However Set Work Jumbo Set Work Random and Set Work Trailingspaces do apply The syntax of Set Work is as follows Set WORK options ON OFF Control use of default ON Jumbo workfiles Jumbo Control use of default ON random scratch file name Random ON OFF Preserve or default ON remove trailing spaces Trailingspaces ON OFF Qedit Commands 227 228 Qedit Commands Jumbo Jumbo Off disables use of Jumbo workfiles It can also be used if you want to build an original format workfile For example set work jumbo off new oldfmt set work jumbo on Workfile By default Qedit creates a workfile named var tmp qscr xxxxx whenever it needs it var tmp is used by default If you want to specify a different location enter the new path name in the TMPDIR environment variable Keep in mind that
244. le and it will be saved on exit You will not be allowed to edit any other files qedit cvisual s myfile exit Save your changes yes no Exit with Verify v Some users find that they Exit from Qedit inadvertently by pressing F8 too many times To require user approval on Exit use the v option Okay to exit no Discard Changes on Exit Qedit needs to purge your random named scratch files when it terminates But you may not have saved your editing work yet In that case Qedit asks you Discard changes and will not Exit Purge unless you answer Yes Running Qedit under HP UX 55 HP UX Notes gedit myfile visual fExit Discard your changes no This section describes features of Qedit UX that interact with the HP UX environment EDITOR Variable HP UX utilities that invoke an external editor use the variable EDITOR to determine which editor and run time options are invoked The electronic mail tool elm is an example of a utility that uses an external editor to write all messages If you want to use Qedit as your standard editor you need to set the EDITOR variable We recommend using the s option for application use If you wish to immediately go into Visual mode you should specify cvisual as part of the variable string The following example sets the EDITOR variable to invoke Qedit and put you into Visual mode Bourne and Korn shells SEDITOR qedit s cvisual export EDITOR
245. le of pages of display memory or with hpterm on HP UX workstations although it works fine with PC terminal emulators and Qedit UX In Reflection for Windows versions earlier than 3 70 changing the display width also clears display memory beyond the control of Set Vis Cleardisplay If you want to retain your display memory you also need to use Set Vis Widen Off Cutcurrent Set Visual Cutcurrent ON OFF Default On This option tells Qedit where to put the current line marker after a cut and paste operation By default Qedit sets the current line at or near the first pasted line If you turn the option Off with Set Visual Cutcurrent Off Qedit tries to keep the current line as close as possible to the current line position before the paste operation This option only affects full screen mode editing Editonopen Set Visual Editonopen ON OFF Default On While in full screen mode you can enter shell commands at the home line Doing so causes Qedit to temporarily switch to line mode and prompt you for more commands with NEXT COMMAND VISUAL You have to hit RETURN or enter VISUAL to return to full screen mode Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual There is one exception to this If you enter an Open command at the prompt Qedit automatically switches back to full screen mode after opening the file This is the default behavior If you wish to disable this option use Set Visual Editonopen Off
246. lename List displays lines from that file without Shutting your current workfile You can refer to the previous file by a shorthand method a If you specify a single line number as a rangelist and that line does not exist in the current file Qedit s action depends on the Set List Nearest setting If the option is Off the default Qedit displays a No Line warning If the option is On Qedit displays the nearest line For example if lines 100 to 120 are missing from a file here is what would happen List 100 Warning No Line Set List Nearest On List 100 121 This is line 121 If you are trying to do something similar on an external file Qedit does not display anything Specify filename UNN when listing a data file which has numeric characters in the last 8 column positions and they are not valid sequence numbers When you list lines of your current workfile Qedit shows only the columns within the current left and right margins and the default rangelist is the current line e g List List When you List an external filename margins are ignored and the default rangelist is ALL Examples 136 Qedit Commands Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual list 5 display line 5 only listq 5 List Quiet from 5 to Last list customer all lines containing customer list 5 5 display current vicinity 1 report cob display entire source file l report cob 10 print last 11 lines of file 1 page 1
247. line and Ctrl X re think keys Accidentally pressing Alt X and shutting down Reflection in the middle of a Visual screen is pretty disastrous WRQ has added a remappable keyboard in Reflection that allows the user to specify which keys perform what functions The exit to dos function can be activated by a different harder to type key sequence To remap your keyboard in Reflection for DOS first create a DOS file called REMAP KBM with the following lines KEYBOARD ID ENHANCED TERM HP alt x alt ctrl x Then activate the changes by typing C gt KEYMAP REMAP KBM R1 CFG at the DOS prompt See your Reflection user manual for full details Reflection for Windows also has a remappable keyboard but null exit to dos Qedit Issues and Solutions 79 uses a different method of configuring it See your Reflection for Windows on line help or user manual for details Files without NewLine Characters 80 Qedit Issues and Solutions On UNIX files can contain NewLine nl characters at the end of each line However the NewLine characters are optional Some files have them Others don t Qedit UX requires that lines be separated by a NewLine NL character If that s not the case Qedit UX assumes the file does not contain anything Thus the Text command might display Text longfile Language is now DATA O lines in file If you run into this problem you have to find a way to insert these NewLine characters in appropr
248. line again Using Your Keyboard In Screen mode the keyboard gives you the power to move around the screen to edit text and to control the flow of Qedit Moving the Cursor You can move around the screen by using the cursor keys and the numeric keypad V7T100 and up VT100 keystrokes Cursor Left Move one space to left Cursor Right Move one space to right Cursor Move one space down Down y Keypad Layout VT100 keystrokes 7 8 9 Home Cursor Up Previous Page 4 5 6 Cursor Left Toggle Wordmove Cursor Right 1 2 3 End Cursor Down Next Page 0 Insert Remove 34 Getting a Quick Start with VT Full Screen Editing Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual V7T220 and Up Previous page of text Next page of text If you are using a modem to access your HP UX computer you can try pressing O to toggle the fast scroll option This option whose default is Off may speed up single line scrolling operations However the screen update with fast scroll may be visually annoying The toggle WordMove feature selects whether the left and right cursor keys will move by characters or by words This feature is useful if you have a slow connection to your host machine Press keypad 5 to move by word Qedit defines a word as a sequence of alphanumeric characters or a sequence of punctuation characters For example the line if a b contains 6 words if a b
249. lines the exact number depends on the length of the lines The lines in a block have contiguous line numbers and are extracted from the block by Qedit Block 0 of the workfile has a special format because it contains the language of the file and the number of lines and provides indexing Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual External Files Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual The first Qedit line is always in Block 1 and the first word of Block 1 points to the next sequential block in the file Each block points to the next and end of file occurs when the forward pointer is zero Within a data block the structure is as follows Word Within Block Comment First double word in block Second double word in block First word of first line Contents Block type Forward pointer Line number cont Data length Indent ABN cp cont Descriptor for first line Contents of first line Data 004 Data 005 Data 006 Data 007 Data 008 Data 009 nyg Line number cont Data Indent wD a End of first line Start of second line 89 Binary zero cont cont End of last line Unused portion of block Binary zeros are missing if the block is full The following definitions are used above Forward pointer block number of the next block 32 bit unsigned Line number a 32 bit integer containing the line number in binary 1 000 1 0 Data the number of words of data in the line 16 bit word Indent n
250. ll blocks to squeeze out free blocks but it also searches the workfile for any blocks that have been lost i e are no longer on the free list or the text list It does not make your file any smaller it just allows you to continue editing by finding usable space within the file Garbage prints a summary of how much space it recovered and how much is available in the file The summary report can be suppressed using GarbageQ 5 blocks squeezed out 2 found 55 used 10 on free list 9 for expansion In this example Garbage reports that 5 blocks were retrieved via squeezing 2 lost blocks were found 55 blocks are currently used to hold text 10 empty blocks are held on a deleted block list the free list and 9 blocks are available if the EOF is expanded toward the LIMIT Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit Commands 121 Glue Command G 122 Qedit Commands Joins a line with one or more following lines either concatenated or at specified tab positions Use Glue to turn a list of fields into a single record oriented line See also GG in Visual mode For the opposite of Glue see the Divide command GLUE columniist rangelist Defaults columniist rangelist n The columniist is a list of ascending column numbers in parentheses such as 10 20 30 or for after the end of line which is the default The rangelist specifies which lines to combine The default rangelist is the current line
251. llowed see also the TextJ command You cannot Exit without discarding or saving any edits you have done in an extra scratch file The language defaults to the current Set Lang value but can be overridden If you want to force creating a Wide Jumbo format you should set the Length to a value larger than 1 000 before issuing the New command Set Length 2500 New newwork These commands create a new permanent workfile called Newwork If you want to create a new scratch file enter the New command by itself The optional size is ignored by Qedit UX The maximum number of lines in a Qedit UX workfile is 99 999 999 Examples new create an extra scratch file new memos create an empty file named Memos set lang job define file as 80 column records add new frankie build frankie aq 1 johnny memos was shut automatically Building Workfiles with Text You can also create new workfiles while doing a Text command 168 Qedit Commands Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Open Command O Instantly opens or reopens a Qedit file for editing or browsing as opposed to the Text command which creates a copy of a file for editing OPEN filename BROWSE DEFER NODEFER x _y Default edit primary scratch file Qedit shuts the current workfile and opens filename The filename must exist see New and Text and must be a Qedit workfile or scratch file You cannot Open a Keep file you must first Text it int
252. lock is found the start and end line numbers are stored in the ZZ marker Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit Commands 117 Findup Command FINDU F3 Finds the previous line in the workfile that contains a string Findup can be shortened to Use Find if you want to search for the next line FINDUP string linenum Q no display Default string recent linenum 1 Findup defaults string to be same as last string and inenum to be starting from the previous line This saves having to repeatedly type the string and linenum Once you have defined your string and starting position all you need to enter is or FINDU to find the next string The F3 user key does the same function as Findup without parameters Examples findup exit last find last line with exit 90 after you exit from a module the program 11 findup find previous line with exit 45 this command will cause an exit from the 28 JA continue finding lines JA until you reach start of file Warning No Line prints error and rewinds Error Beginning of File findup next Findup wraps around Warning Rewind to LAST 90 after you exit from a module the program LLNS findupq mod find string and modify it findupq c exit find string and change it findupq c find string and remove it Notes Refer to the notes under the Find command 118 Qedit Commands Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Form Command
253. lons with dashes change all MEMO TO Drama Staff News Simulation Dept 2 1 DATE November 19 2000 3 FROM Marie Reimer Publicity Dept 3 lines changed Using the Change All command is a one way street If we now decide we don t like the dashes and want to get the colons back observe what happens to Line 5 change all MEMO TO Drama Staff News Simulation Dept 2 1 DATE November 19 2000 3 FROM Marie Reimer Publicity Dept 5 Please check your in baskets daily and 4 lines changed This second Change command has gotten us into hot water Luckily Qedit has an Undo command that takes your file step by step backwards to put it back to the way it was See the Undo command in the Qedit Commands chapter CJ Command If you re not sure what the consequences of a global change will be use the CJ command CJ stands for Change Jump Qedit shows you each line it means to change and waits for you to approve to change your mind or to modify that line Then Qedit jumps to the next occurrence of your string and repeats its question until you have dealt with all occurrences of the string in the file To accept the default answer of NO i e don t replace the string shown in square brackets just press Return PEIN S ALL 1 MEMO TO Drama Staff News Simulation Dept Change okay Y N or Modify No press Return 2 1 DATE November 19 2000 Change okay Y N or Modify No press Return 3 FROM M
254. low off by one more Excluding Lines From Visual Mode Display The XX indicators are used to mark lines that you do not want displayed in full screen mode Once marked the block of text is replaced with a single line Excluded Area 10 34 5 This line shows the line numbers which are currently excluded An excluded area setting is saved in the workfile so it s preserved across Open Shut commands To reset the excluded area and see the original lines again type xx on the Homeline and press Enter or F7 The excluded area can also be defined using Set Visual XX The current excluded area is displayed on the Verify Visual output Restrictions The Excluded Area line must not be removed altered or used in any way This also means that you can not enter any indicators in the cut and paste area If you wish to paste lines before or after the excluded area you should use the appropriate cut and paste indicators on the line that immediate precedes or follows the Excluded Area line An excluded area can not be included in any other block operation such as ZZ CC MM or other XX If any of these rules are broken Qedit displays an appropriate error message Justifying Lines in Visual Mode Justification in text alignment is available in full screen mode To justify a block of text simply mark the first and last lines in the block with the JJ indicator If Qedit uses any justify default settings they are defined by the Set Justi
255. lowed This error often stops an Add command Com Name The first character of a line or after a semi colon is not a valid command Empty The external file you have referenced does not contain any lines EOF In Caused by an end of file on stdin e g pressing Control E This error always terminates Qedit Equals Equals sign is missing from the command Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Troubleshooting and Error Messages 257 Extra Fclose Fcontrol Fgetinfo Filename Fopen Fread Freaddir Full Fwrite Fwritedir In Use Language is now XXX Linenum LP Open Modify No Line 258 Troubleshooting and Error Messages example Add 5 FILE most are optional A command is followed by extra characters when it should be ended example A 500 Unable to close a new workfile or Keep file Unable to perform a control operation such as logical rewind on a file Unable to get file status An invalid file name has been specified e g K 123 Unable to open a file Most common reasons are no such file and bad file name example L ABC1234567 Unable to read sequentially from an external file There is no good reason for this error that we are aware of Unable to read a block from a workfile Almost always indicates a broken Qedit workfile The current workfile is full and the last line added is lost You are either out of disc space or your file has 6
256. lse can edit the file while you have it open For example you cannot obtain write access if someone else already has write access to the file In Visual mode you may see the error Unable to reopen file with write access Concurrent usage backup If Error File open by another Qedit Process appears when you try to open a file it means that someone else is editing the file If you are working in Visual mode someone can delete the lines you want to edit after Qedit has displayed them on your screen If this happens Qedit does not update your screen and displays this error message File has changed since page last displayed Another user Crash Recovery Qedit ensures the validity of workfiles after a system crash or program termination It checks to see whether the file was properly closed the last time If the file was in the midst of Renumber Qedit completes the renumber If the file was in the middle of a Text Qedit clears the file so you can do the Text over again In all other cases Qedit prints a RECOVERY warning and searches through the file to eliminate any duplicate lines After a RECOVERY examine the area of lines that you were last editing A few lines may be missing or out of date but that is all File Modification Timestamp When you use the Text or Keep commands on a file Qedit stores the file s modification timestamp in the workfile If you Shut the workfile to do something else the next time you Open it Qedit
257. lutions Technology Inc Tools for HP3000 Output lines Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit Commands 127 128 Qedit Commands Robelle Solutions Technology Inc Tools for HP3000 Centering Lines Justify Center adjusts each rangelist line so that it is centered between the left edge and the right edge For example justify center margin 50 rangelist Input lines Robelle Solutions Technology Inc Tools for HP3000 Output lines Robelle Solutions Technology Inc Tools for HP3000 Left Justifying Lines Justify Left removes leading spaces from each rangelist line until the left most nonblank character is at the left edge This will left justify the lines Use for this option to recover from an inadvertent Center or Right option For example justify left rangelist Input lines Robelle Solutions Technology Inc Tools for HP3000 Output lines Robelle Solutions Technology Inc Tools for HP3000 Filling Words into Tidy Paragraphs Justify Format adjusts the processed lines so that the words fill the space between the left edge and the right edge but allows the right edge to be ragged justify format margin 50 rangelist Input lines The Format keyword performs a function which is equivalent to ad 1 left justify in nroff and troff Uneven lines are converted into lines of about the same length Output lines The Format keyword performs a function which is equivalent to ad 1 left jus
258. ly stripped of their comments Of course when you Keep your file only the data within the new margins are kept Qedit Commands 197 198 Qedit Commands Left Set Left n Default first column Set Left specifies a temporary left margin for your file Existing data to the left of the margin is not changed unless you delete a line When you copy or move a line with Add the entire line is moved If you add new lines they will contain spaces to the left of the margin Set Left applies to all Qedit commands including Visual Modify List and Keep Don t forget to reset Set Left when you want to Keep a file Set Left resets the Set Window columns for string searches See also Set Right Length Set Length nn Initially from file TEXTed Most files have a fixed record length determined by the Language setting e g SPL COBOL etc Workfiles with Language Text or Data can have their maximum line length set to a custom value Text defaults to 256 but can be set to any value between and 256 columns Data defaults to 256 as well but can be set to lengths of up to 8 172 Set Length will reset the Set Left Right margins and the Set Window columns for string searches When you reduce the Length you should treat data beyond the new Length as gone unless you immediately reset the Length As soon as you begin modifying lines Qedit begins reducing lines to their new maximum length If you wish to reduce the line len
259. mand ME Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Merges an external file into the current workfile by line number Use Merge to apply source code changes files containing new and revised text that are distributed by some application vendors MERGE filename rangelist Q no display J Justified Default rangelist ALL MergeQ suppresses printing of the merged lines The optional rangelist specifies a subset of the external file to merge into the current file Examples text master srce start with the master file merge changes update changed lines add new Notes To make your own merge file create a file that contains edits to be applied to your current workfile Mark the lines of text that will replace existing lines in your workfile with the corresponding line numbers Give new line numbers to any completely new lines of text to be added to your workfile Edit Void removes the line number specified in the command and optionally lines up to and including a Void line number Warning the Void parameter cannot accept a decimal point so for example you must enter Qedit line 60 1 as 60100 To delete from line 55 to 60 1 you would use the following Justified The default is to replace existing lines with the corresponding line from the external file The Justified option appends the corresponding line from the external file Text is appended immediately after the last non blank character if Set Work Trailingspaces is d
260. mand 170 Proc error 254 Prompt Set 199 Purge command 112 Q Q command 171 qaccess archive library 2 qcat 2 67 Qcterm 14 Qcterm version 64 QEDCURWFILE variable 66 Qedhint Help Robelle 187 Qedit workfile formats 259 Qedit file formats 259 Qedit version number 260 Qeditmgr files 53 59 140 179 QEDITMGRTRACE variable 66 QEDPROMPTEDPWD variable 66 QEDSTOREDPWD variable 66 QJ Set List option 142 qscreen recovery using 256 quick help 123 Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Quiet mode reset in Visual 215 Quiet option 282 quote characters 26 quotes alternate 99 quotes means string 295 Qzmodify 158 Set Modify 197 R Range 81 definition of 282 Range error 254 rangelist 41 definition of 282 overlapping lines 283 rangelist in Justify command 126 RCRTMODEL variable 61 RCRTSTRAPSGH variable 65 RCRTWIDTH variable 64 read only access 166 233 Record mode List option 137 143 recovery from Reflection exit 78 recovery of workfile 168 recovery using qscreen 256 Recovery warning 254 Redo Set 200 Redo command 172 Reflect command 78 174 Reflection 14 Reflection and LaserJets 143 Reflection commands in Qedit 78 174 Reflection for Windows 143 Reflection Force 80 Columns 220 Reflection keystrokes 16 17 Reflection version 64 refresh line 43 refresh the screen 28 regexp 287 anchors 266 backreferences 271 character class 267 character range 268 escape 269 escaped replacement 272 escaped sequences 270
261. mestamp can change for a number of reasons Here are few examples e Someone else might have been working on that same file with Qedit and saved their changes before you did e The file could have been restored e Maybe you used the file to test a program which modified the file in some way Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Because the timestamp message is just a warning Qedit continues its processing It then asks for Keep confirmation If you answer Yes the file will be purged and you might lose someone else s changes Qedit will also store the new modification timestamp If you answer No you should compare the contents of the file with your workfile and decide if it is safe to Keep your changes This is one way to compare the files e Keep the workfile under a different name e Use our Compare bonus program to display the differences between the original file and the new version you just created e Look at the report and separate the lines that you changed from the ones you did not touch e Ifneeded apply changes to your copy so you are not missing anything important By default timestamp checking on Keep is enabled If you want to change this setting use the Set Keep Checktimestamp command If you want to erase the saved timestamp you can use the Set Keep Name command Newline Delimiters Normally lines in a UNIX file are terminated by a NewLine character Even the last line
262. mns overlap partially or completely the results might not be as expected Keep in mind that e source and destination columns are always based on the original line e the source columns are removed e the destination columns are removed e the source columns are put in their place Here is an example list 1 1 abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz colm 6 20 15 1 abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 1 line changed Apparently nothing has changed but in fact something did happen to the line Qedit removed the source columns fghijklmnopqrst and tried to insert the original text where column 15 used to be Column 15 was part of the area that has been removed so Qedit inserts the text where it should have been i e between e and u So it s putting the original text back where it was Moving Passed the Right Margin Destination columns can exceed the current right margin In this case Qedit assumes the columns should be moved to the end of the line Effectively the source columns are inserted in the rightmost columns of the line The destination columns do not have to be a precise value They just need to be larger than the current right margin If the right margin is currently set at 80 the following commands yield the same results 108 Qedit Commands Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual v right Set Right 50 1t2 tiie teas lOve tee 20S ea tenes BOk age 40x eke wD 2 abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz colm 1 5
263. n 76 columns for text on Reflection Qcterm a 2393 97 2626 or 700 9x terminals 14 Getting a Quick Start with HP Full Screen Editing Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Special Indicator Columns Qedit leaves columns 3 and 4 of the text lines for you to enter cut and paste operators i e MM CC HH etc Also Qedit may print one of two special indicators in these columns line extends beyond the visible right margin line contains control characters shown as dots An means the line extends beyond the right terminal margin To shift the screen image left type Set Left 55 at the Visual home line and press F7 A means the line contains nonprinting characters such as Nulls Escapes Bells Tabs or possibly Roman 8 extended characters Qedit replaces these characters with dots in Visual mode and does not allow you to make changes These lines are not updated when you press Enter To edit Bells Escape sequences Tabs ShiftOuts and ShiftIns in Visual use Set Vis Bell Set Vis Esc Set Vis Tab Set Vis SO and Set Vis SI All these specify substitute characters to be shown instead of dots To edit other control codes use Modify or Change from the gt line If you turn Set Editinput Extend Off Qedit regards Roman 8 characters as nonprinting noise and show them as dots Using Your Keyboard Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual In Visual mode the keyboard gives you the power to move around the screen edit text a
264. n Visual Examples zz 5 10 change prog program zz find procedure open up ZZ mark start of block find end open pattern up ZZ mark end of block keep savefile zz save block in a file verify zz check current range Jaz OLE cancel current range Notes The marked range is adjusted for Renum operations Use Verify ZZ or List ZZ to check the currently marked range ZZ is also valid as a cut and paste operator in Visual mode Using a string range on a Find command automatically updates the ZZ marker For example V Zz ZZ OFF find start end Lines 5 11 saved in ZZ V ZZ ZZ 5 11 Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Calculator Command Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual The calculator evaluates an expression and prints the result expression 0 D B H A Any command that begins with an equal sign is treated as an expression to be evaluated An expression consists of numbers and operators followed by an optional display format The operators can be addition subtraction multiplication division or exponentiation The value of the expression is printed immediately on Stdlist add two numbers together multiply the same numbers subtraction divide print precise result L 33333333333 20 raised to the 15th power 327680000000E 20 Order of Evaluation Unlike most programming languages the calculator always evaluates th
265. n about the passwords included in the request Qedit updates two variables with the information QEDSTOREDPWD and QEDPROMPTEDPWD The first variable indicates which passwords are stored with the connection The second variable indicates which passwords are prompted for Values for these variables only have one character the letter U representing the user password Since there is only one password the letter can only appear in one The other variable in this case is not created at all For example if the password is stored with the 66 Running Qedit under HP UX Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual connection QEDSTOREPWD will have a value of U and QEDPROMPTEDPWD will not exist at all This gives you the ability to reference these variables from within a shell script ROBELLE Environment Variable Qedit looks for the files it needs in the robelle directory Normally Qedit is installed in opt robelle For example the Qedit server expects to find its log files in a subdirectory called log qedit It would expect to find the error log file in opt robelle log qedit error log which is the default full path name of the error log If you install Qedit in a directory other than opt robelle Qedit should be able to determine the new location and adjust the path for its support files e g online help for host based Qedit log files for the server If Qedit is unable to correctly determine its current location it is going to revert back to
266. n batch use of Qedit Qedit Commands 211 Warning The trailing comments limitation is an incompatibility with older versions 212 Qedit Commands Set Undo allows you to override that default or even disable Undo around some very large editing tasks to speed it up Varsub Set Varsub ON OFF Default Off When this option is enabled Qedit parses entered commands looking for variable names If a variable name is found and currently exists its value is substituted before the command is executed If the variable does not exist the variable name is left unchanged Qedit commands are added to the Redo stack before the substitution occurs i e with the variable name So if the variable value changes between the time the command is entered and the time it is retrieved from the stack the results may be different It s also important to note that commands related to Redo stack operations such as Listredo Do Before can not have trailing comments enclosed in curly braces anymore The comments are not removed and likely cause a syntax error listredo see which commands I have entered so far Bad option expecting UNN ABS REL or OUT listredo 1 t testisql 2 1 Smyvar s varsub on 1 Smyvar setvar myvar qed 1 Smyvar LISTREDO SEE WHICH COMMANDS I HAVE ENTERED SO FAR 3 4 5 6 7 Variable names are identified by a leading dollar sign For example SHOME is replaced with the cu
267. n enforce this for all users by putting Set Lang Cobolx All On into your Qeditmgr file Tag format The Set X command allows several formats for the date tag plus the ability to replace precede or follow the date with a short string Once you have configured your X tag Qedit will automatically mark all changed lines in COBOLX files with that tag in columns 73 to 80 The dateform parameter can be any of these options Keyword Sample DATE 22 NOV99 DDMMMYY 22 Nov99 CCYYMMDD 19991122 YYMMDD 991122 MMDDYY 112299 DDMMYY 221199 DDMMMYY and CCYYMMDD occupy 8 characters but YYMMDD MMDDYY and DDMMYY occupy only 6 Therefore the last three can be combined with a string giving your initials before or after today s date set x rg yymmdd tag is rg991122 Null vs Blanks Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Entering Set X without parameters Set X Null or Set X effectively turns off the tagging feature Tags on modified lines are not changed Lines without tags do not get one Lines that already have tags retain their current values This is different from setting the value to blanks as in Set X With this setting tags on modified lines are actually cleared List The List option tells whether the comment tag should be shown during normal editing and listing of lines The default value is ON but you can disable listing with S X List OFF Even though the comment tag is not listed it
268. n file Fog Lee A LOLS shift lines 10 15 left 2 spaces fee 1 Ho LOY LS shift lines 10 15 right 3 spaces feo 1178 els shift columns 1 8 right 1 space don t change text beyond column 8 change 12 12 delete column 12 in the current line Notes See the discussion of windows under Changing Strings Those notes also apply to column changes The first column number is usually 1 except for standard COBOL source files where it is 7 seven The last column number depends on the current values for Set Language Set Length and Set Right Change prints each line modified unless you use CQ CJ asks you to verify each change 102 Qedit Commands Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Close Command CL Shut the current work file and remove it from the recently accessed file list CLose Default none The Shut command is the normal way to close a workfile When you Shut a file or Open another one Qedit remembers the name of the current workfile in a list of recently accessed files This allows you to reopen the file using open However the list is of limited size If you are not coming back to edit the current file again use the Close command instead of Shut This keeps other file names from falling off the bottom of the list Examples open abc open def close close def and forget it open current file is now abc Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit Commands 103 Colcopy Command COL
269. n some fashion list all lines in a file help list all information about List 1 Cu pattern all strings starting with Cu The abbreviation for all lines is by default but can be changed with the Set Zip command amp Means Literal Match Ampersand amp in a pattern match string means to match the next character literally even if it is an or other character with pattern meaning list amp pat all lines starting with Means Shell Commands or String met Colon at the start of a command line indicates a shell script or command Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit Glossary 299 300 Qedit Glossary who show users logged on Colon is also a valid string delimiter list barbara J Means Multiple Commands Semicolon combines two or more Qedit commands on a single line list 5 10 add 5 5 Entering several semicolons displays forward several lines When combining Qedit commands be sure to use the same quote character in all of them Incorrect JCT T DISPLAY c 4 Correct c7 7 DISPLAY c If you want to include HP UX commands in the list and their syntax requires semicolons Qedit might not be able to parse the list correctly To work around this problem you can put parentheses around the whole command For example list 5 find name testfile exec cat fails list 5 find name testfile exec cat
270. n you enter lines in Add Modify or Replace Qedit looks for and interprets tab keys Each time Qedit finds a tab it fills the input line with blanks to the next tab position The default positions are every eight columns If there are no more positions Qedit terminates the current line and saves the remaining text for the next line Using Set Tabs you can define the logical tab key to be any nonprinting control code such as BELL G decimal 7 or a printing character such as tilde Control I is the default because it is the character most commonly used as the hardware TAB key on terminals All HP terminals generate a Control I when TAB is pressed set tabs i Set Tabs Hp Off tells Qedit not to set physical tab stops on your terminal for example it does not work on 2640 or non HP terminals With Set Tab Hp On the default Qedit will update your terminal s tab stops at once With Hp On each time you switch from Add to AQ Qedit Commands 207 208 Qedit Commands or any similar change that would shift the tabs left or right on the screen Qedit also resets the tab stops When using the TAB Key remember that you must not backspace past the last tab stop If you do Qedit will never see the TAB key Set Tabs STOP columns NULL nn nn nn nn Default every 8 columns NULL means no tabs By default Qedit sets the tab stops every 10 columns MPE or 8 columns HP UX You can override this with Set Tabs NULL to
271. nData lt tab gt DL size Set DL size Default 132 Initially 132 This option does not apply to Qedit UX It is still accepted for compatibility with the MPE version of Qedit Editinput Set Editinput option value Data ON OFF Command ON OFF Extend ON OFF Asian ON OFF Initially Data OFF Command OFF Extend ON Asian ON Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit Commands 187 188 Qedit Commands Normally Qedit accepts whatever you type as being valid However if you are connected to the computer via a phone line you will probably find that strange nonprinting characters are getting into your files These are generated by line noise You can use Set Editinput Data or Set Editinput Command to tell Qedit to remove nonprinting characters from your input However nonprinting characters include useful characters such as BELL and ESC You can explicitly insert nonprinting characters into your text using Set Decimal and Change or using the WP or W function of Set Mod Qzmod Set Editinput Data ON removes noise from text added to your file in Line mode it has no effect on Visual mode Set Editinput Command ON removes noise from commands If you don t want to edit Roman 8 characters in either Line or Visual mode use Set Editinput Extend OFF This tells Qedit to discard the Roman 8 characters as noise rather than allow them through as valid characters The default setting is ON for the benefit of European users
272. nd Tabs Term Totals UDC Undo Visual Warnings Whichcomp Window Work Wraparound X Zip Left margin for edit list keep default 1 Maximum characters per line for a Lang Text file Default Lib for the Run command Restricting features of Qedit available to user Format of LP listings also LJ options Type of modify Robelle HP or Qzmodify Default modes for Open Command Defer etc Switch back to old pattern matching Switch Qedit execution to a new MPE subqueue Replace with new prompt string Right margin for edit list keep etc Default RL value for the Prep command Configure how to up and down shift Configure how spell checks lines and words Print CPU and wall time of each command Whether to suspend on Exit or not Set tab key and columns set on terminal Adjust number of terminal display columns Print number of lines processed by a command Recognize User Defined Commands in Qedit Disable enable ability to undo changes Full screen options save fkeys update etc Print warning messages or not Which COBOL compiler etc Rules for string search columns upshift etc Default size function of workfiles Move words to next line when long line Added Tag changed lines in COBOL file with string Configure auto modify first last all etc To configure Qedit to operate as you like best put your favorite Set commands in a file named opt robelle qeditmgr These commands will apply
273. nd control the flow of Qedit Moving the Cursor You move around the screen using the cursor keys and others Cursor Left Move one space to left Backspace Move one space to left Cursor Right Move one space to right Cursor Up Move one space up Cursor Down Move one space down Return Down to next line back to column 5 Home Up Move to gt line Shift Home Move to bottom of screen Tab Move to next right Set TAB column Shift Tab Move to next left Set TAB column Getting a Quick Start with HP Full Screen Editing 15 Prev Page Only moves around terminal memory Next Page Only moves around terminal memory Editing the Text Lines You revise the screen image using these keys Space bar Move cursor right and erase character any char Overwrite cursor and move it right Del Char Remove character at current cursor Ins Char Enable insert use again to disable Ins Line Insert blank line above current line Del Line Delete line at current cursor Clear Line Erase to the end of the line Clear Display Avoid Recovery Home Up F7 To save the changes you have made on the screen Enter Send screen image to Qedit update file Control Functions To return from Visual mode to Line mode F8 exit from Visual Some other keys Select Useless in Qedit Stop Do not use in Visual Break Disabled in Visual Reset Use if screen locks up press Enter Esc First key of Escape sequences Del Does not delete anything 16 Getting a
274. ne 100 The rangelist tells Change what lines to search for string The default rangelist is the current line only If string2 is shorter than string e g change Robert Bob Qedit shortens the line by shifting the rest of the line left If string2 is longer e g change Bob Robert Qedit lengthens the line by shifting characters right If string2 is so much longer that the line would be too long Qedit sends you into the Modify command to fix the line by hand Change prints each line that it updates unless you use CQ Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Examples list 55 display line with mistake 55 select lines contaning both of two change contan contain change string in current line 55 select lines containing both of two change sub subindex all make a global change 10 subindex subindex 1 11 table subindex 0 213 if subindexway 0 oops bad change cj cust Customer 200 300 change with user approval 229 Display Customer shown for approval Change okay Y N or Modify No yes list 9 display line to review 9 The test results were very exciting wu c very remove word change to null string 9 The test results were exciting find wiith search forward for line with error 99 the string is combined wiith the second string yo with change wiith to with 99 the string is combined with the second string Using Alternates to Qu
275. next step you can use the fe command to recall commands It has a fairly simple set of arguments You can also create your own set of commands using aliases A typical set of commands would include alias listredo fc 1 alias redo fc alias xeq fc e NOTE You cannot use do because it is a shell reserved keyword The xeq command is used instead The listredo command simply lists the most recent commands in the history stack Its default no argument setting lists the last 16 commands When you use one line number as the argument listredo lists all the commands from the specified line on When you enter a few characters as the argument the list starts with the last command that has these characters 58 Running Qedit under HP UX Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual listredo 100 list all commands starting with number 100 listredo c list all commands starting with a c With two line numbers listredo lists all commands between these two lines listredo 100 105 list commands 100 to 105 The redo command recalls one or more commands and allows you to modify them before executing them It uses similar syntax to listredo If you do not specify an argument redo recalls the last command you have entered If you specify a command number it recalls that particular entry If you enter a string it recalls the most recent command starting with that string If you enter 2 numbers it recalls all the commands between
276. ng a Quick Start with HP Full Screen Editing 21 Second find the end of the text section and mark the last line with another CC After you press Enter you should see the entire block highlighted Third go to the screen where you want to insert a copy of the text Move the cursor down to the line before the desired insertion point Cursor Left once and type A for after Press Enter and the block should appear Paste Multiple Copies at Once When working with a block of text you can use the same cut and paste codes to mark the beginning and the end of the block i e HH on the first line of the block and HH again on the last line The only exception to this is the block replication code In this case you would use RR to mark the beginning of the block and Rn to mark the end of the block where n represents the number of times you want that block replicated For example to have the same block replicated five times you would enter R5 The new blocks are inserted immediately after the last line of the copied block The original lines marked for replication are written to the Hold0 file Cut and Paste Between Files Using Visual mode s cut and paste functions you can copy and move blocks of text between files You can only edit one file at a time in Qedit but you can switch quickly between different Qedit files by Opening and Shutting them 20 implicitly shuts filel 48 open the last file that was shut 20 o
277. ngdelimiters and you enter a tilde at the Next command prompt Qedit uses the current line number associated with the tilde makes it the current line and goes back into Visual immediately 26 Getting a Quick Start with HP Full Screen Editing Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Finding Strings To search for a string simply type it in quotes at the gt line and press F7 or Enter gt string F7 Qedit will find the next line containing that string display the page around it and show the target string in the Status line To find the next occurrence of the same string press F4 To find the previous occurrence of a string prefix the string with a circumflex gt string F7 To find the next previous occurrence press F3 You may delimit strings with any of the following characters Tilde Vertical line Up line Quotation mark Apostrophe Single quote Colon oe Percent sign oo Reverse slant Backslash You may use single quotes if you do not have Set Decimal On Note that with this syntax Qedit permits a few less characters in Visual mode than it does in Line mode because Visual mode uses these characters for other purposes For example the question mark is used to get quick help about Visual mode instead of as a string delimiter If you insist on using other delimiters you should use the Find command on the gt line gt F string F7 Changing St
278. nores Spage too To perform continuous printing with no automatic page ejects but skip to a new page on Page directives use lines 999 list Slp lines 999 all skips to a new page on Spage only To drop the file name from the page heading do Set List Name Off Assumes Set List Page On set list page on name off To drop the page numbers from each page do Set List Num Off Assumes Set List Page On set list page on name off num off To drop the title from the heading do Set List Title Off Assumes Set List Page On set list page on title off To drop the two line heading from each page while still doing page breaks use Set List to disable the three components of the heading set list page on name off num off title off Getting an Even or Odd Number of Pages There are times when the number of printed pages is important For example you could have a printer that is always loaded with pre printed forms that come in pairs e g Page 1 of 2 and Page 2 of 2 or the paper is folded in certain ways so that a report is easier to tear up and insert into a binder In both examples sending a report with an odd number of pages would cause the next output to be on a wrong page To prevent this from happening you can now use the even or odd options on the List command and ask Qedit to round up the number of pages The even option ensures that the output has an even number of pages Similarly the odd option ensures th
279. not special In COBOL the hyphen is not Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual special In Pascal the underline is not special In FORTRAN embedded spaces are allowed When you specify Nomatch Qedit selects the lines that do not contain the string The default of course is MATCH to select lines that do contain the string With the Upshift window keyword Qedit ignores the case of letters in deciding whether to find a match Pattern means that the string in the window is to be treated as a pattern to be matched i e WUPD MASTER It may be combined with Upshift Regexp means that the string in the window is to be treated as a regular expression to be matched i e UPD MASTER It may be combined with Upshift Here are some example uses of windows list begin 1 10 upshift begin in 1st 10 cols list begin end pattern upshift begin end list begin end regexp noup begin end A window can be specified permanently with the Set Window command or temporarily after any string in a rangelist For example set window smart use Smart for all string searches list sum defaults to Smart searching 1 Sam upshift upshift in this command only Workfile Qedit manipulates a collection of text lines that is called a workfile The workfile is a compact disc file with a permanent name that you can edit Use New or Text to build them The scratch file is a special workfile tha
280. nreq ON Running Qedit under HP UX 57 Shell commands are executed by a child copy of your shell Child shells cannot change environment variables in the parent s environment To change the value of an environment variable you must first exit Qedit Shell Command History If you use the POSIX or Korn shell you have access to a shell command history function By default the shell saves the last 128 commands you have entered The default name is sh_history and is located in your home directory If you want to use a different file name change the HISTFILE environment variable If you want to change the number of commands saved change the value of the HISTSIZE variable Normally you recall commands from the history stack by using the fc command This command calls up the default shell editor that works like the vi editor You can instruct the shell to use Qedit UX as your command line editor instead The first step which is probably the most important one is setting the FCEDIT variable This variable specifies which editor you want to use to modify the commands The default editor is bin ed To change the editor use FCEDIT qedit c m k yes e export FCEDIT The export command is not mandatory but it is good practice to include this command in case you start up another shell process Also note that the quotes are very important You begin with single quotes and enclose the Qedit UX commands in double quotes In the
281. ns of Reflection for Windows e All versions of Reflection for Macintosh Debugging PC Errors If the Reflect command fails Qedit will display the Reflection error code For an explanation of Reflection error codes refer to the Reflection Command Language reference manual Using Line Mode Some Reflection command files work fine when executed from the Alt Y command line but fail possibly leaving your terminal in a locked state when invoked with Qedit s Reflect command The reason is that Qedit s Reflect command sends an escape code to Reflection to invoke the command Then Qedit waits for Reflection to send back a status code to indicate when the command is finished While Qedit is waiting for the result code from Reflection it isn t capable of executing other Qedit commands it s already executing a Qedit command The only thing that Qedit is capable of doing while it s waiting is to execute any shell commands that Reflection might send to the HP 9000 The reason shell commands must be accepted is that Reflection sends a command to run unxlink2 whenever a file transfer is requested Qedit Commands 177 As long as the command or command file doesn t attempt to transmit any data to the HP 9000 Reflect will probably work the same way as Alt Y For example here is a Reflection command file that works from Alt Y but not from Reflect EXIT RCL This command file gets me out of Qedit logs me off the HP 9000 and e
282. nsive set of commands all of which are invoked via control characters In this documentation the symbol means that the following character is a control character e g G is control G Control characters may be entered as lowercase or uppercase letters i e g and G are identical HP UX reacts to certain control characters which might conflict with the Qzmodify codes For example control D sends an end of file signal to HP UX but is also the delete character in Qzmodify You should use the HP UX stty program to change the default end of file signal Please see the section Control Characters and stty on page 53 for more details Char Mnemonic Description A append Go to end of line Moves the cursor to just after the last character on the line If the line is already at the maximum length the cursor is placed at the last character B before Turn on Insert mode Turns off Overwrite mode If you enter a character while in Insert mode it will be put Before the character the cursor is on and the rest of the line will move one to the right before Control up arrow synonym of B Use instead of B if you are on a system console C case Change case of current character If the current character is a lowercase letter it will be changed to an uppercase letter and vice versa D delete Delete character Pressing D will cause the character under the cursor to be deleted and the rest of the line to be moved one space
283. nted as dots so that you can see them Use Set Modify Hpmodify to select these MPE style edits for all commands If you prefer the Qedit style edits use Set Modify Robelle to select Qedit editing for all commands including Redo If you Qedit Commands 175 176 Qedit Commands prefer Qzmodify use Set Modify Qzmodify to select Qzmodify editing for all commands Persistent Redo Redo commands can be saved in a permanent file and can therefore be used from another session You can use the Set Redo command to specify a file name to save your redo commands Please see the Set Redo command for details Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Reflect Command REFLECT Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Executes a Reflection command on your PC Qedit checks whether the command succeeds or fails Reflect allows you to control a PC from within your Qedit Usefiles and shell scripts send and receive files backup your PC execute PC programs etc REFLECT reflection command Defaults none Examples reflect type mreport crt reflect shell lotus Version of Reflection The Reflect command depends on Reflection s ability to accept commands using an escape sequence and to be able to pass back a status code indicating whether the command succeeded These features are implemented in the following versions of Reflection e Reflection 1 for DOS version 1 40 or later e Reflection 3 7 for DOS version 1 55 or later e All versio
284. o a scratch file Open filename Browse opens a workfile for browsing in Qedit You can use the List command including List Jumping Hold Visual mode HH and ZZ and any other functions of Qedit which do not modify the file Open Browse protects you from making unplanned changes to a file If you try to Keep the file with its original name i e you enter a Keep without a filename you will get an error Open workfile browse Verify Keep Set Keep Name txtfile K File opened with Browse please specify a Keep file name You can still force a Keep by specifying an explicit filename as in Open workfile browse Keep txtfile TXTFILE DATA ACCT OLD 80B FA of records 16 Purge existing file no y Open filename Defer opens the workfile without write access but acquires write access later if you attempt to modify the file Set Open Defer On makes Defer the default and Open filename Nodefer overrides that command It is important to remember that certain workfile attributes and settings are normally saved when the file is opened with write access Some of these settings are the ZZ marker the current line marker and a new default Keep name modified with Set Keep Name If you open a workfile in Browse mode these settings are not updated unless the file is re opened with write access Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit Commands 169 170 Qedit Commands To reopen the file most recently accessed do open
285. o stack however you might start running into concurrency problems A persistent redo stack can be used only by one Qedit instance at a time If you try to use a persistent redo stack that is already in use you will get the following message Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Set Redo Myredo The redo file is already in use Unable to open file for REDO stack In this situation Qedit continues to use the redo stack active at the time and lets you continue working as normal Suprtool STExport and Suprlink also have the ability to have permanent redo stacks It is advisable to have separate redo stacks for each product because they will write commands to each other s redo stack if you supply the same file name For example if you use the command set redo myredo you will have a redo stack called Myredo for your Qedit commands If you exit Qedit and run Suprtool and supply the same Set Redo command your Suprtool commands will be written to the same file that is used for your Qedit commands This command is ignored if Qedit is run in server mode Right Set Right 7 Default same as Set Length Initially same as Set Length Set Right fixes a right margin for listing and editing lines in your workfile Any existing data to the right of the margin is retained unchanged while you edit to the left of the margin Set Right also resets the Set Window columns See Set Left for setting the other mar
286. ode 15 290 means shell script 290 in Visual mode 15 means alphanumeric pattern 288 means optional regexp 288 means any character regexp 290 means reset Visual cut and paste 21 dot dot dot 3 means command 296 means parameter 296 means subpattern regexp 296 means command 296 means parameter 296 means subpattern regexp 296 means character class regexp 292 means FIRST or default 292 default 4 292 Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual means end class regexp 292 means LAST 292 braces for comments 84 293 means ALL 293 x current file 112 291 current line 290 means refresh the screen 28 means repeating regexp 291 l prompt and range delimiter 292 to exit from Visual 19 ends line input 85 amp amp ampersand in patterns 222 293 means numeric 297 octal number 290 A circumflex 42 43 289 means control character regexp 289 means negate regexp 289 means start of line regexp 289 means ahead some lines or add 296 means repeating regexp 297 lt lt means move 295 Index 307 means copy 294 gt commands 26 gt gt means forward page 295 tilde blank pattern 111 222 281 297 field separator 22 23 213 most recent screen 297 memory lock 288 previous file 112 136 141 288 means end of line regexp
287. of display memory This information is used to enhance the functioning of Qzmodify Visual Help and List Qedit locks the keyboard during terminal identification and discards any user input that manages to get through However if you have Reflection typeahead enabled Qedit cannot lock the keyboard be careful not to type during terminal identification in this case Qedit sets three variables to remember your terminal state RCRTMODEL RPCVERSION and RCRTWIDTH If you run Qedit and these variables are already set Qedit does not need to do the status requests of your terminal To reset these variables and force Qedit to 60 Running Qedit under HP UX Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual re identify the terminal use the Set Visual Stop command You can set a fourth variable RCRTSTRAPSGH to request nondefault handshaking in Line mode The fifth variable RLABELDEFAULT is described under Function Key Label Setting Variables in Your Shell You must set and export environment variables before you invoke Qedit The syntax for setting environment variables depends on which shell you are using Bourne sh and Korn ksh shells Sexport RCRTMODEL 2 In some versions of the POSIX shell you might have to split the previous command in two SRCRTMODEL 2 Sexport RCRTMODEL C shell csh Ssetenv RCRTMODEL 2 Remember to always type the variable name in uppercase letters The Bourne and Korn shells do no
288. of the file has to be terminated For cases in which the last NewLine character is missing Qedit is still able to read all the lines However if the file is saved back Qedit adds a NewLine terminator This makes the new file a little different than the original even if you have not made any changes to it By default Qedit inserts a Newline delimiter after each line If you do not want Newline terminators use the NOLF option The only Newline characters written to the file are the ones included in the data Using the Length option on the Text command disables the LF Keep feature Set Keep LF Off If you wish to override this you can use the LF option Notes When you Text a file and Keep it again Qedit attempts to duplicate the original file The form of the Keep file depends upon the current language and Set options especially Set Keep To see what the Keep file will look like use Verify Keep Keep will retain the security of your existing file i e the file s ACL if you answer Yes to the Purge old question Qedit Commands 135 List Command L Prints lines of the current workfile or an external file either on your screen or to a printer device LIST Soption rangelist Default rangelist LIST option filename UNN rangelist Default rangelist ALL Q no linenums T template J jumping If you do not specify a filename List displays lines of the current workfile If you do specify a fi
289. of what happens when you attempt to format a list of points without the Indent keyword justify both margin 50 rangelist Input lines Text which occurs in a list of points should also be formatted into even lines Any text to the left of column 5 causes a Justification break Output lines Text which occurs in a list of points should also be formatted into even lines 2 Any text to the left of column 5 causes a Justification break All of the points have been run together into a single point You can avoid this result by inserting a blank line at each point or by doing Justify on each point individually or by using the Indent keyword justify both margin 50 indent 4 rangelist Input lines Text which occurs in a list of points should also be formatted into even lines Any text to the left of column 5 causes a Justification break Text which occurs in a list of points should also be formatted into even lines Any text to the left of column 5 causes a Justification break Activating Indentation Withindent activates an Indent value that you have previously configured with Set Justify Indent Withindent allows you to settle on a single indentation for all lists of points without having to respecify that value on every Justify command You merely specify Withindent when you format a list of points set justify indent 4 configure potential indentation justify format 5 this is not a list o
290. ommand EFO EG renerne nie N ERE EEE EETA EAE ESE 120 Garbag Command GAR seve acs eee E EEEE e ENE AEE EEEE AEE EE EEE 121 Gl u Command G hirren a EE eee E A eee 122 Help Commiand H o Eaa es deve feet edits aes E E E 123 Hold Command HO knpn ii eee er ieee ee ke ete eee eevee 124 J stify Command J errre ne on sac rvecens E EEE Ea OE EEEE EEE A EE ESE 126 Keep Command IK iroa nenen EA A EE EA EE E OEE E EE E a eels E e 133 Last Comimiand E keee e e e e Svea E a eect N a a aE eni 136 Listredo Command LISTREDO F7 ra n e a E E A O eS eai 149 List ndo Command LISTU orenen eee cede ea E E E E E E E 150 ES Command LS rea a a Heavens wide ease ees aE E 151 Lsort Command LSO ere e E tekst R eet hed eee TETRA aie 152 Merse Command ME n E EAEE E E A T a a ta 153 Mo dify Command M J a eee EEE E E A a t a a 155 New Command N e n a e cg E E E a ew a e e 168 Open Command OJ eir EE ETE E E e E a aT E aT 169 Proc Command E Poeun a i E a E E eee A a eT ee dt 173 Command Oy ne e delve E E arte se ea eee eee te 174 Redo Command REDO ninnaa a E E E E E a E a E E 175 Reflect Command REFLECT 0 cccccecccccccssscecssceceesececesaececeeeecessececesaeseseeesesueeesesaesesaees 177 Renumber Command REN c ccccsccecsssecessseecseeeceeseecseseesceeeeessececesseescneeeeeesesecesaeeseeeeens 179 R plac Command R o a EE EEE E OE E E E AE a aT ET 180 Set Command S era e E woe dev deen E E a tau ide a e a ts 181
291. ommands If these have been disabled with Set Disable Comp Codes YES you will find that your terminal hangs when Qedit attempts to execute a Reflection command just press Return to get out of this situation To avoid this situation you press Alt Y type Set Disable Comp Codes NO press Return then type Save and press Return again to save the new default to your configuration file Controlling the PC The Reflect command allows you to execute any Reflection PC command from within a Qedit usefile or shell script This allows you to do things like automatically download and upload files and run programs For more details see the Reflect command Accidental Exit from Reflection If you use Reflection for DOS and you press Alt X while in Visual mode some versions of Reflection allow you to recover Get back into Reflection Your usual method is okay unless you use a command file that performs other deeds such as logging you on A command file would send the logon commands to a puzzled Qedit session so use r1 at the DOS prompt instead Back in Reflection Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual again press Alt M for the Modes function keys Ensure that none of the labels on the display show an asterisk 1 e are activated except for the Remote Mode key Press Return or Enter Qedit accepts either one If you re back in your Visual mode session Qedit prints the status line with an error It might
292. one by one instead of reading the whole screen in a single operation Depending on the type of connection this process might take a few seconds as the cursor moves down the screen Otherwise it works the same as ordinary block mode Buf Set Visual Buf nnnn By default Qedit reads and writes a maximum of 10 000 characters per screen Set Vis Buf will increase or decrease the size of the screen buffer The minimum size is 2 000 characters and the maximum is 30 000 Increasing the buffer size may increase the load on your network watch for hangs delays and write errors Carry Set Visual Carry n Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit Commands 215 216 Qedit Commands Default 1 The F5 and F6 keys move the screen display Backward and Forward one page In doing this they carry over one line from the previous display for context You can vary the number of lines carried over from 0 to 9 with Set Vis Carry Cleardisplay Set Visual Cleardisplay OFF Default On This option tells Visual mode not to clear all of display memory before writing the next page of text Instead Visual erases enough lines at the start of display memory to make room for the Visual screen This means that a Home Down will still show you what was last done in Line mode and a Home Up will redisplay the Visual screen When you press Enter only the Visual screen is transferred up to the template line Do not use this option if you only have a coup
293. only except when the Justify option is used In this case Qedit prompts for confirmation before making the change It would be hard to determine if a line needs to be changed based only on the tag value So when the Justify option is used Qedit displays the complete line The user has the option to accept the changes reject the changes or manually modify the line If the user chooses to modify the line only the tag is displayed 106 Qedit Commands Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Colmove Command COLM Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Moves one or more columns to a different location on the same line COLMOVE source source2 destination destination2 rangelist Q no display J verify T CobX Tag Default rangelist Colmove moves text in columns specified by source and source to the destination columns specified by destination and destination2 in the lines of rangelist The source columns are removed from their original location Even though Colmove can modify multiple lines using a rangelist it really operates on one line at a time You can not move columns from one line to another Source and destination columns always represent the original location All changes are based on that assumption If source only is specified Qedit moves just that column length of 1 If destination only is specified the source columns are inserted at that location If you wish to replace a single column enter a destinat
294. ons Qedit always executes your cut and paste operation last after updating the file with any other changes no matter what order the changes were made in This means that you can choose to undo just the cut and paste operation or undo it and all of the other changes You can continue undoing your previous Qedit Commands 243 changes from each Enter one at a time until your file is back to its original state Notes An Undo cannot be undone except by Undo All The Undo change log is reset by a Text command but not a Keep by a Delete All or by shutting the file The Undo log is temporary and is not retained if you exit Qedit or log off the system You cannot go back and undo changes that you made to a file after you leave Qedit You can Undo any text altering commands since the last Text or Open command except for Delete All Delete All can be canceled before the next command line is executed using Control Y In the unlikely event that the undo log file 1 e undolog overflows Qedit will print a warning message and disable the Undo feature Undo is disabled in batch by default and active in session usage Using the Set Undo command you may override this default or disable Undo for a particularly large edit to save overhead set undo on set undo off 244 Qedit Commands Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Up Command UP F2 Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Starts browsing the current file by displaying one page
295. or Replace operation APPEND If text follows the gt this text is appended to the end of the current line If a gt without text is positioned beyond the end of the current line then a simple replacement is performed instead DELETE Deletes from the end of the current line right to left Multiple d s and Insert and Replace strings may be specified after gt REPLACE Replaces characters at the end of the command line The last rightmost character of the Qedit Commands 165 166 Qedit Commands other replacement string is at the end of the line CHANGE Changes all occurrences of one string to another in the current line starting at the c The search string and replace string must be properly delimited A proper delimiter is a nonalphabetic character such as or The substitution is specified as cdelim search string delim replace string delim Omitting the replace string causes occurrences of search string to be deleted with no substitution UNDO A single u in column one cancels the most recent edit of the current line Using the Undo command twice in a row cancels all edits for the current line and re establishes the original unedited line If u is placed anywhere other than column one of the current line then a simple replacement is performed Undo makes sense only if you have a line on which you have performed some editing that can be undone Simple replacement Any other character not 1 r d d gt
296. ort Command LSO Sorts a range of lines LSORT range KEYS keylist LSORT string range KEYS keylist Q no display Default by entire line The simplest Lsort command just specifies a range of lines to be sorted and no other parameters This means to use the entire line as the key and sort the lines into ascending order printing them once sorted To stop Lsort from printing the sorted lines use LsortQ The Lsort command can be abbreviated to Iso Isq quiet Ist template and Isj justify Is followed by a space executes the HP UX shell command Is followed by any other character is executed as a possible shell command Parameters To sort by some other key fields in the lines from one to four are supported or to sort the lines in Descending Order you need to specify the KEYS keylist parameters The keylist consists of one to four keys separated by spaces or commas with a key consisting of either a column range or a starting column and length column length DESC column column DESC Ascending Order is assumed by default but you may specify DESC to sort this key in Descending Order Examples lsort all sort entire file lsortq all sort without printing lsort 10 33 sort some lines only lsort 30 last keys 10 5 col 10 through 14 lsort zz keys 10 20 col 10 through 20 lsort 20 last keys 1 10 20 5 desc two keys 152 Qedit Commands Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Merge Com
297. ot be able to use the extra columns beyond 80 RPCVERSION Variable RPCVERSION contains information about the terminal emulator e g Reflection or Qcterm If you are not using a terminal emulator you can set RPCVERSION to 1 If you omit it or set it to 0 but you do set RCRTMODEL to 2 Qedit attempts to identify which if any version of the emulator you are using If you are using Reflection the version number has a direct impact on Qedit s behavior in full screen mode Qcterm s version currently does not have any impact If you always use the same version and emulator set RPCVERSION to the value determined by this chart wxyyy where for display width can be expanded for display width cannot be expanded for 132 column VGA in DOS Reflection for DOS Reflection for Macintosh Reflection for Windows Reflection for Qcterm yyy version number 420 4 20 For example R1 for DOS version 4 30 with a 132 column VGA adaptor would be 20430 You cannot do the Reflect command if Xyyy equals 150 or 200 This same value is shown in Verify Visual as Reflect 420 if it says Col 80 max this PC emulator was unable to make display memory wider RCRTWIDTH Variable Most HP terminals have 80 columns of display memory However 700 9x terminals can switch into 132 column mode and Reflection emulators can have as many columns of scrollable display memory as 64 Running Qedit under HP UX Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for H
298. ote You may select your own quote character if you find too much work because it is a shifted key Among the alternatives are and apostrophe See the Glossary for more on strings and other alternates to quotes c wiith with c wiith with Approving Each Changed Line Use CJ to give yourself approval over each change before it is updated With CJ Qedit displays the line as it would be and asks you for a Yes No or Modify answer Use CJ when you have trouble working out the precise strings to change Searching for Two Strings at Once Because the rangelist can contain a search string you can actually select lines containing both of two strings c xxx filename all xxx becomes filename in ALL c xxx filename rename line must contain rename too Including a Window The form of Change command just described requires only three quotes per command but does not allow all options You cannot specify a special window you will always use the default Set Window value To do a Change with a special window you must specify four quote characters two for each string CHANGE string1 window string2 rangelist Qedit Commands 99 100 Qedit Commands Each string is delimited by two quote characters and the two strings must be separated by a space or a comma Between the two strings you may insert a window such as SMART or 20 30 or UPSHIFT Changing Within a Column Range If you insert
299. other control code HP UX reacts to certain control characters which might conflict with the modify codes For example control D sends an end of file signal to HP UX but is also the delete character in modify You should use the HP UX stty program to change the default end of file signal Please see the section Control Characters and stty on page 53 for more details Erasing the Line To erase from the current column to the end of the line enter the Delete control code followed by a Return If you do this by mistake the Goof control code restores the line for you Inserting Characters To insert characters in the line before the current column position enter the Before control code Control B Then type the characters to be inserted The existing characters starting in the insert column are right shifted to make room for the new characters On the operator s console of Seried 800 compputers the Control B character puts the terminal into maintenance mode In these cases use Control instead If you do press Control B on the console accidentally type CO on a Series 800 or 900 Adding Characters to the End of a Line To add characters to the end of the line after the last nonblank character in the line enter the Append control code Control A Then type the characters to be added This function is independent of the current column position Dividing a Line into Two Lines The Divide control code Control V splits the
300. ou could have entered the digits in reverse order or in random order and the character class would still be valid It is just harder to verify that all digits are included Similarly a character class for lowercase letters would be abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz It is really important to understand that a match occurs if one of the characters in the class is found Using the abc example above if we want to find this string followed by a digit we would enter abc 0123456789 matches abcO abcl etc to abc9 To further restrict the search we could have used abc 13579 matches abc followed by one odd digit Because a character class is only a list of possible values you can mix and match all the characters in the ASCII code table plimy246 e matches pie pme p4e p e etc This example would find text starting with the letter p and ending with an e that encloses a single character matching one of the letters a m or y one of the digits 2 4 or 6 an exclamation mark a period or an asterisk Note the period and asterisk are not metacharacters anymore Of course if the character class contains many possible values it can be tedious and error prone to enter each character The hyphen is a character class metacharacter that can be used as a range indicator Simply specify the first and last characters in the range Numeric digits could then be coded as 0 9 Lowercase letters could be co
301. p as an escape character This means that you can look for any reserved pattern match character by putting amp in front of it For example list first amp second pat Note that the escape character does not match the ASCII escape character whose value is decimal 27 or octal 33 In this case escape means the same as the transparency character in VPLUS 3000 pattern matching the next character following the escape is to be treated as a literal instead of a pattern match metacharacter Two other characters have been reserved for future use and To reset Qedit to the old pattern match logic use Set Pattern Old the default is Set Pattern New Priority Set Priority CS DS ES Initially logon priority This option does not apply to Qedit UX It is still accepted for compatibility with the MPE version of Qedit Prompt Set Prompt string Initially qux The default prompt string is qux but you can change that with Set Prompt Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit Commands 203 204 Qedit Commands set prompt Qedit set prompt Sys2 Redo Set Redo filename Default none Initially temporary file Commands entered at the Qedit prompt are saved in something called the redo stack You can recall commands from this stack by using other commands such as Before Do and Redo By default the redo stack is stored in a temporary file and discarded as soon as you exit Qedit Th
302. p to 50 characters It can contain only alphabetic characters Although the alias should not contain numeric digits special characters or spaces the Set command does not currently prevent you from using these characters If you do use them the alias feature will not work properly If you use an alias name that has already been defined the new definition replaces the old one The alias definition can contain up to 77 characters and can include one or more commands The definition can contain any command that can normally be entered at the Qedit prompt including other aliases You can use Qedit s command stacking feature to enter a series of commands and create something that resembles a macro command Set Alias Five to First F string List 5 The length of all alias names and definitions cannot exceed 2 500 characters Stacked commands are separated by a semicolon If you use UNIX commands or shell scripts you might have to use semicolons to separate parameters This will confuse Qedit There are different ways to work around this problem You can put the command in another shell script that does not require parameters echo find name core exec rm gt myscript chmod x myscript Set Alias SPJ To myscript The last option is to enclose the command and its parameters in parentheses Set Alias SPJ To L 1 find name core exec rm Vv If the command itself contains parentheses you
303. paces List search include files as well List search usefiles as well Qedit Commands 139 140 Qedit Commands PAGE ON OFF Override Set List Page option LINES count Override Set List Lines per page LENGTH characters Specify the maximum line length Here is an example that uses three of the options list Slpa Sdouble S shift all This command would list all of the current file to the LPA with double spacing and the listing would be shifted four spaces to the right To send the output of the List command to the device called Laser an environment variable must be set to a valid printer name before running Qedit export LPA laser When listing an external file the options must come before the file name list Shex Schar filename hex char dump of file Include Files Normally Qedit only searches the current file for a string If you specify the include keyword however Qedit will also search the include files for the string list Sinclude global_variable The lines that specify Include files must begin with either or In SPL programs an exclamation point indicates that the rest of the line should be treated as a comment So if a line starts with an exclamation point followed by the word Include Qedit also assumes this to be a comment and not an actual Include statement The include command must be spelled out in full and it can be indented from the prefix character
304. paces deletes from the end Control T ends Insert Mode allowing movement to a new column Control G recovers the original line Control O specifies overwrite mode needed for spaces Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual CD Command CD Change current working directory CD directory Default home directory You can switch directories using the cd command The cd command affects your Qedit processes and any processes that you create When you exit Qedit you will be in the same directory that you were in when you invoked Qedit Examples usr local bin return to SHOME return to return to SSAVEDIR Error The last example shows a limitation of cd inside Qedit You can t refer to a directory name that is saved in a variable because Qedit simulates the cd command instead of passing it to your shell program for execution Qedit does not simulate the shell command processing such as variable substitution The three special cases for home are hardcoded into Qedit s cd In addition a few things still do not work well when doing shell commands in Qedit If you launch a command in the background using amp the jobs command will not show the status of it If you set an environment variable it will not be set for Qedit Both of these problems are caused by the fact that shell commands are executed by a child process which is unable to change the status of Qedit Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit Commands
305. pen the second file again 48 Note The shortcut refers to the last Qedit file that was shut Now to copy a block of text from file to file2 use HH twice just as you would use CC to hold the block in file Then open file2 and use AH or BH to paste in the text from the Hold file To move a block from file to file2 use the DD function to delete the block of text from the first file The deleted block is stored in a temporary Hold file called Hold0 Hold zero Now immediately open file2 and use AO or BO to paste in the text from Hold0 22 Getting a Quick Start with HP Full Screen Editing Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Dividing and Gluing Operations Single line V a single line to be diVided G a single line to be glued GJ a single line to be glued with a space inserted Block of text VV begin or end of the block to be diVided GG begin or end of the block to be glued Dividing Lines in Visual Mode To divide a line use the V diVide cut and paste function in column 3 or 4 then insert the special field separator at each division point in the line The default field separator is tilde but you can override this with Set Vis Field If no is found in the line a blank line is added after the line What about dividing all the lines in a range Use VV to mark the start and the end of the line range then place the field separators in the first line of th
306. plicitly after Local X was turned on Verify The Verify command displays detailed information about the local and default settings Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit Commands 233 verify x Set X Tab OFF MEQ11214 List ON set x local on verify x Set X Tab OFF Local On LC011214 List ON Default ME011214 List ON Zip Set Zip characters Initially J The Set Zip command changes the special abbreviation keys provided in Qedit The Zip list of characters is positional and without quotes Ist character FIRST is the default 2nd character LAST is the default 3rd character ALL is the default Ath character Left is the default see Add 5th character Right is the default see Add 6th character auto mod OFF by default inactive Therefore the default Zip list is The only way to reset ZIP to its default value is to re enter these codes in a Set Zip command Auto Modify in Add The auto modify character the 6th one is disabled by default If you do Set Zip _ to specify _ as the auto mod character whenever you end a command line or a new text line in Add with an underline Qedit puts you into Modify on that line For example Set Zip specifies for FIRST for LAST for ALL for shift left for shift right and for auto modify You may specify any special characters you like for these functions but each must be unique and must not conflict with the other cha
307. plus n When you specify a range of lines Glue joins the lines in pairs Examples glue joins 1 to gluej joins 1 to with space between glue glue join 1 and 2 to glue 10 all joins lines in pairs at column 10 glue 10 20 30 joins 4 lines into 1 record glue string glue string lines to lines that follow Notes If there are not enough lines at the end of a rangelist to fill in each column of the list Glue does not go beyond the rangelist If there is not enough room to move all of the characters into the line as many characters as will fit are moved the following line is not deleted and Qedit prints an overflow warning After a Glue command the current line is the line last spliced together To suppress printing of the spliced lines use GlueQ If you don t specify a list of column fields Glue removes leading spaces from the following lines before moving them To insert a single space between them use GlueJ instead If you do specify columnar fields Glue treats spaces as valid data and moves them intact If you specify more than one field some nonblank data may be overwritten if the columns are too close together or the lines to be glued are too long You can always use Undo to cancel a Glue command If Left or Right margins have been Set only the text within the margins is copied and the following lines are not deleted When editing COBOLX files the tag area columns 73 to 80 is
308. pt to send the output to the default system printer But if the LPA or LPB environment variables are not set with a valid device name an error will occur Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit Commands 119 Forward Command FO F6 120 Qedit Commands Starts browsing the current file by displaying the next page forward You stay in browse mode until you enter any command see List jumping option FORWARD F6 key does the same In Line mode Backward and Forward or F5 F6 throw you into List Jumping s Browse mode Qedit displays a screen of text where the screen size is either 23 lines or what you specify with Set List LJ then waits for you by asking More Press Return to see the next screen typing a line number moves you to the screen starting at that line pressing F2 F6 does the appropriate action and F8 or or Control Y or typing any command gets you out of browse mode At the More prompt the current line is the last line displayed Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Garbage Command GAR Finds and recovers wasted space in the current workfile GARBAGE Q no summary If you keep adding lines to a workfile and editing them eventually you will get an Error Full message in Line mode or File nearly full in Visual mode and be unable to add more lines One method of continuing at this point is to use the Garbage command garbage gar minimal command name Garbage combines partially fu
309. r Cartridge 147 symbol Smart search 100 286 T Tab Set Visual option 15 tab character 236 tab character in Visual 218 tab characters in Visual 15 tab stops 59 Tabs Set 88 203 204 285 whether to expand 185 TAE Set Visual option 218 Target error 254 Tell messages in Visual 215 template 141 285 template line Visual screen 14 Term Columns Set 204 TERM variable and Screen mode 32 terminal config changing 218 terminals supported by Visual 255 Text Set 205 Text command 233 building workfiles 165 Text into extra scratch file 51 Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual text lines Screen screen 33 Visual screen 14 texting data files 235 TextJ command 234 tilde blank pattern 111 222 281 field separator 22 23 213 297 most recent screen 297 timestamp file 134 Title option of List 143 titles listing without 144 Too high error 255 Totals Set 207 trailing spaces Colcopy 104 Colmove 107 trailing spaces preserve 224 trial users 7 troubleshooting Screen mode 32 truncated home line 29 two spaces at end of sentence 130 two column listings 146 two sided printing 145 Type Ahead Engine 159 161 221 typeahead codes suppressing 218 UDCs see User Defined Commands 207 undefined control codes 184 ndelete 46 110 ndo Set 207 ndo command 46 149 239 ndo edit Hpmodify 163 Jndo in Visual mode 28 239 mnumbered files 191 nprintable characters 183 Jp command 241 up lines 3 updating Visual screen 219 upper
310. r Start Class in Regexp Left bracket is short for the FIRST line in the file by default This abbreviation can be changed with Set Zip list list first line In questions Qedit shows the default answer in square brackets Purge existing file No In the documentation and indicate optional fields in commands e g List rangelist Left square bracket in regular expressions indicates the start of a character class List x abe z character class starts with a Means LAST or End Class in Regexp Right bracket is short for the LAST line in the file by default This abbreviation can be changed with Set Zip Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual delete delete last line In the documentation and indicate optional syntax fields e g Delete rangelist Right square bracket in regular expressions indicates the end of a character class List x abe z character class ends with c Are for Comments or Indentation Qedit commands can have comments attached to them as long as they are enclosed in curly braces keep test c yes update disc file Qedit recognizes these comments at the qux prompt or in usefiles Qedit also accepts comments on the home line in Visual mode and at the More prompt in Browse mode Braces are also used in the Add Justified and Replace Justified commands to indicate a change of indentation Means ALL The at sign means all i
311. racters configured in Qedit e g TAB 234 Qedit Commands Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Shut Command SH Closes the current workfile May also rename it SHUT filename Default close with same name With no filename parameter Qedit merely stops editing the current file Although Qedit will close the current workfile for you when you Open another one you may sometimes want to Shut explicitly One thing that Shut does is guarantee that all of your changes are actually posted to the disc and will not be lost if the system fails or you disconnect yourself by attempting to make a phone call on your modem phone To post your changes to the disc without closing the workfile specify any shell command e g Is You may want to leave your terminal for lunch in which case it is a good idea to Shut your current file You can always use Open to reopen it when you return shut you may shorten Shut to SH open reopen same file later If you are using a scratchfile and specify a filename parameter Qedit saves the scratchfile as a permanent Qedit workfile In this case the filename must not exist If you are using a Qedit file Qedit renames it before closing qux t myfilel Language is now DATA copy of myfilel in scratchfile 20 lines in file qux sh myfilel Retained existing file for you myfilel already exists No change qux sh myfilel work renamed to myfilel work qux open Open home userl myfilel
312. re already logged on you can execute this command Su gt Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Installing Qedit UX 7 In either case you have to supply the user password for root Step 2 Create Robelle Directory Qedit UX is installed in opt robelle Before restoring the Qedit UX files you must first create the robelle directory mkdir opt robelle Step 3 Restore Files Use the following command to restore the Qedit UX files from the distribution tape tar xv opt robelle This command assumes your tape device is dev rmt Om If it is not you need to specify your tape device by using the f option in the tar command For example if your tape device is dev rmt Im you need to use the following command to restore the files tar xvf dev rmt 1m opt robelle Once the files have been restored you can run the new version of Qedit UX opt robelle bin qgedit Step 4 Set Up PATH Optional You invoke Qedit with this command opt robelle bin qgedit If you just type gedit to invoke Qedit UX you must either add opt robelle bin to your PATH or copy opt robelle bin gedit to a directory that is currently on your PATH Similarly the man pages for Qedit are found in opt robelle man man1 gedit 1 To make the man pages available to everyone you can either add opt robelle man to your MANPATH or you can copy the man pages to a directory that is currently on your MANPATH Details of how to set up either PATH or
313. reated by Qedit as one undo able command except for cut and paste operations Qedit always executes a cut and paste last after updating the file with any other changes no matter what order the changes were made in This means that you can choose to undo just the cut and paste operation or undo it and all of the other changes You can continue undoing your previous changes until the file is back to its original state Refreshing the Screen If you make changes to the screen then decide not to keep them before you press Enter to update your screen how do you get your original text back You refresh the screen by typing a on the home line then pressing F7 F1 or Enter or any function key with Set Vis 28 Getting a Quick Start with HP Full Screen Editing Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Update On Use the Undo command if you press Enter and then decide that you don t want to keep your changes If you insert so many new lines that you push the column template line right off the bottom of your screen don t worry it s not really gone Qedit won t update your screen without the template line however Press Next Page Pg Dn to pull up the next screen of display memory You have a problem only if you inserted so many lines that you pushed the template line right out of display memory and even then you can still recover your changes See the Errors in Visual section of Appendix E regarding qscreen
314. ride this value with Set Increment The linenum is a number between 0 001 and 10 000 This increment is also used as the default increment in Renumber and in assigning line numbers to external files that lack them Qedit will sometimes pick an increment smaller than your requested one For example if you Set Inc 0 2 and do Add 55 2 Qedit will increment by 0 1 based on the number of decimal places in 55 2 Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Interactive Set Interactive ON OFF Default no change Initially depends If you run Qedit from a Session Set Interactive is ON If you run Qedit with Stdin or Stdlist redirected Set Interactive is OFF When it is OFF Qedit will abort on any error will assume the default answer to any question and will generally act as if there is not an intelligent being typing the commands When it is ON Qedit waits for answers to questions and does not trim trailing spaces from input lines allowing you to enter plus a space as a data line in the Add command Entering Set Interactive with no ON or OFF parameter does not change the current setting Justify Set Justify keyword value Initially NULL function TWO OFF The Set Justify command allows you to configure Qedit for the type of justify operations that you are going to use most frequently These are then the defaults For example the command set justify margin 70 two on null causes just
315. ring or press F1 Default Jinenum Whereas in Line mode you type in command and text lines ending each with a Return in Visual you edit a full screen of text in block mode using the terminal keyboard Since your terminal is off line from the computer you can use its cursor and editing keys You edit by moving the cursor around the screen inserting and deleting lines and characters Press Enter to save your changes To move through the file you have the convenience of eight function keys such as F6 Forward One Page 12 e Getting a Quick Start with HP Full Screen Editing Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Screen Layout Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Eile x Edit Connection fip hobbes robelle com rlw Reflection for HP Setup Macro Window Help B Lol OSES HOOD gt er gt Start of file 6 Text COBOL OLCTBSRC ROBELLE 7 86 Move Read 5 0l supr control 4 05 supr version pic s9 4 comp value 4 3 05 supr status pic s9 4 comp 2 88 supr ok value zeros 1 88 supr bad msgfi les value 1 88 supr aborted value 2 1 88 supr create error value 3 2 88 supr bad total type value 4 3 05 supr command line pic x 256 value spaces 4 05 supr flags 5 supr priority x 2 value spaces 6 88 supr priority cs value CS 7 88 supr priority ds value DS 8 88 supr priority es value ES 9 10 supr maxdata pic s9 9 comp value 0 10 10 supr pr
316. rings You can change strings on the screen by entering a Change command on the gt line gt c niether neither 19 F7 Help on Visual Mode To get help press Home Up type and press F7 or Enter Getting a Quick Start with HP Full Screen Editing 27 gt F7 The command gives a one screen summary of Visual mode For complete on line help on Qedit including Visual type HELP in the gt line and press F7 or Enter gt help F7 For help on a specific command type HELP command name See the Help command in the Qedit Commands chapter To get out of help press F8 Formatting Paragraphs To format a screen paragraph mark the paragraph with ZZ cut and paste indicators then use a Justify command that includes a ZZ For example gt justify both margin 68 zz F7 If every paragraph ends with a blank line you can Justify a paragraph by using the relative line number on the screen Justify will start at that point and continue until it finds a blank line gt justify both margin 68 2 F7 For more information on Justify see the Justify command in the Qedit Commands chapter Undoing Changes in Visual Mode After you have made some changes to your screen in Visual mode and updated the file by pressing Enter you may decide you don t want those changes after all You can use the Undo command to cancel these changes All of the changes you make on the screen before pressing Enter are t
317. rkfile the Text is rejected you may have to adjust Set Work Block to allow for line lengths greater than 60 bytes average A parameter of the command is illegal example S Work Size ABC A required left or right parenthesis is missing example Set Window Up Many are optional Unable to load the procedure named from the library specified you may have specified the wrong library or spelled the procedure name incorrectly example P ROUTINE 1 S 1 In a range the second line number is less than the first example List 4 3 The file just Opened was not closed properly the last time it was used the file is being recovered See Open command An illegal size in a new workfile example New ABC 1B3 The string is not correctly formatted either the ending quote is missing or the string is too long example C 1 ABC 510 Format error in the target area of the Change command example C 53 ABC 1 In Renumber the starting line number is too high Qedit cannot find an increment small enough to renumber all of the lines in the file example Ren 99999 Choose a lower starting line number Format error in column search window example Set Window 1020 MART Troubleshooting and Error Messages 259 Quit Errors After serious file system errors Qedit will print the file system error and the following message and then abort Warning This error can only occur if 1 your UNIX file system is corrupted
318. rmat of the first record When external files are accessed Qedit determines these attributes following rules that are defined in appendix B There is no need to specify the Lang explicitly unless there is an ambiguity e g Text datafile UNN because the file has numbers in last eight columns Left The Set Left command allows you to set a left margin for lines in your workfile When you do this existing data to the left of the margin column is retained unchanged even though you may edit the rest of the line Of course if you Delete a line the entire line is gone You can also use Set Right to create a right margin Length The maximum ength of lines in a Qedit workfile is 8 172 columns if the file has Set Lang Data Other Lang values are limited to length 80 or less 72 for SPL FORTRAN and Pascal 74 for COBOLX and 66 for COBOL without the comment columns For Text and Data files the maximum line length can be defined using Set Length maximum is 256 for Text and 8 172 for Data Line A line is a sequence of characters within a Qedit workfile It has a length which may vary as the line is edited and a maximum length Many Qedit commands are based on the ine List displays lines Delete deletes lines etc If you use margins Set Left Set Right you can only list and edit the portion of the line within the margins Each unique line has a inenum that determines its position within the workfile Qedit Glossary 285
319. rminals orearen e to0ks E cavtees inh oe cden idles teem executes EIE 50 Edit Several Files at ONC Gris narniai a chee RE E Pier ih beret E TOTE coe 50 How to Edit Several Files cisscs iscesascctsnsteeatecaiacsraadamiadiadaaeantacentedals 51 Starting a New Scratch File sss asia td ahaa tecia tanita sien aa aatesges 51 Configuring Ditfer nt Sh lls meneen a Wadd de th a A nl ani A E 51 Bourne and Korn Sheils o 2 ce s tecuatgn aloes esl caskia a anthem eu Mosesilag 51 CSG I hia Mosca a vanadate eta xetotastenyeets dau a a e N 52 Setting Up a PATH for Qedit csccccicivcssccsvivcssscevedicevscocvecsussuscecensddussventecstacevtossccbescubnsecdievecvunscd 52 Bourne and Korn SHU Ss 20s cae cctonlessceteasssncsesaszelsdabesadupentasteuestatentawsaanete 52 STG i derenan ar a E 53 Control Characters and Stty rered anniari o Eees EEE EEKE ANETE T E 53 Qeditmer Config raton FUES errre inei ren e Eea EEEE EE E A deeb cost 53 Default Set Commands sssssseeseesseeseesesssressesrrssessessrsseessessessresseesres 54 Ow Line vs Batch Accessni E E ie E E E E ae as 54 Command Line Options nerssi neiaie eoin eeni ee aE E aE AE EEES VETE EE EEEE 54 Initial Command Line cecmdstring ssesseseseseessessreseesseesrssresseesee 55 Editing a Single File Six ieslac Geet ace Meese isos Maree aa Ae eaces 55 Exit with Verify Vieca ne E E curio a a a abate 55 Discard Changes on Exitecennenscniencnn innon 55 HPUX NOTES aene T E E a E E e E E ET A E nants 56 EDI
320. rom the line until it finds a line that contains the current string Qedit clears the screen and displays a new page with positioned at the line that contains the found string Visual also shows the target string on the Status line 18 Getting a Quick Start with HP Full Screen Editing Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Before you can use F4 you must enter the target string Type the string in quotes string at the gt on the home line and press F7 to do the first Find F5 Backward One Page Qedit clears the screen and displays the previous page By default the top line of the original screen becomes the bottom line of the new screen Use Set Vis Carry to change the number of lines carried over to the new screen F6 Forward One Page Qedit clears the screen and displays the next page By default the bottom line of the original screen becomes the top line of the new screen Use Set Vis Carry to change the number of lines carried over to the new screen F7 Execute a Command Use the F7 key to execute commands The current screen is not updated unless you have Set Vis Update On Type whatever command you want to execute after the gt This includes strings to find Qedit Line mode commands such as Open or Justify shell commands calculator commands 5 6 and special Visual commands e g for Refresh for Help Then press F7 Qedit reads only the home line and executes the function To first save your screen
321. rrectly the symptom is a hung terminal i e the terminal is waiting for a prompt that is never going to come or the terminal sent the data before the computer was ready because it didn t wait for the prompt Running Qedit under HP UX 65 To override the G and H strap settings of your CRT use the RCRTSTRAPSGH variable The default value for Qedit UX is 3 which means no handshake G Y ES H YES inhibit both A value of 0 means use handshaking and may be necessary if you shl to an MPE system and use terminal based typeahead Unfortunately a 0 value makes function keys lock up in Line mode Qedit UX The valid values for the RTSTRAPSGH variable are as follows vae BOO O ad active yes ae yes ro yes yes default for HP UX QEDITMGRTRACE Variable If the QEDITMGRTRACE variable is set to a nonzero value Qedit prints tracing messages for the Qeditmgr configuration files The trace includes the name of each Qeditmegr file that Qedit attempted to open each command executed from the file and command line arguments used to invoke Qedit QEDCURWEFILE Variable Qedit updates a variable QEDCURWFILE with the name of your current or last workfile This gives you the ability to reference the current workfile easily from within a shell script without having to pass it in as a parameter QEDSTOREDPWD and QEDPROMPTEDPWD Variables When the Qedit for Windows client establishes a new connection it transmits informatio
322. rrent value of the HOME environment variable Some Qedit commands such as List have an extensive series of options which as their name implies also start with a dollar sign These options have precedence over environment variables In other words if a variable has the same name as a option the substitution does not occur The only workaround is to change the name of the variable to something that does not conflict If you wish to prevent variable substitution and have Qedit interpret the dollar sign at face value insert a backslash immediately in front of it as in HOME The tilde is a special character with different meanings in Qedit Among other things it can be a string delimiter or a shortcut pointing to the most recent current line in full screen mode In HP UX shells it s also commonly used to designate the user s home directory Here s how Qedit handles the tilde character If it s still part of the string delimiter list Verify Stringdelimiter it is used as such If it s Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual not part of the list and is entered by itself on a line it s interpreted as the most recent current line of full screen mode If it s not part of the list Set Varsub is enabled and is used anywhere else in a command it s replaced with HOME The Varsub feature would then substitute the appropriate value Set Varsub On automatically removes the tilde from the string delimiter list
323. s The Text command works on any file that you can read but it truncates records longer than 8 172 columns and prints a warning You can use Qedit to edit binary files The Text filename Browse command copies a file into Qedit but it won t let you modify the file You can use the List command including List Jumping Hold Visual mode HH and ZZ and any other Qedit functions that do not modify the file There are two advantages to Browse mode it protects you from making unplanned changes to a file and it does not update the Mod Date of the file An asterisk as filename means the workfile most recently shut If you do specify a workfile name Qedit shuts your current workfile and creates a new workfile to hold a copy of filename Qedit Commands 237 238 Qedit Commands If you try to Keep the file with its original name i e you enter a Keep without a filename you will get an error Text txtfile browse K File opened with Browse please specify a Keep file name You can still force a Keep by specifying an explicit filename as in Text txtfile browse Keep txtfile TXTFILE DATA ACCT OLD 80B FA of records 16 Purge existing file no y Examples Make copy of source file change and save it text hwsy src copy Hwsy Srce into scratch file modify 10 make changes keep save changes Absolute File Name When you Text a file Qedit remembers the absolute path name of the file not the relative name T
324. s The number of decimal places in inenum tells Qedit how finely to number the new lines add 50 1 9 new lines will be 50 1 50 2 50 3 add 50 10 1 9 new lines will be 50 10 50 11 50 12 The rangelist parameter tells Qedit which lines to copy add 50 1 1 9 10 15 1 9 10 15 is the rangelist Examples list 4 8 how lines look before the copy command 4 aaaaaaaa bbbbbbbb ecceccec dddddddd eeeeeeee add 5 7 8 copy lines 7 and 8 after line 5 Syl dddddddd O22 eeeeeeece 2 lines COPIED list 4 8 how lines look after the copy command 4 aaaaaaaa bbbbbbbb dddddddd eeeeeeee cececece dddddddd eeeeeeece duplicate line 5 after itself Notes Add prints each new line unless you use AQ When you copy lines the rangelist must not include the linenum e g Add 5 4 6 is rejected because it would be an infinite loop Qedit prints Error Already The lines copied are not deleted from the original location You now have two copies of the lines and a copy in the Hold0 file see Add Move If you have Set Left Right margins Qedit prints only the portion of each line within the margins However it will actually copy the entire line including the portion outside of the current margins Add Moving Lines within a File Move some lines from one place in the file to another deleting them from the original position ADD linenum lt rangelist Q no display Defaults none The inenum
325. s default Delete Control D Delete characters Before Control B Insert characters before a column Append Control A Add characters to end of the line Divide Control V Divide line in two at this column Goof Control G Restart Modify with original line Terminate Control T End this edit so you can do another Lengthen Control L Same as Append Control A Insert Control Same as Before Control B HP UX reacts to certain control characters which might conflict with the Qzmodify codes For example control D sends an end of file signal to HP UX but is also the delete character in Qzmodify You should use the HP UX stty program to change the default end of file signal Please see the section Control Characters and stty on page 53 for more details You create Control codes by holding down the Control key while pressing the other key Most Control codes are invisible and do not move the cursor In the user manual the symbol as a prefix stands for the Control key D for Control D Some functions combine two of the Control codes pressing T then V in the first column of a line splices two lines together and deletes the second line if it s emptied Actions not restricted to column 1 may be performed at any point on the line Function Key Col Purpose Splice AT AV 1 Fills current line from next line Insert Line A V 1 Adds a blank line before current one Insert Line A V Adds a blank line after current line Qedit 6
326. s waiting is to execute any shell commands that Reflection might send to the HP 9000 The reason why shell commands must be accepted is that Reflection sends a command to execute unxlink2 whenever a file transfer is requested As long as the command or command file doesn t attempt to transmit any data to the HP 9000 Reflect will probably work the same way as Alt Y For example here is a Reflection command file that works from Alt Y but not from Reflect Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit Issues and Solutions 77 78 Qedit Issues and Solutions 7 EXIT RCL This command file gets me out of Qedit logs me off the HP 9000 and exits from Reflection transmit exit M wait 0 01 00 for no transmit yes M wait 0 01 00 for transmit exit M wait 0 01 00 for terminated gt wait 0 00 05 hardexit Form Feed Causing Return Line Feed In Modify the Lengthen control code Control L means edit the end of the current line However in recent versions of Reflection L is executed by the PC as you type it and causes a Return line feed If this is happening to you you can change the default in Reflection Press Alt Y for the Reflection command line type Set Do Form Feeds No press Return then type Save and press Return again to save the new default to your current configuration file Completion Codes If you are using version 2 00 or later Qedit automatically enables completion codes on Reflection c
327. s assumed to be a file name You cannot combine the use and include options Device Option The List command now has an option to specify the HP UX print device For example list device printer 1 10 The above command prints lines 1 through 10 of the current file to the printer name or class called Printer The name specified after the device keyword must be a valid printer name or class If both the device and lp keywords are used the device takes precedence Configuring Printers By using environment variables before running Qedit you can define LP LPA and LPB in your profile as three different printers on your system SLP export LP SLPA serialp export LPA SLPB shipping export LPB Merging Options The options in the List command are merged with the Set List options except that Set List Record ON applies only to the file LP not LPA and LPB The options can be combined wherever they make sense they can be used with Jumping Quiet and Template and can work on the current workfile or an external file Options may be shortened e g h hex Interrupting a Listing Qedit Commands 141 142 Qedit Commands Press the Control S key to pause the listing for review Then press Control Q to resume the listing On newer HP terminals the Stop key pauses a listing until you press Stop again To stop the List command press the Control Y key Listing External Files With the List command you can
328. s homeline a tilde always represents the most recently accessed line number If the tilde is removed from the delimiter list it also becomes a reference in line mode to full screen s mode most recently accessed line Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual The delimiter list itself must be enclosed between a pair of valid delimiters The new delimiters must be chosen from the initial list If you do not remember what the initial list is simply enter the Set String command with a letter or a numeric digit as a list For example Set String a Error Not an acceptable quote char a select from You can reduce the list to just a few characters If you want to reduce it to just a colon and a number sign enter Set String From that point on only quotes colons and number signs can surround a string List filename Find procedure Delete badline Change 1 7 oldtext this is invalid now The Posix option allows you to easily bring the delimiter list down to three characters quotation marks a backslash and a colon This option is useful when working with file names that contain a lot of special characters It reduces the number of parsing errors There is no easy way to bring the defaults back You have to enter the Set String command with all the characters in the initial list Tabs Set Tabs char HP ON OFF Default Control I HP ON Whe
329. s no way to tell Qedit to search for the caret as a literal You should use an expression with the corresponding hexadecimal value x05e Escaped Sequences in Regular Expressions 276 Regular Expressions The escape character can be combined with other characters to represent nonprinting characters Qedit recognizes the following escaped characters These should not be confused with escape sequences that control the display on HP type terminals They are also not metacharacters b Backspace e ASCII escape character ESC f Form feed n New line line feed r Carriage return s Space t Horizontal tab DDD 1 3 octal digits representing a character s ASCII value xDDD 1 3 hex digits representing a character s ASCII value YC Control code e g Control G G is the Bell character For example you would use t all lines with a tab character esd amp terminal escape sequence ESC amp d Escaped characters can be used anywhere an ordinary character is used including a character class and to declare a character range Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Backreferences in Regular Expressions We have seen basic expressions in which almost everything revolves around single characters of text Even character class lists are really used to match a single position You can use parentheses to divide a long regular expression into smaller portions Each portion then becomes a regexp on its own This does not affect the
330. s qualifies the preceding character and makes it optional This means the character may or may not be there In either case the search is successful list cancell ed regexp canceled and cancelled are found Means Hex Memory Lock List Option Previous File or End Of Line in Regexp Dollar sign is used by Qedit to enable and disable memory lock at the current line In the calculator is the prefix for a hexadecimal value FF The List command has a variety of temporary options preceded by For example list Soctal 5 6 octal dump list incl abc Include files can be used as a shortcut to refer to the previous file name referenced in a Qedit command For example after List XXX the file name is XXX If you already have an open workfile or scratch file a Text or Open command makes Qedit shut the current workfile Thus the file name now contains the previous workfile name If you are not using a workfile then is not updated by the Text or Open command However it is updated by a Shut command without a file name You can use as a shortcut in commands that refer to an external file name Open Add 1 List Use etc Verify shows you the name of the previous file A dollar sign in regular expressions identifies the end of a line It takes on this meaning only if it is the last character in the regexp If used anywhere else in the expression the dollar sign is used
331. s the double result as two octal numbers The first number represents the high order 16 bits and the second number represents the low order 16 bits 10 d treat result as two 16 bit octal words Result 000000 000012 1000000000 d high order 16 bits are nonzero Result 035632 145000 10 d note negative value 2 s complement Result 177777 177766 In ASCII format up to four characters are printed in hexadecimal decimal and ASCII display format 2020 a Result 2020 32 32 20161 72145 a Result S2071 32 113 gq 7465 116 101 te In Binary format the high order 16 bits are examined If these bits are not zero they are printed as two groups of eight bits A one 1 means that the bit is on and a zero 0 means that the bit is off The low order 16 bits are always printed as two groups of eight bits 10 b high order 16 bits suppressed Result 2 00000000 00001010 10 b note negative value 2 s complement Result 2 11111111 11111111 2 11111111 11110110 1000000000 b high order 16 bits are nonzero Result 2 00111011 10011010 2 11001010 00000000 Input Format The calculator supports different input formats for numbers Octal values are prefixed with a percent sign and hexadecimal values with a dollar sign Decimal is assumed by default but decimal values may be prefixed with if desired An ASCII string of up to 4 characters is entered in quotes The result of the last c
332. s together 125 512 Result 637 0 An expression consists of numbers and operators The operators can be addition subtraction multiplication division or exponentiation The value of the expression is printed immediately For a complete description of calculator type help calc Column Individual character positions within lines are called columns and have column numbers See template for a method of drawing a column template above any line Column numbers are referenced in the Change command and string windows For example change 1 4 23 delete first 4 columns in line 23 change 1 4 9 insert 2 columns at front 1 begin 1 10 find begin in first 10 columns A column is an integer number between the lowest column of the line and the highest column The lowest column number is 7 for standard COBOL and 1 for SPL FORTRAN Pascal RPG Text COBFREE Data and Job files The highest column number is 72 for standard COBOL SPL Pascal and FORTRAN files 1 000 for COBFREE 256 for TEXT 80 for COBOLX RPG and Job files and 8 172 for Data files When in doubt as to column numbers use LT to list a line with column headings Shorthand 1 1 1 30 first column 30 30 30 last column Using Set Left column and Set Right column you can set margins in specific columns Any existing data beyond the margins is retained but new lines added will have blanks outside the margins
333. s with Qcat 0 ceecceecesseceseeceeeeeseeeeeecseeeeaeceeeceaeceaeeceaeeeaaeeeeeeceeseaeeeaeees 67 Differences Between MPE and HP UX ccc ceccccccessecessececesaeceseececessecesesaeccseasesssseeeseseeesaees 68 OP CI SIUG eenn ea a A E a uieodaaaes 68 Current File Name esessseesssseessesersseseressssrresssererssereessereessssreesssrrees 68 IVIISSIN DO Feat reSis a a E E 68 Qedit for Microsoft Windows 71 TnittOdUCtl OM sis re cee E Sik eee EA ees Gaede Dees I ee 71 SCIVErPLOCESS ETETE ibe the tee tee ee el eee teem E TE 71 PAP SUIS MOO warsocsiscsstci sh ocd ivaasaasshevaustomasniecS udina a aaaea 71 Port Number atana a ra tacumath retina clash va Aa 73 LOG FeS enact eich ee eis ees AAA AA eae AA ea 73 CONSOLE WIGS SAO ES gt sotevat bm ancles xahhtan ale sale ta E 73 PRE CESS MSOC ooo acare pe ainda sac asehis ec ous a a soa ox Cade nee n 74 Error Log eiiean a ai EAT TERE RE EERE E 74 Trace Loger ann a a a aiant 74 Log File Names nnen eara aaa a ies 74 Qedit Issues and Solutions 77 Running Qedit with Reflection senin an eee E ace tia OE E 77 Alt Y vs Reflect a secs ether oa ans aceon nants 77 Form Feed Causing Return Line Feed 0 00 0 ec ceecceeceeeseeetseeeteeeteeeeee 78 Completion Codes seeen i a wars A a tase 78 Controlling the PC irsi aio a G E EE an 78 Accidental Exit from Reflection 0 0 0 0 ccccccccecssceceessceeeesssseeeceereeees 78 Changing the Exit Keystroke ssosyatecise otitis i ateobaeaieaecevesss 79 F
334. s you use AQ If Qedit finds invalid sequence numbers in a file it begins assigning logical sequence numbers using the last valid sequence number and the current Set Increment If you have Set Left Right margins Qedit inserts blanks before the left margin in each line That is the lines from the external file are left justified within the current margins of the workfile Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Append Command AP Appends a string to the end of each line in the rangelist APPEND string rangelist Q no display Default rangelist Append allows you to add a semi colon or any other string of characters to the end of a line AP 5 10 Append prints each line that it changes If the resulting line would be too long Append goes into Modify on that line Examples flist 25 25 to the end of the line append 25 to the end of the line ap 1 4 redo function modify function append function list function Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit Commands 93 Backward Command BA F5 94 Qedit Commands Starts browsing the current file by displaying one page backward You stay in browse mode until you enter any command see List jumping option BACKWARD F5 key does the same In Line mode Backward and Forward or F5 F6 throw you into List Jumping s browse mode Qedit displays a screen of text where the screen size is either 23 lines or what you
335. same port number If there is a conflict you can start the Qedit server process with a different port number For example gedit d5678 tells Qedit to listen to port number 5678 instead of the default number 7395 If you change the port number on the Qedit UX server you must also change the port number on every Qedit client to the same value 5678 in this example Client port numbers can be changed in the Server dialog box of the Option menu If you want listings from netstat and other networking tools to identify the port number as qwin instead of just 7395 you have to change the etc services file so that it includes the Qedit port number qwin 7395 tcp Robelle Qedit for Windows The Qedit server can only communicate with Qedit clients To help system managers see what is happening with the Qedit process Qedit for Windows writes to three log files the access log the error log and the trace log Console Messages inx inx If Qedit cannot access any of its log files it writes the log message to the system console You can also enable console logging with the Debug command in the Option menu of the Qedit client If someone is having trouble establishing a Qedit for Windows connection and the Qedit log files on the host do not include a message for this connection check the system console If Qedit was unable to Qedit for Microsoft Windows 73 open the log files it probably reported the message on the system console
336. seceseeseeeeeteeeseeeteenees 90 Add Copying Lines Between Files ccccssccssceseceeseeeteecseceseenees 91 Append Command AP krenerien i cee 8s ots dondeeeFine date E tas adeas sev ende clea vied E 93 Backward Command BA F5 ccccccscccssccssscescecsseeesseceeeecseceeseeesesesseceseecssecesaeceeeecseeseseeeeeenas 94 Before Com miarid B Is 22s 20 s lt ss cens ected E EE aT E ETE 95 CD Command CD is r oeiut teens evade ew a a ieee nee th eget E 97 Change Command C haen verse E Ee T atten ae deswhaggondseadien ede AEA sodegteetsbintee 98 Change Changing Strings sesessssessessrsssessessresresseesesresseessesersseesee 98 Change Changing Columns ssssessseessesessseessesersseesseserssressessrssees 101 Close Command CE ienen Gini E a E E EES EE Eea E EEEE EEE ainiie 103 Colcopy Command COL n nii E E EEE Ea EE a ERE EEEE Eii 104 Colmov Command COLM Jr eorn kde a E E iia ei hata E AERES 107 Delete Command D h pe E E tate iowa E Sth teenie 110 Destroy Command DES erinin E Ee E AEE a Ea e Enia KAEA A 112 Divide Command DI iseen a E E wei ea EAEE EOE RAEES 113 Do Command DO a E Sein ee E eects A ew doe ed 114 Exit Command EES Jie snanar ot esse Sas kas See aoe AE eek oae coca Cee guess AEN 115 Find Comma HF FA amp ee ecsce ceed vizceeen eects chen oe E Ra esac ean sd owe 116 Findup Command FINDU F3 kr na e E A EE TEE EEE Ee 118 Form Comand FORM Pereri n a a E s eree OEA EGES 119 Forward C
337. ser Manual Qedit Commands 113 Do Command DO The Do command repeats without changes any of the previous 1 000 commands DO _ start stop string ALL Default repeat the previous command Commands are numbered sequentially from 1 as entered and the last 1 000 of them are retained Use the Listredo command to display the previous commands You can repeat a single command do 5 a range of commands do 5 10 or the most recent command whose name matches a string do list If you want to modify the commands before executing them use Redo or Before Examples listredo do d d d d R oj or 4 3 previous command again command line 39 again command lines 5 to 8 again most recent List command last starting with ls last ls job command last containing job command before previous by relative line number command lines 5 to last 39 5 8 List Ls ls job job S2 77 5 5 d d d d d Notes To stop a Do All use Control Y 1a PE o MEE ss O EE E E O MR e Y o TE e G S Oo 0 0 0 OO 0 6 0 0 O20 Or O OF Os OOO 114 Qedit Commands Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Exit Command E F8 Exit from Qedit and return to the operating system EXIT string The current workfile is closed and Qedit terminates The F8 user key is the same as Exit To close the current workfile without exiting use Shut When you Exit Qedit checks whether you have
338. specify with Set List LJ then waits for you by asking More Press Return to see the next screen Typing a line number moves you to the screen starting at that line pressing F2 F6 does the appropriate action and F8 or or Control Y or typing any command gets you out of browse mode At the More prompt the current line is the last line displayed Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Before Command B Repeat any combination of the previous 1 000 command lines with or without editing BEFORE start stop string ALL Default redo previous line BQ redo without change BJ listredo The Before command allows you to modify the commands before it executes them If you don t need to change them use BQ or Do Commands are numbered sequentially starting with 1 for the first command entered and by default the last 1 000 commands are accessible This numbering sequence applies only to the temporary redo stack because this stack is discarded when you exit Qedit The numbering sequence in a persistent redo stack which is accessible across Qedit invocations continues between invocations Use the Listredo or BJ command to display the previous commands You can redo a single command a range of commands or the most recent command whose name matches a string The Before command uses Qedit style Control characters for modifying the commands The default mode is to replace characters To delete use Control D and
339. spelling Justify Left remove leading spaces Justify Format fill lines ragged right margin Justify Both fill lines straight right margin Justify Null default no changes safety Keyword Parameters of Justify MARGIN column right edge relative to left TWO ON OFF maintain 2 spaces after and INDENT spaces indentation for list of points WITHINDENT activate configured indentation STOP chars break justification when found START chars start new paragraph You may shorten options and keywords to the leading letters Rangelist Specifies Which Lines For the Format and Both options the rangelist specifies some lines to format Warning if you type a single line number e g just both 5 Qedit begins formatting lines from that line number to the end of the paragraph Qedit sees blank lines as end of paragraph markers so if you justify format all you end up with smooth and even 126 Qedit Commands Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual chunks of text set off by blank lines This is one of the few places in Qedit where a single line number implies a range of lines For the Left Right and Center options a single line rangelist means a single line But you can specify a string rangelist to center or justify only lines containing a string Specifying a string rangelist with the Format or Both options is equivalent to specifying a single line number i e formatting starts with the line which has the string and continues to the
340. ss matches p2e p e etc matches pae p3e etc In the last example the caret negates 2 4 and 6 The regexp is true if the text starts with the letter p ends with the letter e and encloses a single character that is not 2 4 or 6 Repeating Character Class Because a character class is interpreted as a single character you can use the optional and quantifier and metacharacters to further qualify a character class For example if we want to allow one or more numeric digits after the abc string we could use the following regexp abc 0 9 Escape Character Other characters used in a regular expression might also have special meanings The most important one is probably the escape character In Qedit the backslash is the escape character A metacharacter Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Regular Expressions 275 however loses its special meaning if preceded by a backslash In the example abc 123 square brackets indicate a character class This regexp would match abel abc2 or abc3 If we escape the square brackets as in abc 123 the square brackets are then used as literals This means they are now part of the string The only matching value is then abc 123 If you want to search for a backslash simply enter two of them in a row The only exception to this is the start of line metacharacter Because it is also a valid escaped sequence see next section there i
341. ssessrssresseesesseesseesese 296 Means Octal or String eeeeeessessseseessessreseesseesseserssresseserssressessrssres 296 Means Current Refresh Multiply or Quantifier in Regexp 296 Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Means Previous String Literal Match in Regexp or Special Characters iti REGEX en scledtjczish cotta dsieiataaipattavincs cratttansekaneas 297 Means Prompt Range Delimiter Stop Exit or Divide 298 Means FIRST default or Start Class in Regexp e eee 298 Means LAST or End Class in Regexp cccccessessseeteeesteeeteeeees 298 Are for Comments or Indentation eee ceecesecetecneeereeeeeeeeeenees 299 Means ALE ruran ai e a a E E pile EEE 299 amp Means Literal Wate tis sc2225 any creas eis ceu esis ta shen la Sates alec tae 299 Means Shell Commands or String 0 cc cecceecceeseeseeeteceteeeeeeeeneees 299 Means Multiple Commands 3 5 1 20i ccsssssczawaaaGasss aadeesedeistaseinansaee 300 Means a Liste s5c5 Scheel aa daha shes exes chins teshigies eau Siena as 300 Means Copy or Calculate cxc 3 sccalconediscs faassen eeativacdravueteacesicadton 300 lt Means Move I O Redirection or Backward Page ceceeeeee 301 gt Means Forward Page I O Redirection Modify or Qhelp 301 Means Sting dies aed aere aiaa aE AE T E vudagaalaeahiaalenmeaanes 301 Means Start Parameter Command or Subpattern in Regexp
342. starting about six lines forward You stay in browse mode until you enter any command see List jumping option UP F2 key does the same In Line mode Up or F2 puts you into List Jumping s browse mode The starting location is a few lines ahead of the current position where the actual number of lines is determined by the Set Visual Roll amount Qedit displays a screen of text where the screen size is either 23 lines or what you specify with Set List LJ then waits for you by asking More Press Return to see the next screen typing a line number moves you to the screen starting at that line pressing F2 F6 does the appropriate action and F8 or or Control Y or typing any command gets you out of browse mode At the More prompt the current line is the last line displayed Qedit Commands 245 Use Command U Executes part or all of the commands in a file USE filename rangelist Q no display J no open error Default means current or last workfile range all Qedit opens filename and reads command lines from it instead of from Stdin as the filename either closes the current workfile and Uses it or Uses the workfile most recently closed including a scratch file Execution continues until the last line of the usefile or until you strike Control Y Qedit prints the commands on Stdlist unless you do UQ To print instructions to the user even when UQ is in effect put Q commands in your usefile E
343. t Exclusive On When this option is enabled files that you text in are kept open for read only access This means the files are still accessible to compilers and other programs with non conflicting access including Qedit with Set Text Exclusive disabled In the latter case a user will be able to text the file in but will not be able to save changes with a Keep command When Set Text Exclusive is enabled a user requires read and write permissions to be able to Text in a file If he only has read permission he has to use the Browse option on the Text command even if the file is not currently accessed Once Set Text Exclusive is enabled for all users and a particular file is being worked on subsequent Text commands immediately fail with Error File open by another Qedit process On a system where Qedit is the editor of choice we recommend that Set Text Exclusive be inserted in the opt robelle qeditmegr file Once a file has been texted in the user retains control over it The file is released when Qedit Commands 209 210 Qedit Commands e another file is texted in e the workfile is closed explicitly by a Shut command or implicitly by a New or Open command e the workfile is purged e g purge e Qedit is terminated All these operations signal Qedit that the work is done on this file When the workfile is shut explicitly or implicitly Qedit tries to clear its contents If the file is clean i e has not been modified
344. t Renumber ren 10 11 spread out line range evenly list 10 1 check new lines numbers 10 The Renumber command 10 2 has two basic modes 10 4 1 renumber an entire file 10 6 2 spread out a range of lines 11 to make room for new lines add 10 4 now you can add some lines 10 5 usually from 1 0 by 1 0 10 51 Notes If you keep adding new lines at the same spot in a file Qedit will assign incremental line numbers such as 3 01 3 011 but it cannot add a line between 3 011 and 3 012 The smallest increment between lines is 0 001 When you run out of line numbers Qedit warns you You can Renumber a range of lines or the entire file to get around this problem Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit Commands 179 Replace Command R Replaces lines with new text either from Stdinx or from the Hold file REPLACE HOLD rangelist Q no printing T template J justified Default rangelist Replace hold looks for new lines of text in the Hold file see the Hold command and uses each to replace one of the lines of the rangelist Replace without hold prints each line of rangelist then waits for you to type a new line at the keyboard Pressing Return only erases the line Replacej indents the new line the same number of columns as the original line Hold can be abbreviated to h Examples rq Shold 50 70 replace from the Hold file rq Sh 50 70 replace from the Hold file rep 5 replace line 5 only 5
345. t allow spaces before the To check your environment variables use Bourne sh and Korn ksh Shells Senv C Shell csh Sprintenv RCRTMODEL Variable If you use either an HP terminal e g 239x and 700 9x series or a terminal emulator such as Reflection you can get Qedit to identify the terminal type automatically by setting an environment variable If you use a VT terminal you should either not set the variable at all or set it to zero If you set the environment variable RCRTMODEL to 2 and export it before running Qedit Qedit can identify your terminal Reflection emulator or Qcterm emulator automatically This includes the terminal ID number such as 70092 or 2392 and the Reflection or Qcterm version number such as 430 For Reflection Qcterm and 700 9x terminals Qedit also determines how many columns of display memory you have set originally On a PC with Reflection Qedit detects whether your combination of VGA adaptor and Reflection version is likely to switch into 132 column mode whenever more than 80 columns of display memory are requested Running Qedit under HP UX 61 QOcterm version 2 0 or higher is required to use Qedit s Blockemulation mode Qcterm emulates a 700 92 terminal but can display 200 columns as well as 80 or 132 columns normally available on a 700 92 terminal export RCRTMODEL 2 sh ksh opt robelle bin qgedit Qedit UX Copyright Robelle Solutions Technology Inc 1977 2000 qux verif
346. t is possible to edit these files by folding the content into manageable pieces This is done using the Length option Use this option to specify the size of each line The maximum value is 8 172 When reading the file in each Qedit UX read retrieves the specified number of characters until it reaches the end of the file Lines will all have the same size except the very last line if the total size of the file is not evenly divisable by the specified size For example if the file contains 8 000 characters and the specified Length is 80 Qedit UX creates 100 lines If the file contains 8 020 characters there will be 100 lines of 80 characters and the last line will only have 20 characters If the Length option is used Qedit UX assumes the file does not have any Newline delimiters even if it actually had some These characters are processed as if they were part of the data In this case Qedit UX automatically disables Set Keep LF To insert Newline delimiters at the end of each line you can enable the option with Set Keep LF On or use the LF option on the Keep command as in Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Undo Command Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual UN Reverses the effect of the previous command that modified text after showing you the command and asking your permission UNDO ALL REDO Default the last editing task Undo prints the command to be undone and how many lines it actually updated added deleted and
347. t is the default temporary workfile To provide the fastest possible response time Qedit does not write every word that you type out to the disc Thus after a system crash or phone disconnection you could lose up to 10 lines of text If you wish to force Qedit to post your changes to the disc you can either Shut the workfile or do an HP UX command e g Is Qedit saves the context of the workfile i e Set Left Right current line number Set Length etc when you Shut it When you Open the workfile again Qedit recalls the same context The Open command prints a compact warning of any features it sets from the user label Special Characters Certain nonalpha and nonnumeric characters like and have special meaning within Qedit Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit Glossary 293 294 Qedit Glossary 9 Means Help Nonprinting Characters Alphanumeric in Patterns or Optional in Regexp Typing a question mark in the Visual home line or in response to the Line mode prompt is a request for on line Help In Visual you can get more detailed assistance by typing Help instead of in the home line When Visual prints a at the start of a line it means that the line contains nonprinting characters which are replaced by dots Question mark in patterns matches a single alphabetic or numeric character list BASE pattern BASE plus 2 alphanumerics A question mark in regular expression
348. t print lines eyny change X to Y but don t print line Range A range is just a series of lines defined by a starting line number a slash and an ending line number ALL is short for FIRST LAST and is short for ALL If the ending line is left off Qedit assumes LAST You can shorten a range like 516 516 554 to 516 554 a 20 100 120 copy range 100 120 after line 20 Je X Y 200 change X to Y in current line to 200 delete all delete the range ALL keep tF3 200 write the range 200 to a file list 100 list the range 100 to LAST m 1111 99 modify the range 1111 1111 99 list last 10 list the last 11 lines in the file 1 list the entire workfile 2z 5 1071 zz mark a range then list it Rangelist Qedit commands usually contain a part called the rangelist A rangelist is simply a sequence of line ranges separated by spaces or commas Here are some sample ranges Range Means 1 a single line 1 4 lines 1 through 4 inclusive 25 100 1 lines 25 through 100 1 100 lines 100 through the LAST line ALL lines FIRST through LAST _9 9 area around current line Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Here are some sample rangelists Rangelist Means 1 5 lines 1 and 5 1 5 10 20 lines 1 through 5 and 10 through 20 25 33 100 lines 25 and 33 through 100 A rangelist can contain overlapping lines Qedit does not try to resolve the ranges into a list of ordered un
349. t then appends your screen image to the qscreen file and does not attempt to update the lines If the Clear Display was legitimate type in column 1 after the last line Missing or invalid status line no UPDATE see qscreen Under some circumstances the start of the status line is not transmitted properly to Qedit even though the rest of the screen is okay Therefore Qedit now looks for the line number field in the status line enhanced as Inverse Halfbright If that is not found you will get the message Missing or invalid status line Your screen has not been updated but it has been appended to the qscreen file You can do list char qscreen to see what was actually received by Qedit or to recover your lines Home line gt not transmitted no UPDATE see qscreen If Qedit detects the status line as the first line of your screen you will get the error message Home line gt not transmitted This either means that you deleted the home line or data was lost at the start of your transmission or you inserted too many lines with Set Vis Cleardisplay Off Your screen has not been updated but has been appended to the qscreen file You can do list S char qscreen to see what went wrong or to recover the data NO UPD bad format left 4 columns see qscreen Qedit uses and indicators in columns and 2 to keep track internally of which line on your screen has which line number If you move the lines around not using cut and p
350. t with HP Full Screen Editing 29 30 Getting a Quick Start with HP Full Screen Editing Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Getting a Quick Start with VT Full Screen Editing Introduction Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit s full screen mode on VT terminals is called Screen mode which works with most VT terminals 1 e VT100 and VT220 To use Screen mode you must have a VT terminal or terminal emulator and you must have a terminfo entry for your VT terminal in your configuration use untic vt100 oruntic vt220 to check your terminfo entries Screen mode differs from Visual mode by not relying on the block mode feature of HP terminals It enables you to page forward and backward through your file as well as to move copy mark and delete blocks of text with Screen mode s cut and paste functions Screen mode is a good introduction to the HP operating system for users who don t work on HP computers all day Those who may particularly benefit are novice users or users who run Qedit only to update a report skeleton once a week Screen mode provides a familiar environment where novices can make changes to the entire screen just as they do on PC editors You can even configure some electronic mail packages e g HPDesk elm to put your users directly into Screen mode when they edit a message Home and End keys On PC s running a terminal emulator the Home and End keys correspond to the Home and End keys on your keyboard On V
351. tJ with the include option to browse through the specified files as well as their include files You can combine with ListJ with Q to display the lines without sequence numbers Also you can combine ListJ with T to print a column template at the top of each screen In fact you can combine all three options into ListJQT to List Jump without line numbers but with a column template The screensize can be changed from 23 lines to another number with Set List LJ nn where nn is some number of lines from 5 to 100 If you put the command Set List QJ On in your Qeditmegr file you can avoid seeing sequence numbers when you browse When List Jumping reaches the last line of your file it prints End Are you DONE yes and waits for your answer Yes ends the listing and No starts listing again from the beginning Set List Endstop On disables this question List Jumping just prints the last line of the file and ends the LJ command Controlling Printer Listings When you specify lp or lpa or lpb in a List command Qedit looks for an LP environment variable retrieves the value and uses this as the device name The lines that would have been printed on the terminal are written to the printer file instead At the end of the command Qedit closes the file which releases it for printing The default Qedit listing to the printer is a raw dump of your lines with or without line numbers It has no page breaks no headings no
352. tab stops simpler On the other hand placing the line number on a separate line makes it easier to press Control Y and re enter edits Set Mod Prompt OFF separates line and number _ represents the cursor set modify prompt off modify 10 2 10 2 Now is the time for all good people set modify prompt on modify 10 2 10 2 Now is the time for all good people You can also use the Quiet option not to see line numbers at all Replacing Modify with Hpmodify If you prefer the MPE style edits provided in the Redo command do Set Modify Hpmodify Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit will accept DDD to delete characters Ixxx to insert xxx Rxxx to replace with xxx and U to undo Other edits include gt to append gt D to delete from the end gt Rxxx to replace from the end and D gt to clear the line HP style modify does not support tab stops and always prints the line number on a separate line from the data See Redo command for a complete list of edits Hpmodify applies in Modify Redo Before and modify in Change and Add Forcing Redo to Use Qedit Style If you like the Qedit style modify better than HP style and want to use it even in Redo do Set Modify Robelle Replacing Modify with Qzmodify To make Qzmodify the style throughout Qedit use this command SET MODIFY QZMODIFY TAE TAEOFF Default disable Qzmodify The TAE options apply only if you have a Telamon Type Ahead En
353. tart or end of file gt first F7 Scrollup Character This character can be entered in the cut and paste columns to scroll up in the file A single character scrolls the number of lines defined by Set Visual Roll If the character is entered more than once Qedit scrolls up that many times the number of Roll lines For example enter 4 minus signs anywhere to scroll 4 X Roll lines The default scrollup character is a minus sign It can be changed to something else with Set Visual Scrollup Cut and Paste It is never necessary to remember line numbers in full screen mode Visual allows you to mark hold move copy replicate or delete a block of text all visually This is called cut and paste and is done by putting special indicators in the two blank columns at the left of each text line before you press the Enter key For example DD indicates a block of text to be deleted Cutting Operations Order Is Not Important But One at a Time You can enter the indicators in any order and on different screens but 10 000 is the maximum number of lines you can cut When you have defined a complete cut and paste task Qedit completes the task and removes the indicators You can only perform one cut and paste task at a time Single Line Block of Text Function M MM Move line or block of text C CC Copy line or block of text 20 Getting a Quick Start with HP Full Screen Editing Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Man
354. tells Qedit where to move the lines The number of decimal places in inenum determines the line number increment For example add 5 10 lt 100 200 creates lines 5 10 5 11 5 12 etc Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual The rangelist tells Qedit which lines to move Add deletes the original lines after moving them You still only have one copy of each line Examples list 4 7 how lines look before the move 4 aaaaaaaa 5 bbbbbbbb 6 dddddddd 7 CCCCCCCC add 5 lt 7 move line 7 after line 5 Sel CCECECEC 1 line MOVED list 4 7 how lines look after the move aaaaaaaa bbbbbbbb ecececce dddddddd Notes Control Y during a move stops the move but it also changes the move into a copy The lines being moved in the current range are not deleted Add Move ignores Set LEFT RIGHT margins it moves entire lines However it only prints the portion of the line within the current margins When you copy or move lines using Add or Add lt Qedit first puts the lines into a Hold file called Hold0 It then counts the lines If you do not have sufficient line numbers to insert the new lines Qedit stops and prints Error Already Use Renum to renumber the range of line numbers and then copy the lines from the Hold0 file See also the Hold command list holdo add 55 hold0d add from Hold file Add Copying Lines Between Files Add lines to the workfile from an external file ADD linenum f
355. tentially abort when printing the caret indicating where a string was located if the record size and display size were greater than 132 bytes and the string found was beyond 132 bytes Highlights In werelen 5 9 Qedit now recognizes files with the extension of COB and cob as Cobol files on HP UX Qedit now support long user names on HP UX 11 31 implemented by lugadmin Qedit now supports the HP UX Long Password feature on HP UX 11 31 Error messages have been improved for login issues Qedit would return a status code of 123 upon exit even if an error had not occurred Highlights In version 5 8 Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Visual Mode updates would fail with Bad format error if the length of the file was less than 52 Qedit did not recognize cpy files as being Cobol Regular Expressions Qedit would improperly report the Highlights 5 error String longer than maximum allowed if the expression specified is longer than the window of the rangelist Qedit for HP UX did not support Shadow Passwords properly for all versions of HP UX Highlights In Version 5 7 6 Highlights e MPE commands with long Info string do not cause stack corruption anymore e The Qedit for Windows server correctly returns error 90 when the modified record length is greater than the maximum allowed in the current work file A rangelist can now have an AND keyword with up to 10 search strings All strings must be found on a single
356. tfile exec cat fails List 5 find name testfile exec cat works If the syntax requires semicolons and parentheses you have to put the problematic command in a shell script and use it in the command list instead Any error causes Qedit to flush the remaining commands in the line list 505 add 1 list line 505 add just before it shut who When combining Qedit commands be certain to use the same quote character in all the commands Wrong Jed 7 T DISPLAY pay Right e7 1 DISPLAY 76 M Comments on Command Lines You may annotate Qedit commands by putting comment text in curly braces at the end of the line Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual keep sample yes update disc file Such comments are recognized at the prompt in usefiles as well as Visual s home line and Next prompt and List s More prompt Stopping Commands with Control Y You can stop most Line mode functions by pressing the Control Y key For example to stop an inadvertent List ALL use Control Y To stop the Add Modify or Replace commands use either Control Y or two slashes Implicit Commands Some commands have no alphabetic name In Line mode pressing only Return means display the next line and a backslash means display the previous line means enable Memory Lock and means disable Memory Lock In either mode means Help any line number means go to t
357. the file qeditmgr in your home directory lopt robelle help qedit This is the name of the Qedit UX help file You can override this name using Set Filename Help set filename help usr local help qedit Qedit has a Line mode and two full screen modes Visual mode and Screen mode Visual mode is designed for HP terminals such as the 700 92 PCs running an emulator such as Reflection or hpterm running on a UNIX workstation or X terminal If you are using another brand of CRT or a generic terminal emulator ANSI VT100 Visual mode will not work Screen mode is designed for VT terminals such as VT100 and VT220 Other terminal types may also work with Screen mode By default Qedit assumes that you have an HP compatible terminal However you can direct Qedit to identify your HP terminal by exporting the variable RCRTMODEL with value 2 Or you can export three variables that define the version of your terminal see Variables that Drive Qedit Variables that Drive Qedit Qedit has a number of environment variables that allow you to configure and direct the execution of Qedit These variables identify the type of HP terminal you have the default function keys the default settings for the terminal G and H straps and other options When you run Qedit it must identify the type of terminal that you are using and determine what function key labels to display Qedit does status requests to detect the model number and the current width
358. the words into lines for you Press Return once only at the end of each page of text At the end of a paragraph or any other time that you need to do an end of line type Control C and start typing the next line Do not put a space after the Control C unless you want the next line indented For a blank line press Control C twice in succession You end the Add command as always by entering Then you may use Visual or Modify to correct any typing mistakes you may have made Qedit will fill the words into lines that are less than or equal to the current Set Length value To create lines of a specific length use Set Lang Data and Set Length X Set X keyword value J justified Initially lt null gt List ON Tab OFF Local OFF Global OFF Set X configures automatic tagging of source changes in COBOL programs The syntax of Set X is as follows Set X options Qedit Commands 229 230 Qedit Commands xx dateform xx define the tag content default is a null string List ON OFF control the display of default ON tag columns Tab ON OFF allow manual editing default OFF of tag columns Local ON OFF tag value saved in default OFF workfile Global ON OFF allow use of local default OFF tags Null reset global and local tags To check on the current tag value and options use Verify X If you want all COBOL changes to be tagged all files must be have Set Lang Cobolx not Set Lang Cobol You ca
359. the workfile It uses the timestamp to determine whether the file has been modified since either the initial Text command or the last Keep command was used By default timestamp checking on Keep is enabled If you want to disable this feature type Set Keep Checktimestamp Off If you wish to see the current saved timestamp you have to use Verify Info Saved modification timestamp 2005 10 14 18 29 02 Trailing spaces in workfile are trimmed Set Keep Cobfree ON OFF Initially On Qedit uses the file extension cbl CBL cob or pco to identify COBOL source files The pco extension is typically used to identify Cobol source files that needs to be processed by the Oracle pre compiler If Qedit detects this attribute it assumes the lines have a specific format In particular it looks for the presence or absence of sequence numbers in the first six 6 columns of each line If these columns do not contain numeric digits or spaces Qedit assumes the file is a free format source file without a sequence number The file is then assigned the COBFREE language The Set Keep Cobfree option controls the format of the file when you Keep it back If this option is enabled On it means you allow Qedit to save files in the COBFREE format 1 e without sequence numbers If this option is disabled Off it means you don t want to create COBFREE files When this option is disabled Qedit converts the file to COBOL assigns it sequen
360. these 2 numbers and allows you to modify them one by one The xeq command recalls one or more commands and executes them immediately It works the same as the redo command The only difference is that you are not able to modify the commands Tab Stops The default Qedit UX tab stops are every 8 characters You can override this using Set Tabs Stop n every 2 to 15 characters If you Exit from Qedit with the tabs set to anything other than Set Tabs Stop 8 Qedit resets your terminal to the default tab stops When you Text or List a file with tab characters in it Qedit UX does not expand them to spaces If you want to edit lines containing explicit tab characters see Set Vis Tab If you want to expand tabs into spaces when Texting a file use the Expandtabs option text abcwork expandtabs Hardcoded File Names Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Some file names are hardcoded into Qedit This section describes these file names for Qedit UX lopt robelle qeditmgr This is an optional file that is designed to contain configuration commands You cannot change this file name Even if you move Qedit UX to a different directory Qedit UX still looks for opt robelle qeditmer as the default configuration file HOME qeditmgr In addition to the system wide opt robelle qeditmgr each user can have a personal optional configuration file When you invoke Running Qedit under HP UX 59 Visual Mode Qedit UX it reads commands from
361. tify in nroff and troff Uneven lines are converted into lines of about the same length Making Both Edges Even Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Justify Both is similar to Justify Format except that both the left and right edges of the text are even This is accomplished by inserting blanks between words For example justify both margin 50 rangelist Input lines The Both keyword performs a function which is equivalent to ad b adjust both in nroff and troff Uneven lines are converted into lines of exactly the same length Output lines The Both keyword performs a function which is equivalent to ad b adjust both in nroff and troff Uneven lines are converted into lines of exactly the same length Null Option Justify Null is included as an option to serve as a default If Both were the default option most of your file would be quickly formatted if you accidentally typed J 5 instead of LJ 5 Configuring the Justify Command The five options Right Center Left Format and Both and the four keywords Margin Two Indent and Withindent configure the Justify command The hierarchy of configuration values is as follows Startup default the default default overridden by SET Justify the configured default overridden by Keywords in Justify command You set your own defaults for the Justify option and keyword values using Set Justify Once you f
362. tion Notes ccccccccccccccscscccccsesesccecsceseessscsessststscsseseuesess Who Should Use These Instructions Summary of Installation Steps eeeeseereees Step 12 Og On as ROOT enere et A E E ERAEN Step 2 Create Robelle Directory iesenii arion E E EEEE Step 3s REStOre Piles ives eveies coves sie vecevensveccvnessivvoreesen EOE Step 4 Set Up PATH Optional occ ceececesceseeceeeecsteeeeeeeteeeeaeceeeeenas Step 5 Start the Qedit for Windows Server optional cceeseeeeeees Getting a Quick Start with HP Full Screen Editing MNtPOMUCH ON ss fyno ea a E EE E aleve cas sbendisestes taeda Starine Vista Mde n asein E TE E E E OTOR Sereen Layouts veces aT A R O E E E EA Home Line aroe Shades e E aid Stat s Line seseratan i R EE AAAS Text TMCS eian aaa iak Template Line sioner n e Ea S Special Indicator Columns c cece eeeeeeteeeteees Usine Yo t Keyboards pei eiere e ra nenin EAE EAEE AAEE Aa EAN cnguancee Moving the Cursor s ssessesseeseesessseesseserssressessessees Editing the Text Limes isi chacsssdnchoazssscssscerastalecusss Control Functions 25 s ciectnenes aie aes anaes Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual A E EE 7 Contents i Reflection for DOS Keyboards 0 ccceeeecceeseeeseceeeeeeeeeeseecsseenteensees 17 Other PC Keyboarder thas lett shaadi shen R tes 17 FUT CHONEK CYS 252550 dtee cece cas coca tibechcouys caves A AEA E E EAS 18 Browsing Through Your File
363. title and no page numbers However you can override this default with the Set List command Qedit Commands 143 144 Qedit Commands Listing to Attached Printer To list to a printer that is attached to your terminal use List record If you want all listings to lp to go to the attached printer do Set List Record On and then List lp Qedit will use Record mode on your terminal or PC to print on the attached printer This option opens a file named LPCRT instead of LP If you are listing to an attached printer from a terminal your terminal may remain locked after the printout is completed This generally happens when you have handshaking enabled G H straps set to No You can do a soft reset to unlock your terminal If handshaking is disabled G H straps set to Yes the List command works and returns control to the terminal but two S characters are printed on the terminal There is currently no known workaround to these problems If you have a LaserJet connected to your PC and are using Reflection you will want to Set Printer Passthru Conv No in Reflection Otherwise you will find that some characters are printing oddly such as the square block printing as a plus minus sign If you are using Reflection for Windows the above option may be called Disable Printer Translation or Use Host Character Set As well you have to select Bypass Windows Printing and disable Auto Form Feed You can combine this option with other
364. to be changed based only on the tag value So when the Justify option is used Qedit displays the complete line The user has the option to accept the changes reject the changes or manually modify the line If the user chooses to modify the line only the tag is displayed Change Changing Columns Replace some columns in some lines with a new string of characters Use Change to insert columns shift text left or shift text right CHANGE column column window string rangelist Q no display J verify Default rangelist Change replaces the target column range with the string in the lines of the rangelist You can use this to insert a string at a specified column You can also use it to replace expand or contract specified columns If you specify a single column instead of a range Qedit inserts the string before that column and shifts the rest of the line to the right You can create new columns by inserting blanks in front of a position e g change 5 If you specify a range of columns Qedit replaces that column range with the string The string may be the same length as the column range longer or shorter If the string is shorter than the column range deleted the rest of the line shifts left If longer the rest of the line Qedit Commands 101 shifts right You can remove columns entirely by changing them to a null string e g change 5 7 Examples change 5 all draw vertical line of s i
365. to create a number of files HP UX 10 0 documentation states that the following characters cannot be used as part of the file Qedit for Microsoft Windows 71 names Otherwise you can choose any name for these files as long as the names are consistent throughout the process In our example we use qedit_server You first need to create a control file in etc rc config d This file sets a control variable that will be checked by the startup script If the control variable is set to 1 the server will start if it is not equal to 1 the server will not start We will use QEDIT_SERVER as our variable name The etc rc config d qedit_server control file will now contain the following ek File etc rce config d qedit_server Qedit for Windows server configuration QEDIT SERVER Set to 1 to start Qedit for Windows server QEDIT SERVER 1 Next you need a shell script that will actually start the server You should make a copy of a file called sbin init d template cp template qedit_ server Modify the file so that it contains the necessary commands to start the server You have to change all occurrences of CONTROL VARIABLE to the variable name you used in the control file i e QEDIT_ SERVER You also need the execute command for the server program Insert this command in the section after the start string The section looks like this start source the system configuration variables
366. to place your control codes stands for the Control key even though they will not appear on your screen The first example capitalizes the r in return then replaces in error with by mistake which requires inserting the letters ke The second example inserts the word Goof and a space at the start of the line and deletes the last two words at the end of the sentence adding a final period m 13 3 a return If you do this in error displays line R by mistake codes are lt spaces gt R lt T spaces gt by mista lt B gt ke lt Return gt 3 a Return If you do this by mistake redisplays m 4 control code restores the line for you displays line Goof codes are lt B gt Goof lt T spaces gt lt D Return gt 4 Goof control code restores the line redisplays Deleting Characters Qedit Commands 157 158 Qedit Commands To delete characters from the line starting with the current column position enter the Delete control code Control D Then space to the right the number of columns to be deleted Any remaining characters in the line are left shifted to fill in the deleted columns In all cases the columns deleted are those immediately above the cursor regardless of what other functions have been performed previously on the same line The Delete function is stopped by the first nonblank character either Return a printing character to switch back into Overwrite function or an
367. to the left L D delete end If the cursor is just past the last character in the line i e you just did a L or A then the D will delete the last character of the line AE erase Erase to end of line This will erase all of the text from the cursor to the end of the line AF lt c gt find Find next occurrence of character lt c gt The cursor will be moved to the next occurrence of the Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual AF lt n gt lt c gt G goof H backspace I tab J justify AK add L lengthen M return O overwrite P lt gt lt dir gt Q query S lt c gt scan AS lt n gt lt c gt T Transparent T D delete ATAV splice character lt c gt to the right of the cursor If lt c gt is not found you will hear a beep Find nth occurrence of lt c gt where 1 lt n lt 8 Undo all current modifications Restores the line of text to its original form Note V K T D and T V cannot be undone Move back one character nondestructive Skip ahead to the next tab stop Deletes blanks from the cursor to the first nonblank does not delete that character Requests Qedit to add a line after the current line The current line will then be redisplayed for editing and you will get to edit the new line Go to end of line synonym of A Use L instead of A if you are on a Type Ahead Engine TAE Marks the end of editing a line Returns the modi
368. to the way you specify patterns by specifying the regexp keyword in a window list Robel e regexp Robelle or Robele change rR obelte reg ROBELLE robell Robele Although all regexp implementations share a basic set of metacharacters and syntax rules other tools and programs might have different extensions and variations than Qedit For example the alternation metacharacter equivalent to an or function is not provided in Qedit As the first implementation of regular expressions in Robelle products this version of Qedit might not have all the extensions you are currently familiar with We will be looking at other tools as we explore the possibility of extending our own implementation in future releases If you are interested in learning more about regular expressions you should get a copy of Mastering Regular Expressions written by Jeffrey E F Friedl and published at O Reilly amp Associates Inc This book covers most regular expression implementations the differences between each one how most regexp engines work and some tips on how to get the best performance from each type Qedit supports the following metacharacters Regular Expressions 271 272 Regular Expressions A Start of line anchor End of line anchor Matches any character Optional character Matches zero or more of the preceding character Matches one or more of the preceding character Start a character class
369. tocont Set Autocont ON OFF Qedit Commands 185 186 Qedit Commands Default ON Initially OFF Normally Qedit aborts in batch mode if errors occur Set Autocont ON disables this abort If the ON OFF parameter is omitted ON is assumed Check Set Check Delete Justify ON OFF Initially both OFF Hold Ask Causes Qedit to ask for approval before performing certain tasks Set Check Delete On asks approval before deleting more than 5 lines Set Check Justify On asks approval before formatting 1 e Justify Format or Both more than 5 lines Both options are OFF by default Set Check ON turns them both on and Set Check OFF turns them both off Or you can adjust them individually When Check Delete is ON you are asked before deleting more than five lines dq 1 10 Delete 10 lines no yes Regardless of whether Check is ON or OFF you can always undo the effects of a Delete or Justify using the Undo command CompatVarsub Set CompatVarsub ON OFF Default Off The command set Compatvarsub controls how Variable substituion acts on non MPE platforms When Compatvarsub is off the default when Qedit encounters a token that could be a variable such as list h when Qedit looks to resolve the h as a variable and h is not set as a variable the token h is returned as spaces resulting in the command being list If set Compatvarsub is on Qedit the Variable substitution will return the h
370. token as h In short if the token is not set as a variable then no substitution takes place Decimal Set Decimal ON OFF Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Default ON Initially OFF If you need to find nonprinting characters you can enable the Decimal option When this option is active character strings in Qedit can refer to characters by giving the ASCII character code in decimal preceded by an apostrophe set decimal on enable entry of control codes PAUSES DT list all lines with Bell Jo 27 all change to Escape Set Decimal ON disables use of the apostrophe as a string delimiter and the use of as part of a string in the Change command Whenever you use the apostrophe with Set Decimal On you have to use a space as a delimiter between the search string and the replacement string This means that you cannot use the abbreviated syntax as in c abc def all Qedit is able to determine that abc is the target string and def is the replacement string With Set Decimal On the space between the target string and the replacement string is mandatory Also it is possible to mix ASCII code values and regular characters Regular characters must be enclosed in another set of string delimiters For example c 27 amp d 27 amp dI all target lt ESC gt amp amp d replacement lt ESC gt amp J iL abe 1s target is abc lt CR gt 1 9 ColumnData 9 target is lt tab gt Colum
371. tom of the screen a list of keywords Type the keyword of the topic in which you re interested For example one of the keywords is Full Screen Get an introduction to full screen mode by typing gt full screen Did you notice that the Help prompt is different from Qedit s regular prompt When you asked for Help Qedit filled your screen with lists To learn about some of the commands in the list e g the Add command type the keyword gt commands and Qedit gives you some general information on the topic of commands At the bottom of the screen is a list of keywords Type the one in which you re interested gt add Qedit responds with further information You can backtrack your route and look at all the other possibilities too Pressing Return takes you back one step at a time To exit from Help press the Return key until you see the regular Qedit slash prompt again There are two commands that preserve your work Keep and Shut First invent a name for your file Naturally two files cannot have the same name The name must be a valid HP UX file name We ve been working on a temporary file To save it name it keep myfilel When you want to work on Myfilel again type text myfilel and Qedit will copy Myfile1 for you to use If you make changes to the file remember to Keep it again before you leave Qedit to make the changes a permanent part of the file Open and Shut for Instant Access Qedit 6 0 for HP
372. trol D to a different control character If you are a former MPE user you may wish to assign Control Y as your interrupt character A standard shell configuration file profile for Bourne and Korn shells and login for the C shell usually contains a line like stty erase H kill U intr C eof D swtch z To change both the end of file and interrupt character you should change the intr and eof control keys as follows stty erase H kill U intr y eof Note that the end of file signal is required by many programs Many introductory books on UNIX assume that Control D generates an end of file You have to remember to now use Control E at least Control E is easy to remember since end of file starts with the letter E Qeditmgr Configuration Files Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual When you run Qedit it automatically uses two configuration files if they exist opt robelle qeditmgr and qeditmgr in your home directory The system manager usually creates opt robelle qeditmgr and puts Qedit commands in it to set Qedit options To check the options for your site List this file Running Qedit under HP UX 53 If you want a personal Qeditmegr file create the file qeditmgr in your home directory This file is in addition to the global Qeditmegr file which is always executed first Default Set Commands Qedit treats the Qeditmegr file exactly like a usefile so Qeditmgr can include any Qedit commands
373. ual D DD Delete line or block of text H HH Hold a line or block of text HJ Append block of text to Hold file JJ Justify a block of text Z ZZ Mark a line or block of text Pasting Operations A Insert text after this line or use F for following B Insert text before this line or P for preceding AH Insert Hold file after this line or use FH BH Insert Hold file before this line or use PH AO Insert Hold file after this line or F0 BO Insert Hold0 file before this line or PO A line to be replicated after itself R Rn A line or block to be replicated n times max 9 See Copying a Block of Text below Display Enhanced When the cut and paste task is partly defined Qedit highlights the indicated lines and adds a warning to the status line Resetting Cut and Paste You can cancel a pending cut and paste task if you have not pressed the final Enter by entering a period in the gt line and pressing F7 gt F7 Copying a Block of Text Paste One Copy at a Time Suppose you want to copy a section of text from one place in your file to another Here is one way to do it First locate the screen containing the start of the block that you want to copy using a string search via the home line Move the cursor down to the first line you want to copy then press Cursor Left twice and type CC in the blank columns provided Press Enter and you should see that line highlighted in inverse video Getti
374. uess what you meant Account Set Account accountname Initially same as the Qedit program This option does not apply to Qedit UX It is still accepted for compatibility with the MPE version of Qedit Alias Set Alias aliasname To aliasdefinition Qedit commands have priority over any external commands such as shell commands and scripts The fact that Qedit commands can be abbreviated to a few characters e g C for Change and combined with various suffixes e g CQ for Change Quiet has caused some problems with seemingly different external commands The new Set Alias command now allows you to override Qedit s command priority Aliases are always executed first For example at Qedit Commands 183 184 Qedit Commands is the abbreviation for Qedit s AddTemplate command i e add new lines with a column template If you want to use the UNIX at command you can get at it only by explicitly using the exclamation mark prefix at Using the Alias feature you can now use Set Alias at to lat From that point on entering at would always call the shell command The alias name and definition must be enclosed in a string delimiter such as quotes You must use the same delimiter for both items Set Alias SPJ ils home joe spj valid Set Alias SPJ ls home joe spj valid Set Alias SPJ ls home joe spj invalid Set Alias SPJ Ils home joe spj invalid The alias name can have u
375. ugh you can configure the display width manually 62 Running Qedit under HP UX Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual You need an X windows server A Unix Linux workstation usually have this or you can download and install one of the existing X window systems available for Microsoft Windows such as X win32 from Starnet Communications www starnet com or Winaxe from LabF com If you are not already familiar with hpterm you should be able to start hpterm with usr bin X11 hpterm display 192 168 0 1 0 0 1s where 192 168 0 1 is your PC s IP address The Is argument requests that etc profile and profile be executed so your environment is set as if you used login When RCRTMODEL is set to 1234 before you run Qedit Qedit functions in the following way 1 It accepts hpterm as an hp terminal that is capable of more than 80 columns of display memory and of doing full screen mode At the moment hpterm cannot support the line mode Visual strategy for HP UX 11 Blockemulation Qedit actually accepts any hp terminal emulator without question so this option may be useful with other emulators 2 Ifyou set RCRTWIDTH to some value between 81 and 256 Qedit accepts it as the manually set display width 3 Ifyou do not set RCRTWIDTH Qedit attempts to sense the current display width of hpterm and sets the jew itself The maximum width is 256 columns Qedit can support up to 999 columns but in these
376. umber of full words of blanks before the data 16 bit word As well as its own workfiles Qedit recognizes external files of other formats in List file Add 5 file Text file etc When Qedit opens an external file it determines the language of the source program in that file according to the following chart Files with a cbl cob CBL or pco extension are treated as COBOL source files In this case Qedit does not assume there is a sequence number in the first 6 columns it checks the first 5 lines of the file The pco extension is typically used to identify Cobol source files that needs to be processed by the Oracle pre compiler If the lines contain only numeric digits in these columns Qedit assumes the file contains sequence numbers and uses them appropriately These numbers are written back to the file when a Keep command is executed If the lines only contain spaces in these columns Qedit assumes the file is unnumbered and automatically assigns numbers during the Text File Formats 267 268 File Formats operation If some of the lines have a sequence number already this number is replaced with Qedit s calculated number When the file is saved the sequence numbers are replaced by spaces If the first 6 columns do not contain either numeric digits or spaces Qedit assumes the file is free format and assigns it line numbers in the same way that numbers are assigned to Text files The file format might c
377. uprtool prints new line lt Return gt end Modify Each time you press Return Modify applies your changes to the line and prints the new result This cycle continues until you enter only a Return no more edits You use nonprinting Control codes for editing such as Control D to delete For visual feedback do Set Mod Qzmod which puts your cursor right on top of the line and responds to each Control code by revising the image on the screen i e Control D actually makes the character disappear from the screen If you would prefer to use MPE style edits D I R U instead of Control Codes do Set Mod HP to reconfigure Modify To force the line number onto a separate line use Set Mod Prompt OFF Examples modify 5 modify from line 5 until Y or end find corelate m find spelling error and modify line mod q flag modify all lines with q flag Getting into Modify Mode There are other commands that invoke Modify mode in Qedit e Change when a line overflows or you use CJ e Add when you use the auto modify character from Set Zip e Before so that you can revise and redo a previous command Qedit Commands 155 156 Qedit Commands e Redo also enables you to revise and redo a previous command Edit Functions of Modify Here are the edit functions of Modify and their Control codes which may be changed with the Set Modify command Function Key Purpose Overwrite Control O Replace character
378. ve record structures that are similar to typical files on MPE Bytestream files come from the UNIX environment To application programs they simply appear as a stream of bytes hence the name To MPE these are variable length files in which each record contains only one byte When a Text command is used on an existing bytestream file Qedit is able to recognize the file and preserve its attributes on a Keep command To create a new bytestream file you have to use Set Keep Bytestream On Because bytestream is sort of an extension to variable length files these two options are closely linked If you use Set Keep Bytestream On the Variable option is also enabled If you use Set Keep Bytestream Off the Variable option is also disabled If you use Set Keep Variable Off the Bytestream option is also disabled You can still enable Variable by itself without enabling Bytestream Set Keep CCTL ON OFF Initially OFF Ordinary ASCII files have the CCTL value OFF When CCTL is ON the first column of each record must contain a carriage control value Some of the common values are 1 for new page for overprint and for normal single space When Qedit prints a file with CCTL in quiet mode i e no line numbers and no template it interprets the carriage control values Set Keep Checktimestamp ON OFF Initially ON Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit stores the file modification timestamp in
379. will compare the stored value with the file s current timestamp If they are different it means that the original file has changed either since you last worked on it or since the last time you saved your changes Qedit will alert you to the difference by displaying a message similar to the following Qedit Commands 171 Warning Original file has been modified since the initial Text or last Keep The file timestamp can change for a number of reasons Here are few examples e Someone else might have been working on that same file with Qedit and saved their changes before you did e The file could have been restored e Maybe you used the file to test a program which modified the file in some way Because the timestamp message is just a warning Qedit continues its processing However if you want to be sure you are not missing important data you should compare the contents of the file with your workfile and decide if it is safe to continue editing your copy This is one way to compare the files e Use Verify Keep and write down the default Keep name e Keep the workfile under a different name e Use our Compare bonus program to display the differences between the original file and the new version you just created e Look at the report and separate the lines that you changed from the ones you did not touch e Ifneeded apply changes to your copy so that you do not miss anything important It is important to remember that
380. will have to use the shell script approach Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Function Key Set Alias Fkey keynumber To aliasdefinition You can also assign an alias definition to a function key Let s say you want the F1 key to perform a series of commands simply enter Set Alias Fkey 1 to ls home joe The function key number can only have a value of 1 through 8 The function key aliases only work in Line mode In full screen mode they are redefined to the standard Visual meanings You can define function keys by specifying the escape sequence they transmit For example the F1 key sends ESC P Thus you could use Set Decimal On Set Alias 27 p To ls home joe 27 is the ASCII code Ignorecase Set Alias Ignorecase ON OFF Default On Initially Off On HP UX alias names are case sensitive by default i e spj and SPJ are not the same You can disable sensitivity with Set Alias Ignorecase On in which case spj is considered the same as SPJ Trace Set Alias Trace ON OFF Default On Initially Off If you are nesting aliases and are experiencing problems you can enable the alias trace with Set Alias Trace On Qedit then displays aliases as it executes them Remove Set Alias aliasname OFF If you want to remove a single alias you can use Set Alias SPJ Off Reset Set Alias Reset If you want to remove all your current aliases enter Set Alias Reset Au
381. with Line Mode Editing 41 With the commands Find and Findup you can go to the next consecutive location of a string Find searches the file from your current location to the end Findup searches backwards from where you are to the beginning So in order to search a file for a date scattered throughout it type Or search back through the file with findup January 18 Qedit displays the next line containing January 18 To search again for the same string just type Find or Findup You can abbreviate Find to F and Findup to To search for a different string just type F new string Editing Lines Suppose you want to change the date of your memo You could do it the slow way first deleting the line then adding a replacement line with the new date But instead of all that retyping try the Modify command Modify has a lot of power Here s how to use it 1 Type M and the line number 2 Qedit displays the line and you move along on the line below it by pressing the space bar Stop at the point where you want to make your correction 4 Type in the change to be inserted and press Return Qedit displays the entire corrected line for your approval Make another correction if you want and when satisfied press Return again to accept the corrected line and get back to the slash prompt An example sth 2 1 DATE November 18 2000 9 move with the space bar press Return 2 1 DATE November 19 2
382. ws add 20 000 to the value in your RPCVERSION variable In some versions of terminal emulators you have to explicitly tell the software which type of graphics adaptor you have You need to refer to your computer manual or use the MSD utility program included with newer versions of DOS and Windows The RCRTMODEL variable is also useful for controlling 132 column mode Qcterm emulates a 700 92 terminal and can have a display width of 80 132 or 200 columns Qedit takes advantage of these widths when necessary Wordwrap Set Visual Wordwrap ON OFF Default Off The Set Vis Wordwrap option enables wordwrap for new lines This makes Visual mode much better for entering memos and documentation If you have Reflection 4 00 for DOS or Reflection 5 0 for Windows Set Vis Wordwrap allows you to keep typing at the end of your line There is no need to press Return The overflow words will automatically be moved to the following line Words will not be split arbitrarily The Reflection Wordwrap feature only works when entering new lines It does not work with INS CHAR Because it does not work in Line mode Qedit enables and disables it as you enter and exit Visual The Reflection configuration setting called Force 80 Columns must be set to No for Wordwrap to work properly If you cannot turn off this setting for compatibility with other software then try Set Visual Widen Off in Qedit XX Set Visual XX startline endline Default reset
383. xamples use fixspell execute a list of Changes ch reveiw review commands are printed ch corelate correlate use 30 rangelist last file use last Open workfile Juse fixit 2 5 do lines 2 5 only use compile extfile do lines with string See the Q command for a sample usefile that compiles Notes The Use command temporarily redirects Qedit s command input device reading commands from a file The same features and restrictions apply to the commands in a usefile as would apply to commands typed on the terminal For example a command cannot be continued from one line to the next usefiles do not accept parameters etc The usefile can be of any file type allowed in Text or Add Although Qedit allows nested usefiles you cannot have nested loops If the usefile does not exist UJ suppresses the error message that would be printed allowing optional Use commands in Qeditmgr files 246 Qedit Commands Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Verify Command V Prints the status of Qedit the current workfile and Set options VERIFY ALL keyword Default show nonstandard options The default is to show the options which are not in their default state Verify All shows every Set option in the exact form that Qedit accepts the shortest form is shown in uppercase The keywords may be any Set option or Alias Exit Proc Prog Run String Lastfile Visual Version Z for Zave or ZZ for th
384. xits from Reflection transmit exit M wait 0 01 00 for no transmit yes M wait 0 01 00 for transmit exit M wait 0 01 00 for terminated gt wait 0 00 05 hardexit Also see the chapter Qedit Issues and Solutions for more information 178 Qedit Commands Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Renumber Command REN Renumbers a range of lines or the entire workfile RENUM firstline maxincr startline stopline maxincr Default entire file from 1 0 by current increment If you specify a range of lines e g 101 102 Qedit spreads out the line numbers in that range to allow as much space as possible between each line The numbers of the startline and stopline are not changed If you do not specify a range Qedit renumbers the entire file starting at 1 0 or from the optional startline value If you specify a maxincr value Renum will attempt to renumber with that increment If it must use a smaller value it will print a warning If you do not specify a maxincr value Renum attempts to use the current Set Increment value which defaults to 1 0 except for standard COBOL which is 0 1 Examples ren assign new numbers to all lines jlist 10 1 show current line numbers 10 The Renumber command 10 2 has two basic modes 10721 1 renumber an entire file t0 lt 2 Eh 2 spread out a range of lines 11 to make room for new lines add 10 21 attempt to add a line Out of line numbers Sugges
385. y visual e g Crt 7009 Col 132 Qedit takes advantage of any features that it finds such as widening display memory enabling wordwrap if you have done Set Vis Wordwrap On enabling Limited Immediates in block mode resetting display memory to the width it had at startup etc Instead of setting RCRTMODEL to 2 you can set it to the actual terminal ID number such as 2392 RCRTMODEL can have any of these values fo Assume dat you ae using a 2392 siyle HP terminal _ 1234 This terminal or emulator is not fully compatible with an HP terminal 2392 etc This is a newer HP terminal with labels 2393 2397 This terminal can have up to 160 columns of display 7009 A 700 9x terminal with 132 column ability You would also set the RPCVERSION and RCRTWIDTH variables to describe the rest of your terminal s attribute When you use rcertmodel1 2 you don t set RPCVERSION or RCRTWIDTH Qedit does not update your environment variables with the identity that it finds since a child process cannot change the parent s environment on HP UX Type 1234 Terminal or Emulator Set the RCRTMODEL to 1234 if the terminal or emulator you are using does not support all the standard HP terminal features For example you should use this setting with hpterm hpterm is a UNIX terminal emulator running under the X window system It s a basic 2392 emulator hpterm will not identify itself to Qedit nor let Qedit change the display width by Escape sequence altho
386. your file the template starts with the Left margin column and ends with the Right margin column set left 20 set right 41 it users is so easy th Browsing or List Jumping Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual When you add J to List it means list jumping This lists the lines specified but stops every 23 lines this pause is handy at 19 2K baud Browse quickly throughout a file viewing as much or as little of each section as you like The default rangelist for ListJ is Last and ListJ linenum means start jumping at Jinenum You can go into Browse mode quickly from Line mode by using the function keys Press F6 to start browsing at the current line press F5 to browse starting back a page and press F2 to roll the screen forward a few lines before starting to browse At the end of each screen ListJ prompts you for what to do next and waits for your reply If the user presses Return or F6 or types yes Qedit displays the next screen If the user presses F8 or Control Y or types no Qedit stops the listing If the user types a line number a string or a relative line count e g 50 5 or presses F2 F3 F4 or F5 Qedit moves to a new location within the file When you enter any command Qedit stops the listing returns to Command mode and executes the command When you are on an HP terminal ListJ enhances and erases the line with the what to do next prompt You can combine Lis
387. ype at the end of the line and Qedit redisplays the line for you to modify When you are done with the Modify you press Return to continue adding new lines Miscellaneous Points to Note If you have Set Left Right margins the new lines added will have spaces to the left and right of the margins That is the line you enter will be left justified within the current margins of the workfile The maximum default increment between new lines is 1 0 or 0 1 for standard COBOL files You can change this default with Set Increment You can ask Qedit to remove nonprinting characters from your input lines using Set Editinput Data ON If you do not wish to allow the extended Roman 8 characters use Set Editinput Data ON Extend OFF Add Adding a String as a Line Add one new line with the text coming from a string in the command itself This is handy when you need some literal text within a User Command or Use file but don t want to create a temporary file to hold it ADD linenum string Q no linenums J justified T template Default dinenum The inenum parameter specifies where to insert the new line containing the string Examples Add Copying Lines within a File Add lines by copying duplicates of existing lines ADD linenum rangelist Q no display Defaults none Qedit 6 0 for HP UX User Manual Qedit Commands 89 90 Qedit Commands The inenum parameter tells Qedit where to insert the copied line

User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents